JP6670524B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In general, a conventional gaming machine is capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a change display of a symbol executed based on establishment of a start condition has a predetermined special result.

  In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which an effect symbol is displayed on a display means and a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol is executed during the variable display of the symbol (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-073377 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for improvement in the display content of the display means, and there is a problem that the interest in the game is low.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the present invention provides a game system in which a change in a symbol (special symbol) executed based on establishment of a starting condition (ball entry of a game ball into a starting port) becomes a predetermined special result. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the game state, a game state control means (mainly a game state control means (main) capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state The control board 101) and the display means (the image display device 14) display the effect symbol, and the variable effect execution means (the variable effect executing means (executable) capable of executing the variable effect accompanying the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol. Effect control board 102, image control board 105), and a special effect symbol displayed on the display means, and a special variation capable of executing the variation display of the special effect symbol in response to the execution of the variation display of the symbol. table Means (effect control board 102, image control board 105), and controlling the effect mode for executing the variable effect to one of a plurality of effect modes (effect modes A0 to A3, B1 to B2 in FIG. 106). Effect mode control means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) that is capable of performing the following operations. The effect mode in the normal game state includes at least a first effect mode (effect mode A1 in FIG. 106). The production mode in the specific game state includes at least a second production mode (any one of production modes B1 and B2 in FIG. 106), and the variable production execution unit performs the production in the first production mode. The symbols are displayed in a first display mode (the first display mode of FIG. 107), and the effect symbols are different from the first display mode in the second effect mode. In the second display mode (the fourth display mode in FIG. 108), when the game machine returns from the power-off state and is controlled to the first effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode. On the other hand, when the display is controlled to the second effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode, and the identification information of the effect symbol is common numerical information (“1” in FIGS. 107 and 108). "3""5"), and the type of the display pattern of the effect symbol in the normal game state (figure 4) is more than the type of the display pattern of the effect symbol in the specific game state (fourth display mode of FIG. 108). 107, the number of the special variation display means is increased, and when the game machine returns from the power-off of the gaming machine, when the control is switched to the first effect mode, Before and when it is controlled to stage 2 The identification information of the special effect symbol is common numerical information ("1", "3", "5" in FIGS. 107 and 108), and the effect symbol is the variable display displayed in the first display mode. In the second display mode, than the total number of types that can be derived inside (9 types of normal effect symbols indicating any number from 1 to 9; 2 types of changing symbols; 1 type of pseudo continuous symbol) It is characterized in that the total number of types that can be derived during the displayed variable display (9 types of normal effect symbols indicating any number from 1 to 9) is smaller .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to improve the interest of a game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is a partial perspective view of a game machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A-1) is a diagram illustrating a jackpot determination table for a first special symbol, (a-2) is a diagram illustrating a jackpot determination table for a second special symbol, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a reach determination table. . FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table for jackpot winning, and FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table for loss. (A) is a figure showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing a long winning game big winning opening opening / closing control table, and (c) is a figure showing a short winning game big winning opening / closing control table. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special figure change pattern judgment table in the non-time saving game state. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table in the time saving game state. (A) is a diagram illustrating a hit determination table for a normal symbol, (b) is a diagram illustrating a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a diagram illustrating a normal symbol variation pattern determination table, and (d) is a determination of auxiliary game reference data. FIG. 7E is a diagram illustrating a table, FIG. 7E is a diagram illustrating an auxiliary game control table, and FIG. 7F is a diagram illustrating a second start-up opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration of a special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM, (b) is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage section of the special symbol holding storage area, (c) is a diagram of a normal symbol holding storage area of the main RAM. FIG. 3D is a diagram illustrating a configuration, and FIG. 4D is a diagram illustrating a configuration of each storage unit of a normal symbol holding storage area. 6 is a flowchart illustrating main processing in a main control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process in a main control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows a winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the big hit game end processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol storage determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol change process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an auxiliary game processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing in the production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows up to the middle of the command analysis processing in the effect control board. 35 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the command analysis processing in FIG. 34. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information update process in an effect control board. It is a flow chart which shows up to the middle of the processing at the time of the start opening prize in the effect control board. 38 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the start-up winning process shown in FIG. 37. It is a flowchart which shows the icon display form scenario determination process for a fanning effect non-execution in an effect control board. It is a flow chart which shows the production mode setting processing in the production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect design stop display pattern determination processing in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead zone effect start determination processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the variable effect pattern determination processing in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effect determination processing in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the icon change notice determination processing in an effect control board. It is a flow chart which shows the look-ahead zone production end processing in the production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the game information display control processing in the effect control board. (A) is a figure showing the structure of the production information reservation storage area of the sub RAM, (b) is a figure showing the structure of each storage part of the production information reservation storage area. It is a figure showing an example of a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a final number of people judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of a zone precursor effect scenario judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for pre-reading zone effect execution. It is a figure showing an example of a handshake meeting notice execution judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of the icon final display mode determination table for handshake announcement. It is a figure showing an example of the dialog frequency judgment table for handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake announcement. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing an example of the icon final display form determination table for normal use. It is a figure showing an example of a normal icon display mode scenario determination table. It is a figure explaining the normal mode, the 1st special mode, and the 2nd special mode which are the display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special modes 11-35 which are display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special modes 41-65 which are display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 4th special modes 11-24, 31, and 41 which are display modes of an icon. It is a figure showing an example of an effect mode determination table. FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for effect mode A, and FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for effect of zone stimulating effect. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode A (at the time of non-execution of the zone indication effect and the pre-reading zone effect). (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variable effect pattern determination table for effect mode A (when executing a zone boost failure effect 1), and (b) is a variable effect pattern determination table for effect mode A (zone boost failure effect 2) FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example). It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuating effect pattern determination table for effect mode A (at the time of executing the zone-raising success effect). It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode A (during execution of the look-ahead zone effect). It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for effect mode B. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for effect mode C. (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation effect determination table for effect mode A, (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation effect determination table for effect mode B, and (c) is an operation effect for effect mode C. It is a figure showing an example of a judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of the operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern A8 referred to in the effect mode A. It is a figure showing an example of the operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern B4 referred to in the effect mode B. It is a figure showing an example of the operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern C4 referred in the effect mode C. It is a figure showing an example of a promotion image. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the image display device in various game states. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the non-simulation normal fluctuation production in production mode A. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the short fluctuation | variation effect without simulation in effect mode A. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the 1st SP reach fluctuation production in production mode A. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the normal fluctuation effect without simulation in effect mode B. (A) is a figure showing the example of a display of the frustration effect performed during normal reach, (b) is a figure showing the example of a display of the operation effect performed during normal reach. (A) is a figure showing the example of a display of the operation effect performed during SPSP reach, (b) is a figure showing the example of a display of the operation effect performed during SPSP reach. It is a figure showing the production flow of the handshake announcement. It is a figure showing the production flow of throwing kiss notice. (A-1) is a time chart for explaining the production flow of the zone promotion effect and the look-ahead zone production (when the zone promotion effect is executed with a 4-second variable production), and (a-2) is the zone promotion effect and the look-ahead. A time chart for explaining an effect flow of a zone effect (in the case where a zone-inducing effect is executed in a variable effect of 8 seconds), (b-1) is a display pattern of an effect symbol in a zone-inducing successful effect (a variable effect of 4 seconds) (B-2) is a display pattern of an effect design in the zone-inducing failure effect 1 (the zone-inducing failure effect 1 is a 4-second variable effect). (C-1) is a relation between the stop of the special symbol and the change of the display mode of the icon (4 seconds fluctuating effect, and the zone-inducing success effect is executed). (C-2) illustrates the relationship between the stop of the special symbol and the change in the display mode of the icon (in the case where the zone-boosting failure effect 1 is executed with a 4-second fluctuation effect). It is a time chart for. It is a figure showing a situation before a handshake meeting notice occurs. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a hold icon to be notified of a handshake event is displayed in the third special mode 11, and (b) is a hold icon displayed before the hold icon to be notified of a handshake event. In which the display mode has changed to the third special mode 31, (c) is a view illustrating the appearance of a handshake event site related to the handshake event notice, and (d) is a handshake character and escort according to the handshake event notice. It is a figure showing the situation that the character appeared. It is a figure showing signs that a hold icon used as a handshake meeting notice is waiting. It is a figure showing signs that a hold icon used as a handshake meeting notice is waiting. It is a figure showing signs that a handshake meeting notice is being performed. It is a figure showing signs that a handshake meeting notice is being performed. (A) is a figure showing a situation just before the end of the handshake event, and (b) and (c) are views showing a situation after the end of the handshake event. It is a figure showing signs that a hold icon changes from a normal mode to the 2nd special mode 13. (A) is a diagram showing a situation before a throwing kiss notice is performed, (b) is a diagram showing a situation in which a character related to the throwing kiss notice appears, and (c) is a character showing the character relating to the throwing kiss notice for a heart. It is a figure showing signs that it flew toward the icon. (A) shows a state in which a heart hits an icon to be thrown kiss notice, and (b) shows a state in which the display mode of the icon is changed by the throw kiss notice and the change is reported. FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating a state after the throwing kiss notice has ended. (A) is a diagram showing a situation before a throwing kiss notice is performed, (b) is a diagram showing a situation in which a character related to the throwing kiss notice appears, and (c) is a character showing the character relating to the throwing kiss notice for a heart. It is a figure showing signs that it flew toward the icon. (A) shows a state in which a heart hits an icon to be thrown kiss notice, and (b) shows a state in which the display mode of the icon is changed by the throw kiss notice and the change is reported. FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating a state after the throwing kiss notice has ended. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a state before the zone precursor effect is executed, and (c) and (d) are states in which the zone precursor effect according to the third special mode 41 is displayed. FIG. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing a state in which the icon display mode is executing the zone indication effect according to the third special mode 4, and (c) is a view in which the icon display mode is the third special mode 5 and the third special mode. It is a figure showing signs that a zone sign effect by mode 2 (a look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode) is being performed. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the display mode of the icon is a zone precursor effect according to the third special mode 2 (a look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode), and the look-ahead symbols constituting the zone-inducing effect are temporarily stopped. In (b), the display mode of the icon is the third special mode 2 (the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode), the zone indication effect is being executed, and the look-ahead symbol and the zone symbol constituting the zone-inducing effect are temporarily stopped. FIG. 7C shows a state in which the indication of the icon is in the third special mode 2 (the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode), a zone indication effect is being executed, and a look-ahead symbol, a zone symbol, and a rush that constitute a zone-inducing effect. It is a figure showing signs that a symbol is temporarily stopped. In (a), the display mode of the icon is the zone special effect in the third special mode 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggesting mode), and the pre-reading symbol, the zone pattern, and the rushing symbol constituting the zone-inducing effect are stopped. FIGS. 7B and 7C show a state in which the icon is displayed in the zone display effect according to the third special mode 3 (read-ahead zone notification effect mode) and that the icon is a pre-read zone. It is a figure showing signs that a zone background image is displayed. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a zone notification effect according to a third special mode 3 (a look-ahead zone effect notification mode) is displayed and a look-ahead zone background image indicating that the icon is a look-ahead zone is displayed. . (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a zone notification effect is being performed according to a third special mode 3 (look-ahead zone effect notification mode) in which the icon display mode is being performed. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of the production mode judgment table of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of a display for every production mode in a normal game state. It is a figure showing the example of a display of every production mode in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the fluctuation effect in effect mode A1. It is a figure showing an example of a display when an effect mode changes during a normal game state. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a display example subsequent to that of FIG. 110. It is a figure showing an example of a display of a fluctuation effect in a normal game state. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating a display example subsequent to that of FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating a display example subsequent to that of FIG. 112. It is a figure showing a display example at the time of shifting to a specific game state. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the fluctuation effect in a specific game state. FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating a display example subsequent to FIG. 116. FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating a display example subsequent to FIG. 116. It is a figure showing an example of a display when an effect mode changes during a specific game state. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the last fluctuation effect in a specific game state. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a display example subsequent to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a display example subsequent to FIG. 120.

(1st Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y has a game board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame Y1, and a game area 2A in which a game ball flows down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facilities of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism H at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported around the hinge mechanism H. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door with the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the front area of the game area 2A and the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 visibly covers the front portion of the game area 2A with glass (transparent member) attached from the back side to a window provided in the center.

  At the other end of the glass door Y2, a lock mechanism R for fixing the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided. The fixation by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y2 is provided with a receiving tray 50 for storing a plurality of game balls, and a launch operation device 3 which can be operated to fire the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a launch device 4 (see FIG. 3) capable of launching a game ball toward the game area 2A. The launching device 4 is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the launching device 4.

  The firing operation device 3 has a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, and a firing handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31. The firing device 4 fires a game ball with an intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 (hereinafter, referred to as “game ball firing intensity”).

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a game ball are disposed immediately below a special winning opening 8 described later. A guide member 29D having a guide path that can be guided to the second starting port 7 formed on the upper surface is provided.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into a substantially central portion of the game board 2. The image display device 14 composed of a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. At the inner end of the decorative frame 29A, a production accessory device 17 is provided.

  The inner rail member 29B is arranged outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is arranged outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired at a predetermined game ball firing intensity rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. Note that a plurality of nails and windmills are provided in the game area 2A. The game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of general winning ports 11 are provided. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detection sensor 11a. When the general winning opening detection sensor 11a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. (Game value is given).

  A winning gate 10 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The winning gate 10 is provided with a winning gate detection sensor 10a for detecting a game ball. Under the condition that the winning gate detection sensor 10a detects a game ball, a normal symbol lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game advantageous to the player. Details of the ordinary symbol lottery will be described later.

  At the lower part of the game area 2A, below the image display device 14, there is provided a first starting port 6 which is invariable and can always enter the ball. The first starting port 6 is provided with a first starting port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game (special game) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the first starting port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball. Details of the first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first starting port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

  Immediately below the first starting port 6, a variable second starting port 7 is provided. The second starting port 7 is controlled by the second starting port control device 70 into one of a basic mode (closed mode) or a special mode (open mode) in which winning is not possible. The second starting port 7 is also provided with a second starting port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game (special game) that is advantageous to the player on condition that the second starting port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. The details of the second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second starting port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

  The second starting port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The ordinary movable piece 70A is formed of a rectangular door member, and usually stops (except for a predetermined condition being satisfied) in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting port 7 is closed. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70A constitutes a basic aspect of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ordinary movable piece 70A pivots forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the second starting port 7. The second starting port 7 is controlled to a special mode in which the ball can enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the normal movable piece 70A opens the second starting port 7, it is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second starting port control device 70 is that it is determined to execute the auxiliary game in the above-described ordinary symbol lottery.

  Downstream of the winning gate 10, a variable big winning opening 8 is provided. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which no winning is possible or a special mode in which a winning is possible. The special winning opening 8 is provided with a special winning opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the special winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (game value is given).

  The special winning opening control device 80 includes a special movable piece 80A that can be rotated and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a driving unit that rotates the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is formed of a rectangular door member, and usually stops (except for a predetermined condition being satisfied) in a state where the surface thereof is flush with the game area 2A, and the special winning opening 8 is played. The ball is closed so that it cannot be entered. The closing of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A forms a basic aspect of the special winning opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward around the rotation axis formed at the lower end, thereby opening the large winning opening 8 so that game balls can enter. The opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. When the special movable piece 80A opens the special winning opening 8, the special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and be guided to the special winning opening 8.

  The predetermined condition for the special winning opening control device 80 is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special symbol lottery”). ) Is determined to execute a special game (big hit game).

  On the surface of the game board 2 and below the game area 2A, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21 and a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol holding device A hold display device including a display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays a result of a first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 6. The second special symbol display device 21 includes: This is a variable display device that displays a result of a second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  The first special symbol lottery is a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the special figure determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 6, and a result of the jackpot determination. This means that a special symbol determination for determining the type of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 is performed. In addition, the second special symbol lottery means that it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won based on special map determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 7 or the second special symbol display. This means that the type of special symbol to be displayed on the device 21 is determined. In other words, each special symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and displays the result of the first special symbol lottery after a predetermined time has elapsed. A stop display is performed. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 21 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and a second special symbol lottery for notifying the result of the second special symbol lottery after a predetermined time has elapsed. A stop display of the symbol is performed.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line. In the variation display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21 moves and blinks at a predetermined interval. In the special symbol stop display, a specific LED representing the result of each special symbol lottery is lit.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays a result of a normal symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball passes through the winning gate 10. Ordinary symbol lottery is a process of determining whether or not a winning has been won based on general symbol determination information obtained based on the passage of a game ball to the winning gate 10 or a normal symbol display device based on the result of the hit determination. Ordinary symbol determination for determining the type of the ordinary symbol to be displayed on the display 22 is performed. In other words, it can be said that the ordinary symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute an auxiliary game advantageous to the player.

  When the ordinary symbol lottery is performed, the ordinary symbol variation display is performed on the ordinary symbol display device 22, and after a predetermined time elapses, the ordinary symbol stop display for notifying the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is performed.

  For example, the symbol display device 22 usually includes a plurality of LEDs. In the variable display of the normal symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the normal symbol stop display, a specific LED representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is lit.

  By the way, even when a game ball enters the start-up openings 6 and 7 during a special symbol change display or a jackpot game (special game) in which the special winning opening control device 80 operates, the special symbol change display is immediately performed. It does not mean that the result of the special symbol lottery is performed. That is, the change display of the special symbol may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a certain condition, an upper limit is set for the number of special symbols that can be changed and displayed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit is set to “4” for each of the starting ports 6 and 7. In other words, up to four rights to execute the special symbol change display can be reserved for each of the starting ports 6 and 7.

  The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the number of holds (U1: hereinafter, referred to as "first special figure hold number") of the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "first special figure change display"). I do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the number of holds (U2: hereinafter, referred to as “second special figure hold number”) of the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “second special figure change display”). I do. Each of the first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turns on a predetermined LED according to the number of each hold.

  Similarly, the variable display of ordinary symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "variable display of ordinary symbols") also has an upper limit number of holdings set to 4, and the number of holdings (G: hereinafter, referred to as "number of ordinary symbols holding"). ) Is normally displayed on the symbol holding display device 25. The normal symbol holding display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turns on a predetermined LED according to the number of ordinary symbols held.

  Further, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device includes an image display device 14, an audio output device 15, an effect lighting device 16, and an effect accessory device 17. The image display device 14 and the production accessory device 17 are provided on the game board 2, and the audio output device 15 and the production lighting device 16 are provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs an effect display using images by displaying various still images and moving images according to the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14. However, a display device of another type such as a plasma display or an organic EL display may be used.

  The effect accessory device 17 includes a movable portion 17A, and performs an effect by operation by operating the movable portion 17A. The sound output device 15 performs sound effects by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 performs an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of light from each lamp.

  Further, the saucer 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 and a selection button device 19 that function as input devices for performing operations related to various effects described below.

  The effect button device 18 has an effect button 18A that can be operated, an effect button detection switch 18a for detecting an operation on the effect button 18A, and a normal position (normal state) where the effect button 18A protrudes above the normal position. An effect button drive motor 18b for moving (changing) to the position (projected state) is provided (see FIGS. 2 and 3). In addition, a light emitting element (full color LED, lamp, etc.) for causing the effect button 18A to emit light in a predetermined mode is also provided.

  The selection button device 19 includes an operable selection button 19A and a selection button detection switch 19a for detecting an operation on the selection button 19A (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Further, a light emitting element (a full-color LED, a lamp, or the like) for causing the selection button 19A to emit light in a predetermined mode is also provided.

  The selection button 19A includes an up button 191A, a left button 192A, a down button 193A, and a right button 194A. Each of the buttons 191A to 194A is provided so as to be able to be pressed while protruding from the tray 50.

  The effect device executes various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a variable effect (special figure lottery effect) performed by the image display device 14 based on the results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The fluctuating effect (special figure lottery effect) is performed with a fluctuating display of the effect symbol and a stop display of the effect symbol.

  The fluctuation display of the effect symbol is performed in response to the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol fluctuates in a predetermined manner for a predetermined time. The stop display of the effect symbol is performed in correspondence with the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, when the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol are collectively referred to as “effect symbol display”). In the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol stops for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode representing the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The effect symbols are, for example, three columns of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (for example, numerals from “1” to “9”) arranged in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Effect symbols) and three special effect symbols TZ4 (effect symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”) arranged in the end region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. In the variation display of the effect symbols, the effect symbols in each row move from top to bottom (variable display) as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the mode of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is not limited to this. In addition, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, and a movie are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery during the effect symbol change display.

  On the other hand, in the stop display of the effect symbols, in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140 such as the image display device 14, the above-mentioned three rows of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped and temporarily stopped, and then displayed. In the side area, the special effect symbols TZ4 in the three rows are stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on a predetermined effective line (for example, the horizontal line at the center of the display unit 140) when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the stop display of the special effect symbol TZ4 informs that the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the result of the special symbol lottery is not notified by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on the activated line, but by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on the activated line and the arrangement of the special effect symbol TZ4. May be notified. Further, the special effect symbol TZ4 is not displayed on the image display device 14 (variable display and stop display), but is displayed (variable display and stop display) on a dedicated display unit (eg, an LED display). Alternatively, the special effect symbols TZ4 may be eliminated and only the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be used.

  In the effect device, in addition to the variable effect (special figure lottery effect), a special game effect performed when a jackpot game is executed, and an internal display in which a special symbol variable display or a special game is not performed for a predetermined period of time. Various effects such as a demonstration effect performed in a standby state (a so-called customer waiting state) are performed.

  On the back of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2, a main control board 101 for performing various controls related to the game, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game An information output terminal plate 108 is provided.

(Internal configuration of gaming machine Y)
Next, an internal configuration of the gaming machine Y will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 generates a main power supply (operation power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine Y (the main control board 101, the production control board 102, Supply to the payout control board 103, the lamp control board 104, the image control board 105, and various electronic components. Further, the power supply voltage supplied from the outside is monitored, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, it is detected that the power supply has been cut off (power failure), and a low-level power cutoff detection signal is sent to the main control board 101 Output.

  The power supply board 107 is provided with a backup power supply including a capacitor that is stored by external power supply, and can supply the backup power to the main control board 101 even when the power is cut off (power failure). Note that a backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control board 102 and the payout control board 103. Further, the backup power supply is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

  The main control board 101 generally controls the progress of the game (basic operation). The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (crystal oscillators) and the like, performs arithmetic processing relating to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, via an input port (not shown), a first starting opening detecting sensor 6a, a second starting opening detecting sensor 7a, a winning opening detecting sensor 8a, a winning gate detecting sensor 10a. , And a general winning opening detection sensor 11a. When each detection sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a second starting opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normally movable piece 70A of the second starting opening control device 70 via an output port (not shown), and a special winning opening control. A special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second starting opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold, via an output port (not shown). The display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the normal symbol hold display device 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs a display control signal for controlling each display device to each of the display devices 20 to 25.

  Further, a game information output terminal plate 108 is connected to an output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information related to a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal plate 108. The game information output terminal plate 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the predetermined game information (external signal).

  The effect control board 102 totally controls the progress of the effect (effect operation). The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing relating to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  An effect button detection switch 18a and a selection button detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via a lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button 18A is operated, the effect button detection switch 18a outputs to the effect control board 102 an effect button detection signal indicating that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed via the lamp control board 104. That is, the lamp control board 104 plays a role of a relay board that relays the effect button detection signal.

  When the selection button 19A is operated, the selection button detection switch 19a outputs a selection button detection signal indicating that the operation of the selection button 19A has been performed to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104. That is, the lamp control board 104 plays a role of a relay board that relays the selection button detection signal.

  The selection button detection switch 19a is connected to the upper button 191A to detect an operation of the upper button 191A, and is connected to the left button 192A to detect an operation of the left button 192A. , A lower button detection switch 193a connected to the lower button 193A and detecting operation of the lower button 193A, and a right button detection switch 194a connected to the right button 194A and detecting operation of the right button 194A.

  When each of the button detection switches 191a, 192a, 193a, and 194a detects an operation, the button detection switches 191a, 192a, 193a, and 194a respectively transmit an upper button detection signal, a left button detection signal, a lower button detection signal, and a right button detection signal via the lamp control board 104. And outputs it to the effect control board 102. The upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are collectively referred to as a “selection button detection signal”.

  In the present embodiment, the operation (operation) input from the player is detected by the effect button detection switch 18a and the selection button detection switch 19a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An infrared sensor (motion sensor) for detecting an operation such as a holding operation, and a detection element such as a touch panel for detecting a predetermined operation of the player such as an operation or operation of the player may be provided. Good.

  The sub CPU 102a includes a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button detection signal output from the effect button device 18, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 19, and an input signal from a timer (crystal unit). Based on the above, the program stored in the sub-ROM 102b is read to perform arithmetic processing, and a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 based on the processing. The sub RAM 102c functions as a work area for data during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 102a.

  The payout control board 103 performs a firing control for firing the game ball from the firing device 4 and a payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 in a bidirectional manner.

  On the input side of the payout control board 103, a touch sensor 32a and a knob 32b of a firing volume are connected. The touch sensor 32a is mounted in the firing handle 32 of the firing operation device 3. When a player or a clerk touches the firing handle 32, the touch sensor 32a detects that a person has touched the firing handle 32, and transmits a firing handle detection signal to the firing control board 106. The launch volume knob 32 b is connected to the launch handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 to detect a rotation angle.

  Further, the output side of the payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 of the firing device 4 via the power supply board 107. When receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, the payout control board 103 permits the firing solenoid 41 to be energized.

  Then, when the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the turning angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the knob 32b of the firing volume is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. As described above, the payout control board 103 controls the power of the firing solenoid 41 based on the information included in the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the knob 32b of the firing volume, and fires the game ball.

  In this embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 106. One game ball is fired each time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation. Therefore, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  Also, on the output side of the payout control board 103, a payout device 5 for paying out game balls supplied from a storage tank (not shown) provided on the upper rear surface of the game board mounting frame Y1 to a tray 50 (player). Are connected. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, performs an arithmetic process, and controls the payout device 5 to send a predetermined game ball to a player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a work area for data during calculation processing of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, like the above-described boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, a lighting device 16 for production and an accessory device 17 for production are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a controls light emission of the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter, referred to as “effect control command”), and irradiates the effect lighting device 16 with light. The drive control for the motor for changing the direction is performed. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid and a motor for operating the special effect device 17 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control board 102, the effect button device 18, and the selection button device 19 are connected to the effect button detection switch 18a of the effect button device 18 and the selection button detection switch 19a of the selection button device 19, respectively. And relay the effect button detection signal and the selection button detection signal.

  The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14; A sound generation unit 105C that generates a sound signal relating to the sound to be output to the sound output unit 15 and outputs the sound signal to the sound output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls and controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

  The control unit 105A of the image control board 105 includes a control CPU 105Aa, a control ROM 105Ab, and a control RAM 105Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

  The control CPU 105Aa is connected to a control ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and reads a control program necessary for the operation of the control CPU 105Aa. When receiving the command related to the effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the overall CPU 105Aa issues an instruction of an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 to the image generating unit 105B based on the command, and also sends an instruction to the sound generating unit 105C. An instruction for a sound to be output from the sound output device 15 is issued.

  The overall RAM 105Ac functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the overall CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the overall ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is configured by a mask ROM, and displays a control program for performing image display, a display list generation program for generating a display list including a group of drawing control commands, and animation of an effect pattern. Animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

  The animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting the specific contents of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes a weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method And various information such as a duty ratio, which is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 14, and the like.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP 105Ba (Video Display Processor) as an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and a VRAM 105Bc having a frame buffer for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. ing.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to a CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is a source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) based on the image data based on an instruction from the general CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material representing an individual image such as a background image such as a scenery, a character, or a speech, which constitutes the background of the effected design image or the effected design. Data. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (overlapping) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) or the like consisting of a group of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image.

  The CGROM 105Bb stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying a color. Note that the CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which not all image data is compressed, but only part of the image data. As the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  Further, the image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba generates a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14 by dividing the frequency of the pulse signal, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIGS. 4A-1 and 4A-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of a jackpot determination table for performing a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination constitutes the above-mentioned special symbol lottery, and is to determine whether or not a "big hit" for executing a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4 (a-1) is a table (hereinafter, referred to as a "first big hit determination table") referred to in a first big hit determination performed based on a game ball entering the first starting port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4A-2 is a table (hereinafter, referred to as a “second big hit determination table”) referred to in a second big hit determination performed based on a game ball entering the second starting port 7. is there.

  In any of the jackpot determination tables, a jackpot determination table referred to when a jackpot winning probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value) (hereinafter referred to as a “low probability jackpot determination table”). And a jackpot determination table referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value) (hereinafter, referred to as a “high probability jackpot determination table”).

  Each jackpot determination table stores a jackpot determination value and a determination result in a uniquely associated manner. As described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the jackpot determination table, the “big hit” or “losing” Is determined (determined).

  If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", after a special symbol (special result) indicating the result is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game (special game) with the opening of the special winning opening 8 is executed, and the prize ball is higher than usual. Is easily obtained. That is, a game value is provided to the player.

  When the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the reach determination is further performed based on the reach determination table of FIG. In the reach determination table, the reach determination value and whether or not a reach effect is performed are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, the reach effect is executed in the variable effect by comparing the reach determination random number acquired based on the entering of the game ball into the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the reach determination table. It is determined (determined) whether or not to perform.

  If the result of the reach determination is “reach present” for executing a reach effect, a reach effect is performed in the variable effect (special figure lottery effect) to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. In the present embodiment, the probability of being determined as “reach present” in the reach determination table used in the reach determination performed based on a game ball entering the first starting port 6 is determined by a first reach described later. Although not divided by the number of special figure reservations, the probability of being determined to be "reachable" is divided by the first number of special figure reservations, and may be different depending on the first number of special figure reservations. For example, in the reach determination table used when the first special figure reservation number is the first value (for example, the first special figure reservation number = 0 to 1), the probability of being determined to be “reach present” is the first characteristic. The reach determination table used when the number of diagram reservations is a second value larger than the first value (for example, the number of first special figure reservations ≧ 2) should be higher than the probability of being determined as “reach present”. Can be.

  Similarly, the probability that the reach is determined to be “reach present” in the reach determination table used in the reach determination performed based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 7 is a second special figure reservation described later. Although not divided by the number, the probability of being determined to be "reachable" is divided by the second special figure reservation number, and may be different depending on the second special figure reservation number. For example, in the reach determination table used when the second special figure reservation number is the third value (for example, the second special figure reservation number = 0 to 1), the probability of being determined as “reach present” is the second special figure reservation number. The reach determination table used when the number of diagram reservations is a fourth value larger than the third value (for example, the number of second special figure reservations ≧ 2) should be higher than the probability of being determined to be “reachable”. Can be.

  As the reach effect, for example, during the variation display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol) is displayed in two of the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. When the symbol TZ3) temporarily stops and a predetermined effect symbol stops on a predetermined payline in the remaining one area, a state (a so-called “reach state”) is obtained in which the effect symbols are arranged in an arrangement of the effect symbols representing a jackpot winning. Reach production. In addition to this, there is a full-rotation reach effect in which the same type of effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  After the reach state has occurred in the reach production, specific productions (so-called “SP reach” or “SPSP reach”) that raise the expectation of the jackpot winning (to expect that the special symbol change display has a special result) are developed. There is a case where it is performed, and a case where it is not performed. Further, in the reach effect, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a specific effect that raises the player's expectation of winning a big hit without performing a reach state is performed. In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, a reach effect is performed. However, even in the case of a big hit, the reach determination may be performed, and the reach effect may be performed only when it is determined that “reach is present” in the reach determination.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIGS. 5A and 5B are diagrams illustrating an example of a special symbol determination table for performing a special symbol determination. The special symbol determination constitutes the above-described special symbol lottery, and determines the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (the special symbol stop display mode) based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is to be.

  The special symbol determination table is largely divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit or loss). That is, FIG. 5A shows a special symbol determination table for a jackpot winning which is referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5B shows that the result of the big hit determination is “ It is a special symbol determination table for a loss which is referred to in a special symbol determination in the case of "losing".

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of the starting port (the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7) in which the game ball which is the trigger for the special symbol determination is entered. When the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the special symbol determination table is further divided according to whether or not a reach effect is executed (reach determination result).

  In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed (determination result) are uniquely associated with each other and stored. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 is compared with the special symbol determination table to stop and display the special symbol. The type of the symbol is determined (determined). As the information indicating the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, special symbol stop symbol data and effect symbol designating command are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the effect designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102. The effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the special symbol change display, and is used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  The effect symbol designation command is 1-byte MODE data for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) in which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. And 1-byte DATA data for identifying the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  With respect to the effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E4H”, the second special symbol is displayed. This shows that the special symbol stop display is performed on the symbol display device 21. In addition, the effect design specification command whose MODE data is “E3H” is referred to as “first effect design specification command”, and the effect design specification command whose MODE data is “E4H” is referred to as “second effect design specification command”.

(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the big hit game control table used when controlling the big hit game.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the jackpot game, an opening time, which is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the first opening of the special winning opening 8, and an opening transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. The designation command, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8, the ending time that is the period from the end of the opening of the special winning opening 8 to the end of the big hit game, and the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are associated with the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, at the time of the big hit game, which control condition is used is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

(Large winning opening opening and closing control table)
FIGS. 6B to 6C are diagrams illustrating an example of a special winning opening opening / closing control table used to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8 in the big hit game. FIG. 6B is a long winning game large winning opening opening / closing control table referred to in the long winning game constituting the big hit game, and FIG. 6C is a short winning game referred to in the short winning game constituting the big hit game. It is a special winning opening opening / closing control table.

  The big win game opening / closing control table for big hit games stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big game win 8 in the big hit game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8 include a round number (R), which is a round game number, and a special telephone, which is the opening number of the special winning opening 8 (operation of the special winning opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time / closing time (operation time / non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

(Game condition data judgment table)
FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of a game condition data determination table for determining (determining) newly set game condition data after the end of the big hit game. The game condition data judgment table is divided according to the state of the jackpot winning probability (low-probability game state / high-probability game state). In each of the divided tables, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) and the game The condition data is uniquely associated with the condition data and stored. The game condition data includes the state of the jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning and the state of the start opening prize easily, and the number of special symbol displays (Xa, Ja: hereinafter, which can be executed depending on the state of the game condition). "Executable number"), and three types of "00H" to "02H" are set.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating an example of a game condition determination table for determining a game condition from game condition data. The game condition determination table includes game condition data, ON / OFF of flags (high-probability flag and time-saving flag) indicating the state of each game condition, and the number of times (Xa , Ja: hereinafter, referred to as “executable number”) are uniquely stored. The executable number of times of the special symbol change display can be said to be the number of special symbol lotteries.

(Special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table)
8 and 9 are diagrams illustrating an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol variation display mode (hereinafter, referred to as a “special figure variation pattern”). The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the time required for the special pattern fluctuation display (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure fluctuation time”) and the effect type of the fluctuation effect (special figure lottery effect) according to the fluctuation display of the special symbol. ing. Although the details of the variable effect will be described later, this is an effect in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed until the end of the special symbol with the start of the variable display, and includes the variable display of the effect symbol described above. In addition to the variable display of patterns, image effects by object images such as characters and predetermined movie images by the image display device 14, sound effects by the sound output device 15, lighting effects by the lighting device 16 for performance, and motion effects by the movable portion 17A, etc. It consists of.

  In addition, the special figure variation pattern is a first special figure variation pattern which is a mode of the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 and a second special symbol variation pattern displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. It is distinguished from the second special figure change pattern which is a mode of change display of the 2 special symbols.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in a non-time saving game state described later. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure change pattern judgment table referred when deciding a pattern. That is, the special figure change pattern determination table is largely divided according to the game state.

  The special figure variation pattern determination table further includes special figure stop symbol data and special figure reserved number (special symbol stop type data) that can specify the type of the special symbol to be variably displayed (the type of the starting port according to the variation display) and the result of the special symbol determination. U1 or U2).

  In each table, a special figure variation pattern determination value and one or more special figure variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, the special figure variation pattern determination random number acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first startup port 6 or the second startup port 7 is compared with the special figure variation pattern determination table, and The figure variation pattern is determined.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated with a predetermined probability set in advance in each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern includes the expectation degree of the jackpot winning and the specific jackpot winning (for example, the probability change big hit, the long hit, etc.). It means that the degree of expectation is associated.

  The special figure change pattern is formally determined by the special figure change pattern determination (step S313-3) at the start of the special symbol change display (during the special symbol storage determination process in step S310). It is tentatively determined by the first preliminary determination (step S236) or the second preliminary determination (step S246) when entering the balls 6 and 7 (during the input control processing in step S200).

  In addition, a starting opening winning designation command and a special figure change pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure change pattern. The starting opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first advance determination or the second advance determination described below, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the execution of the first advance determination or the second advance determination. The special figure variation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the special figure variation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern determination.

  The special figure variation pattern designation command is a byte for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special figure variation pattern. Regarding the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “E6H”, it indicates that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E7H”, 2 Indicates that the special symbol display device 21 performs a special symbol change display.

  Note that the special figure variation pattern designating command whose MODE data is “E6H” is “first special figure variation pattern designating command”, and the special figure variation pattern designating command whose MODE data is “E7H” is “second special figure variation designating command”. This command is called a “variation pattern specification command”.

  The starting port winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the starting port and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern.

  Regarding the start port winning designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start port 6, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the second start port 7 Indicates that a game ball has entered. In addition, the command for the starting opening winning designation command whose MODE data is “E1H” is “first starting opening winning designation command”, and the starting opening winning designation command for MODE data is “E2H” is referred to as the “second starting opening winning designation command”. "

  In the rightmost column of the special figure change pattern determination table, the effect type (rough classification) of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure change pattern is described as a reference.

  Here, the effect type of the variable effect according to the special figure change pattern described in the column of the effect type in FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described.

  The “normal fluctuation” described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 is a normal fluctuation production without a reach, and is a fluctuation production in which it is difficult to give a player the expectation of winning a jackpot. The “shortened fluctuation” is a fluctuation production that has a fluctuation time shorter than the normal fluctuation and does not involve a reach, and is a fluctuation production in which it is difficult to give a player the expectation of winning a jackpot. The “ultra shortened fluctuation” is a fluctuation effect that has a shorter fluctuation time than the shortened fluctuation and does not involve a reach, and is a fluctuation effect in which it is difficult to give a player the expectation of winning a jackpot.

  The "reach" means that the player has a sense of expectation of the jackpot that a part of the combination of the staging symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other staging symbols and the special staging symbol TZ4 fluctuate. It means a variation mode to be given. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols of “777” is set as a combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that notify the jackpot, the two effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped at “7” (pseudo stop). ) Means that the remaining effect symbols TZ2 and special effect symbols TZ4 fluctuate.

  The “temporary stop” means that the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 swing slightly, or the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are deformed small, so that the player is made to appear as if the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped. This is called a pseudo-stop. As for the special effect symbol TZ4, the variable display is started in synchronization (tuned) with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and is stopped and displayed in synchronization (tuned) with the stop display of the special symbol. Although the temporary stop is not performed as in TZ3 to TZ3, the variable display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the display synchronized (tuned) with the variable stop (including the temporary stop) may be performed.

  The “normal reach” described in FIGS. 8 and 9 means that two effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the remaining one effect symbol TZ2 is in the central area. And the special effect symbol TZ4 fluctuates in the end region, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning (the execution of the special game) is low.

  In the present embodiment, although "normal reach" is not selected as the special figure change pattern related to the jackpot winning, "normal reach" is selected as the special figure change pattern related to the jackpot winning. You can also.

  The “SP reach” described in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a super reach that has a higher expectation of winning a jackpot (a special game is executed) than a normal reach. For example, the effect symbol TZ2 in the central area that is not temporarily stopped fluctuates specially, or a special effect image or movie is displayed.

  The “SPSP reach” described in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a special reach having a higher expectation of winning a jackpot (a special game is executed) than a super reach. For example, it is executed after the super reach, or a special effect image or movie different from the super reach is displayed.

  Although not described in the effect type column in FIGS. 8 and 9, in the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect can be executed in any of the variable effects. The "simulated continuous production" means that, during the special design variable display corresponding to one special design lottery, the production design TZ1 to TZ3 is temporarily stopped, and then the special production is made to fluctuate once or more times ( This means an announcement effect in a variation mode (simulating a plurality of variation displays). Note that the special effect symbol TZ4 does not perform the special effect even during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, and the variable display is continued until the special symbol stops changing.

  The first feature of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the non-time saving game state shown in FIG. 8 is that the larger the number of special figure reservations, the higher the ratio of selection / determination of the shortened fluctuation is.

The first feature of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 9 is that the larger the number of special figure reservations, the higher the rate at which the super shortened fluctuation is selected / determined.
The second feature is that a super-shortened variation (2 seconds) having a shorter variation time than the shortened variation (4 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.
A third feature is that a normal fluctuation (6 seconds) having a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation (8 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.
A fourth feature is that a long fluctuation (10 seconds) is set, in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the long fluctuation (13.5 seconds) in FIG.

  FIGS. 10A to 10F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol game based on winning in the winning gate 10.

(Hit determination table)
FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a hit determination table for performing a hit determination. The hit determination is to determine (determine) whether or not to execute an auxiliary game involving opening of the second starting port 7.

  The hit determination table is divided according to the start opening winning easiness. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state and a hit determination table referred to in the time-saving gaming state.

  Each hit determination table stores a hit determination value and a determination result uniquely associated with each other. As described later, by comparing the hit determination random number acquired based on the passing of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the hit determination table, one of “hit” and “loss” is determined. When the "win" is won, after the stop display of the ordinary symbol (specific result) indicating the result, the auxiliary game with the opening of the second starting port 7 is executed, and the game ball enters the second starting port 7 more than usual. The ball is easy to be hit and the prize ball is easily obtained. That is, a game value is provided to the player.

(Normal symbol judgment table)
FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol determination table for performing a normal symbol determination. The ordinary symbol determination is to determine (determine) the type of the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 22. The ordinary symbol determination table is divided according to the result of the hit determination (hit and loss).

  In each of the ordinary symbol determination tables, the ordinary symbol determination values and the ordinary symbols to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is determined by comparing the random number for the ordinary symbol determination acquired based on the passing of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the ordinary symbol determination table. As the information indicating the type of the ordinary symbol to be stopped and displayed, ordinary symbol stop symbol data and an ordinary effect symbol designation command are set.

  The general symbol stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and is used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

(Public figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 10C determines the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern”) associated with the time required for the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (hereinafter, “ordinary symbol fluctuation time”). FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a general-purpose variation pattern determination table for the present invention. The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table includes a general figure fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in the non-time saving game state and a general figure fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in the time reduction game state.

  In each table, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of normal pattern fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the type of the general-purpose variation pattern is determined by comparing the general-purpose variation pattern determination random number acquired based on the passing of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the general-purpose variation pattern determination table. .

(Auxiliary game reference data judgment table)
FIG. 10D is a diagram illustrating an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table used when controlling the auxiliary game. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing the auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 10D, in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start opening winning easiness and the ordinary figure stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data has information on the start opening winning easiness state at the time of the normal symbol determination and the result of the normal symbol determination.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 10E is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game. This table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from when the auxiliary game is started to when the second opening 7 is first opened, and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. An opening designation command, a type of table used to control the opening and closing of the second opening 7, an ending time that is a period from the end of the last opening of the second opening 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. Conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with auxiliary game reference data.

(Second starting port opening / closing control table)
FIG. 10F is a diagram illustrating an example of a second start-up opening / closing control table for an auxiliary game used to control the opening / closing of the second start-up opening 7. The second start-up opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the second start-up opening 7 during the auxiliary game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7 include a general power operation number (D), which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, and a 2 The opening time and closing time (operating time / non-operating time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Description of types of special games)
In the present embodiment, as a special game advantageous to the player with opening of the special winning opening 8 (operation of the special winning opening control device 80), a “big hit game” executed when the “big hit” is won. Is provided. The big hit game is mainly classified into a “long hit game” and a “short hit game” depending on the difference in the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 8.

  In the jackpot game, a round game involving one or more opening of the special winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the special winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter, referred to as a maximum opening number) and the total time that can be opened (hereinafter, referred to as a maximum opening time) are set in advance. The reason why "can be opened" is that the number of game balls that can enter the special winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, nine). Therefore, even if the special winning opening 8 has not been opened the maximum number of times, the special winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the special winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may be ended. In addition, the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified for each big hit game.

(Explanation of game conditions)
Next, a description will be given of a game condition that is a condition when the game proceeds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the starting port winning easiness are set as the game conditions. Regarding the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability gaming state or high-probability gaming state, and the game progresses under the time-saving gaming state or the non-hours-saving gaming state with respect to the easy entry of the game ball at the opening opening. I do. The initial (when power is turned on) game condition is set to a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state are referred to as a normal game state. Further, the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are referred to as a low-probability-saving gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are referred to as a probability-changing gaming state. In the present embodiment, the low-probability time-saving game state and the probable change game state may be collectively referred to as a specific game state.

  In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state regarding the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to 1/350, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the high-probability gaming state means that the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low-probability gaming state, that is, 1/40, which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the low-probability gaming state, and the number of possible jackpots per unit time becomes relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the starting port winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-time-saving game state, the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds, and the operation time (second start-up time) of the second starting port control device 70 that is activated when the "winning" is won in the hit determination. The sum of the opening times of the mouth 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning a hit in a normal symbol hit determination is set to 1/50. In addition, the reason why the “total opening time” is set is that the second starting port 7 may be opened a plurality of times per hit. Since the number of game balls that can be won per hit is limited, when the number of game balls is won, the game balls are closed without waiting for the opening time or the number of times of opening.

  On the other hand, the time saving gaming state (low accuracy / high accuracy) means that the opening time of the second starting port 7 per unit time (operating time of the second starting port control device 70) is longer than the non-time saving gaming state. This is a long game state in which the second starting port 7 is easily opened. Due to the relative ease of starting opening prize winning and the relatively short variation time of the special figure variation pattern set in the variation pattern determination table, the rate at which the variation time shorter than in the non-time-saving gaming state is selected. The number of times (the average value of the fluctuation time becomes shorter) increases, and the number of times the second special symbol determination can be executed per unit time also increases. Therefore, under the same jackpot winning probability, the larger the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time, the larger the number of jackpots per unit time inevitably increases. (Low accuracy / high accuracy) can be said to be a state more advantageous to the player than the non-time saving game state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, the normal time fluctuating time is set to 3.0 seconds, and the total of the maximum opening time of the second starting port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds. Is set to 49/50. In other words, all the components of the starting port winning easiness are set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time saving game state. In the time-saving gaming state, the second start port 7 is opened twice through a 1.5-second closure (interval). However, the second opening 7 does not have to be closed and may be opened only once. Further, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting ports 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player fires the game ball by operating the appropriate firing handle 32. Even so, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the time saving game state, it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-time saving game state, so that a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player can be suppressed. That is, also from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the time-saving game state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving game state.

  As described above, the type of the jackpot game (long-hit game / short-hit game) and the new game conditions (low-probability game state / high-probability game state, non-time-short game state / In combination with the time-saving gaming state). In view of this, the type of the substantial jackpot (the type of the jackpot based on the profit level enjoyed by the player) is the type of the jackpot game to be executed and the game condition ( Game state). Therefore, hereinafter, separately from the type of the jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, a combination of the type of the jackpot game guided by the jackpot and the game condition after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of the profit enjoyed by the player The type of jackpot.

  The jackpot that wins the long hit game by winning the jackpot and then sets the high probability game state of 50 times and the time saving game state of 100 times (probably changing game state) is "high probability long time saving time per hit (probable changing big hit 1)". The jackpot to execute the long hit game by winning the jackpot, and then set the high probability game state of 50 times and the time reduction game state of 80 times to the “high probability middle time / short time (probable variable big hit 2)” A jackpot in which a winning game is executed, and thereafter, a high-probability gaming state of 50 times and a time-saving gaming state of 60 times is set is referred to as “high-probability short-time / short-term hit (probable variable big hit 3)”.

  When the big hit is won, the normal game state is set when the big hit game starts regardless of the state before the big hit game. In other words, during the jackpot game, the game state becomes the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state.

(Control processing of main control board)
Next, control processing executed by the main CPU 101a on the main control board 101 will be described.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads the startup program from the main ROM 101b in response to power-on, determines whether a RAM clear switch (not shown) is ON, and determines whether the RAM clear switch is ON. Then, a process of initializing each storage area of the main RAM 101c is performed, and if the RAM clear switch is not turned on, a process of restoring (returning) to the control state before power-off (power failure) is performed.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure variation random number for determining the special figure variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates the initial value random number including the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol determination initial value random number, the hit determination initial value random number, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves information stored in a register of the main CPU 101a to a stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special game timer counter for performing a process of updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol, a process of updating the stop time of the special symbol, a process of updating the opening time, a process of updating the opening and closing time of the special winning opening 8, and the like. Further, a time control process for updating the auxiliary game timer counter for updating the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, updating the stop time of the ordinary symbol, and updating the opening / closing time of the second starting port 7 is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of a big hit determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, a hit determination random number, and a normal symbol determination random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number updating process for updating the initial value random number for jackpot determination, the initial value random number for special symbols, and the initial value random number for hit determination.

  For updating various random numbers, the random numbers are updated by adding "1" to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. When updating the random number, if the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”, and the random number indicated by the random number counter is turned once and is already set. When the round initial value is reached, the initial random number at that time is set as a new round initial value, and each random number value is newly updated.

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process of determining whether a new valid signal has been transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a executes the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol reservation display device 23, the second special symbol reservation display device 24, and the special winning opening control device 80. Special control process (special symbol-related process) for performing the control (control of the special symbol system). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a general figure control process (normal) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Pattern processing). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the prize ball counters corresponding to the starting ports (the first starting port 6, the second starting port 7), the special winning port 8, and the general winning port 11 have exceeded “0”. Is checked, and if it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning port is transmitted to the payout control board 103. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process of subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a outputs external signal output control data for outputting information related to the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, a second start opening / closing solenoid 70B, and a special winning opening / closing solenoid. The drive control data (starting opening / closing solenoid driving data and special winning opening / closing solenoid driving data) for driving the 80B, and predetermined symbols are displayed on the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the holding display devices 23, 24, 25. Data creation processing of display control data (special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, special symbol suspension display data, ordinary symbol suspension display data) for display is performed.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs an output control process. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Next, in order to turn on the LEDs of the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25, a display device output process of outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. . Finally, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another substrate is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to a register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the detection signal is not input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S220. When a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a adds and updates predetermined data to a general winning opening prize ball counter used for a winning ball.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 8. If the detection signal has not been input from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S230. When a detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to a special winning opening prize ball counter used for a prize ball, updates the data, and updates the special winning opening 8 with a prize. The counter value of the special winning opening rule winning counter (C) for counting the number of played game balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the first starting port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 6 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 7 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed the winning gate 10 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(1st starting port detection signal input processing of main control board)
Next, the first starting port detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether there is a valid detection signal from the first starting port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the first starting port detection signal input process is terminated. If there is a valid detection signal, in step S232, the starting port prize ball counter for paying out prize balls is incremented by "1". In addition, the first start-up opening prize processing of turning on the first start-up opening prize flag in the first start-up opening prize flag storage area of the main RAM 101c is performed.

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure reservation number counter for counting the first special figure reservation number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, it ends the first starting port detection signal input processing, and if it determines that the first special drawing reservation number (U1) is smaller than 4, it proceeds to step S1. In S234, the counter value of the first special figure reservation number counter is updated by adding "1".

  In step S234, in order to update the first special figure hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23, the main CPU 101a stores the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c in a predetermined manner. Set to the area. Further, in step S235, the main CPU 101a sets the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. Thereby, the first special figure reservation number (U1) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a determines the jackpot determination random number indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number indicated by the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number indicated by the reach determination random number counter, and the special figure variation pattern. The special figure variation pattern determination random number indicated by the determination random number counter is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. Hereinafter, the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number are collectively referred to as “special figure determination information”.

  The first special symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section (see FIG. 11A), and the special figure determination information is a number in a storage section in which a random number is not stored. Are stored in ascending order of storage unit. In each storage unit, the area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  In step S237, the main CPU 101a performs a first preliminary determination based on a game ball entering the first starting port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first preliminary determination, the stop symbol data of the first special symbol and the first special symbol change pattern are determined based on the special symbol determination information acquired in step S236. That is, the main CPU 101a stops the first special symbol as a first preliminary determination before performing a jackpot determination process (step S311), a special symbol determination process (step S312), and a special figure variation pattern determination process (step S313) to be described later. The symbol data and the first special figure change pattern are determined.

  Then, in step S238, the main CPU 101a transmits the stop symbol data of the first special symbol determined by the first preliminary determination and the first starting port winning designation command corresponding to the first special symbol variation pattern to the effect transmission data of the main RAM 101c. This is set in the storage area (transmission buffer), and the first start-up opening detection signal input processing ends.

(2nd starting port detection signal input processing of main control board)
Next, the second starting port detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a. When determining that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the second start-up port detection signal input processing. When determining that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S242.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101a adds and updates the starting opening prize ball counter for paying out prize balls by "1", and updates the second starting opening winning rule by adding "1". A second start-up winning process of turning on the second start-up winning flag in the second start-up winning flag storage area of the RAM 101c is performed. The second starting port winning regulation counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting port 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 7 for one auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter that counts the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a terminates the second starting port detection signal input processing. The process moves to S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special figure reservation number counter and updates it. Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the special symbol hold display data indicating the number of holds in order to update the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24 in the main RAM 101c. Is set in a predetermined area. Further, in step S245, the main CPU 101a sets a second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special figure reservation number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. Thereby, the second special figure reservation number (U2) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S246, the main CPU 101a determines the jackpot determination random number indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number indicated by the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number indicated by the reach determination random number counter, and the special figure variation pattern. The special figure variation pattern determination random number indicated by the determination random number counter is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area.

  The second special symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section (see FIG. 11A), and the special figure determination information is a number in a storage section in which a random number is not stored. Are stored in ascending order of storage unit. In each storage unit, the area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  Then, the main CPU 101a performs a second preliminary determination based on the ball entering the second starting port 7 in step S247. Here, the second preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the second preliminary determination, the stop symbol data of the second special symbol and the second special symbol variation pattern are determined based on the special symbol determination information acquired in step S246. That is, the main CPU 101a performs the second special symbol stop symbol data as the second preliminary determination before performing the big hit determination process (step S311), the special symbol determination process (step S312), and the special symbol variation pattern determination process (step S313). And the second special figure variation pattern is determined.

  Then, in step S248, the main CPU 101a transmits the stop symbol data of the second special symbol determined by the second preliminary determination and the second starting port winning designation command corresponding to the second special symbol variation pattern to the effect transmission data of the main RAM 101c. It is set in the storage area (transmission buffer), and the second start-up opening detection signal input processing ends.

(Winning gate detection signal input processing of main control board)
Next, the winning gate detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the winning gate detection signal input processing. If it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S252.

  In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the ordinary symbol holding number counter for counting the number of ordinary symbols holding (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit). When determining that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the winning gate detection signal input processing, and when determining that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, shifts the processing to step S253.

  In step S253, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (G) of the general-use reserved number counter and updates it. In addition, in step S253, the main CPU 101a stores the ordinary symbol hold display data indicating the number of held symbols in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the number of ordinary symbols held (G) displayed on the ordinary symbol hold display device 25. set. In addition, in step S254, the main CPU 101a sets an ordinary symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of ordinary figure reservations (G) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the number of ordinary drawing reservations (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  The main CPU 101a determines in step S255 that the random number for hit determination indicated by the random number counter for hit determination, the random number for normal symbol determination indicated by the random number counter for normal symbol determination, and the random number for universal symbol variation pattern determination indicated by the random number counter for general symbol variation pattern determination Is normally stored in the symbol holding storage area, and the winning gate detection signal input processing is terminated. Hereinafter, the hit determination random number, the ordinary symbol determination random number, and the general figure variation pattern determination random number are collectively referred to as “general figure determination information”.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section (see FIG. 11C), and the general symbol determination information is stored in a storage section having a smaller number among storage sections in which random numbers are not stored. It is stored in order from the first copy. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 11D).

(Special figure special power control processing of main control board)
Next, the special figure special power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special power processing data is loaded, and the branch destination address is referred to from the special figure special power processing data loaded in step S302. If the special figure special power processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310) ), The process proceeds to a special symbol variation process (step S320) if the special figure special power process data = 1, and the process to a special symbol stop process (step S330) if the special figure special power process data = 2. If the special figure special power processing data = 3, the processing is shifted to the big hit game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special power processing data = 4, the processing is shifted to the big hit game end processing (step S350). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Special design memory determination process for main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a special symbol is being changed and displayed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol is being changed and displayed, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process, and if it determines that the special symbol is not being changed and displayed, the process proceeds to step 310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4, and if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Transfer processing.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after the subtraction. The special symbol storage designation command to be performed is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 101a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S310-8, stores the data stored in the second special symbol holding storage area. To shift the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units to the immediately preceding storage unit.

  For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special symbol holding storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special design storage area (the zero storage unit) common to the first special design and the second special design. Then, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Further, the special figure stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the storage areas corresponding to each of them.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S310-5.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol reservation number counter by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, corresponds to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. The special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 101a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S310-8, stores the data stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. To shift the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units to the immediately preceding storage unit.

  For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the first special symbol storage area. In addition, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special symbol pertinent storage area (the 0th storage section) and stored in the 0th storage section. The diagram determination information is deleted. Thereby, the special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Further, the special figure stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the storage areas corresponding to each of them.

  In order to update the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2) with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, specifically, The first and second special symbol holding display data are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol holding display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the starting port according to the above. The suspension display data includes information on the type of the special symbol suspension display device and information on the number of special symbol suspensions (U1 or U2).

  Further, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted prior to the first special symbol holding storage area (the second special figure holding number is shifted to the first special figure holding number). The first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted in the order in which the game balls enter the starting port (the first special figure holding number). And the second special symbol reservation number may be consumed in the order of winning), or the first special symbol reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special symbol reservation storage area for shifting (the first special figure reservation number is set to the second special symbol reservation number). It may be digested in preference to the number of reserved special figures.

  If it is determined in step S310-4 that the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to steps S319-1 to S319-3, and the customer for setting the customer waiting state is set. Perform wait state setting processing. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbol change display and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, and the requirement includes that the normal symbol change display and the auxiliary game are not executed. You may.

  In the customer waiting state setting process, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area in step S319-1. When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination processing, and stores the customer waiting state determination flag in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. If the flag “01H” has not been set, the process moves to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area so that the customer waiting state is not set repeatedly.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination processing. Thereby, the effect control board 102 is notified that it is in the customer waiting state.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes a jackpot determination process based on the data shifted in step S310-8 and newly stored in the zeroth storage unit.

(Jack judgment process for main control board)
Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the current special symbol change display is the first special symbol change display based on the subtraction of the first special figure reservation number (U1).

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that the display is the variable display of the first special symbol, the main CPU 101a selects the first special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-2. On the other hand, when determining in step S311-1 that the main CPU 101a is not the first starting port 6 (the second starting port 7), the main CPU 101a selects a second special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is set in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is ON in the high-probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high-probability gaming state.

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag in the high-probability flag storage area is ON, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. "First high probability jackpot determination table" or "second high probability jackpot determination table" is selected.

  On the other hand, when determining that the flag is not turned on in the high-probability flag storage area, the main CPU 101a further proceeds to step S311-6 from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. "Big jackpot determination table for use" or "second low probability jackpot determination table for low probability" is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a stores the jackpot determination random number shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the zeroth storage unit in the "high probability jackpot" selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6. It is compared with the “judgment table” or the “low-probability jackpot determination table” to determine whether it is “big hit” or “losing”, and ends the big hit determination processing.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process illustrated in FIG. 19, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process. Here, the special symbol determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination is "big hit winning". Here, if it is determined to be "big hit", the main CPU 101a selects the special symbol determination table for big hit in step S312-4, and if it is not determined to be "big hit", the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S312-4. The process moves to S312-2.

  The main CPU 101a performs a reach determination in step S312-2. Specifically, the reach determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit shifted in step S310-8 is compared with the reach determination table.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not “reach exists” is determined as a result of the reach determination in step S312-2. If it is determined that "reach exists", the process proceeds to step S312-5, and a special symbol determination table for the loss with reach is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not “reach present”, that is, it is determined that there is no “reach”, the process proceeds to step S312-6, and a special symbol determination table for loss-less reach is selected.

  In step S312-7, the main CPU 101a confirms the starting opening related to the special symbol storage determination process based on the flag that is turned on in the starting opening winning flag storage area (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7). ), In step S312-8, based on the type of starting port, one of a special symbol determining table for the first starting port and a special symbol determining table for the second starting port is selected.

  In step S312-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special symbol determination in which the special symbol determination random value shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the selected special symbol determination table.

  Then, in step S312-10, an effect design specification command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-9, and the determined effect design specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, in step S312-11, the main CPU 101a determines, based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-11, stop symbol data relating to the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "special symbol stop symbol data"), that is, the special symbol. Is determined, and the determined special figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  The determined special figure stop symbol data determines “big hit special symbol” or the like in the special symbol stop processing of FIG. 24 when determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing of FIG. It is also used to determine the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 8 in the big hit game processing of FIG.

  In step S312-12, the main CPU 101a compares the special figure stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a checks the high probability flag storage area and selects a game condition data determination table according to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the game condition data is determined by comparing the special game stop symbol data with the selected game condition data determination table, and set in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination process ends as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process illustrated in FIG. 19, and performs the special symbol change pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result and the reach determination result, a special figure variation pattern including information on the special figure variation time and the effect type of the variation effect described later is included. decide.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment processing of main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to ON / OFF of a high-probability flag and ON / OFF of a time-saving flag described later to refer to the current game state (high-probability game state / low-probability game state, and , A time saving game state / non-time saving game state), and select a special figure change pattern determination table associated with the game state.

  In step S313-2, the main CPU 101a checks the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c, and determines a special figure variation pattern determination table based on the special figure stop symbol data. This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table divided according to the game state is further divided according to the special figure stop symbol data.

  When the special figure stop symbol data is “19” or “29”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss without reach, the special figure change number determination (U1 or A special figure variation pattern determination table is determined based on U2). This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table relating to the loss without reach is divided according to the number of special figure reservations.

  When the special figure variation pattern determination table is determined, the main CPU 101a performs a special figure variation pattern determination in step S313-3. Specifically, the special figure variation pattern determination random number is collated with the determined special figure variation pattern determination table to determine the special figure variation pattern.

  After determining the special figure variation pattern, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 19, and in step S310-9, transmits the special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern to the main RAM 101c for effect. Set in the data storage area.

  Thereby, the special figure change pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 receives the game state designation command, the effect design designation command, and the special figure change pattern designation command, thereby displaying the special symbol change display. Is determined to start, and a variable effect pattern associated with the content of the variable effect is determined based on the game state specifying command, the effect design specifying command, and the special figure changing pattern specifying command. Note that the effect control board 102 may recognize that the variation display of the special symbol starts by receiving the effect symbol designation command and / or the special figure variation pattern designation command. Further, the game state designation command may be transmitted after transmitting the effect symbol designation command or the special figure variation pattern designation command.

  Then, in step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure variation time (see FIGS. 8 and 9) associated with the special figure variation pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data for performing variation display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be activated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  In step S310-12, the main CPU 101a sets the flag “00H” in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, that is, clears the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, and ends the customer waiting state. In S13, the special figure special power processing data = 1 is set, and the special symbol storage determination processing ends.

(Special design change processing of main control board)
Next, the special symbol changing process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is finished, in other words, whether or not the special figure variation time set in step S310-10 has elapsed (special game timer Counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol does not end, the special symbol variation process ends, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol change display is to be ended, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a directs a special figure change stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the special symbol change display is to be ended. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a performs special figure stop display data based on the special figure stop design data set in step S312-11 to stop and display the special design on the special design display devices 20 and 21. Is set. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player. In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets a time required for the special symbol stop display (hereinafter, “special figure stop time”; for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to a subtraction process every 4 ms in step S110.

  Then, in step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special power processing data, turns off the first starting port winning flag or the second starting port winning flag in step S320-6, and executes the special symbol variation processing. To end.

(Special design stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the stop display of the special symbol ends, in other words, the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 elapses. It is determined whether or not it has been performed. As a result, if it is determined that the stop display of the special symbol is not to be ended, the special symbol stop processing is ended. If it is determined that the stop display of the special symbol is to be ended, the process proceeds to step S330-2.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (set) in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the time saving flag is ON in the time saving flag storage area means that the game is currently in the time saving game state. If the time saving flag is ON in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the time saving flag is OFF in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a determines “1” from the counter value of the remaining number-of-times counter in the time-saving game state, which indicates the remaining number of times of the variable display of the special symbol according to the time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number of time-saving game states”). ”Is subtracted and stored as the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a sets a time saving number designation command corresponding to the time saving game state remaining number (J) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the number of time saving game state remaining times (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and a process for displaying the time saving remaining number information (also referred to as remaining time saving number information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J) = 0. If the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-6, and if not, the process proceeds to step S330-7.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a turns off (clears) the time saving flag stored in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. In addition, the fact that the number of remaining time saving game states (J) becomes “0” means that the number of times the special symbol can be changed is displayed in the time saving game state (Ja), and the number of times that the special symbol varies according to the “time saving” state Means to end.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability flag is ON (set) in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the high-probability flag is ON in the high-probability flag storage area means that the game is currently in the high-probability gaming state. If the high-probability flag storage area is ON, the process proceeds to step S330-8. If the high-probability flag storage area is OFF, the process proceeds to step S330-12. Move.

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a sets the counter value of the high-probability game state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the special symbol change display according to the high-probability game state (X: hereinafter, referred to as “high-probability game state remaining number”). The calculated value (X-1) obtained by subtracting "1" from the stored value is stored as the new high-probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a sets a high probability number designation command corresponding to the high probability game state remaining number (X) set in the high probability game state remaining number counter in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the high-probability game state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and a process for displaying the high-probability remaining number information (also referred to as remaining probable change number information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0. If the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-11. If the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0 is not 0, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a turns off the high probability flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. In addition, the fact that the high-probability game state remaining number of times (X) becomes “0” means that the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed (Xa) in the high-probability game state, and the special symbol in the “high-probability” state Means that the variable display of is ended.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets a game state designation command indicating the game state in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the current game state is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol stop processing is "big hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to a special jackpot symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). I do. Here, if it is not determined to be a special jackpot, the process proceeds to step S330-14, and if it is determined to be a special jackpot, the process proceeds to step S330-15.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure special electric processing data to 0, and performs processing for shifting the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a sets 3 in the special figure special power processing data. In step S330-16, the game condition flag storage area (the time saving flag storage area and the high probability flag storage area) and the high probability game state are set. Reset (clear) the remaining change number counter and the remaining change number counter in the time saving game state. That is, the game is controlled to the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area as a jackpot game opening process. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an opening time corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to a subtraction process every 4 ms in step S110.

(Big hit game processing of main control board)
The big hit game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the opening is currently being performed. The opening here refers to a period from the start of the big hit game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the special winning opening 8). If it is determined that the opening is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the opening is not currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, it is determined which of the big hits is in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data, a special winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of the big hit is selected, and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, a long winning game large winning opening opening / closing control table or a short winning gaming large winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c according to the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a adds a value (“1” to the round number (R)) stored in the number-of-round-games storage area and stores the value. At the time of step S340-3, no round game has been performed. Since it has not been executed, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game number storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the value stored in the special power operation number storage area ("1" is added to the special power operation number (K) and stored. The main CPU 101a energizes the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B. In order to open the special winning opening 8, the special winning opening opening solenoid energization start data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c, where the main CPU 101a stores the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3. With reference to the round number (R) and the special power operation number (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 8 (the operating time of the special winning opening control device 80) is set in a special game timer counter. The game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1, and if K = 1, a round designation command indicating the current number of round games specified by the storage value of the round game number storage area is issued. Set in the production transmission data storage area. This is for transmitting information to the effect control board 102 that the round game is started. For example, at the time of the first opening of the first round game of the long per game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special power operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the special power operation number storage area, the round designation command is not set in the effect transmission data storage area, and the jackpot game process ends. That is, since the case of K = 1 means the start of the round game, the main CPU 101a transmits the round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, the effect display is performed on the image display device 14, for example, as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. The ending here refers to a period from the end of all preset round games (after the last opening of the special winning opening 8 ends) to the end of the big hit game. Therefore, if it is determined that the ending is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-17, and it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending is not currently being performed, step S340-7 is performed. Transfer processing to

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the special winning opening control device 80 is operating. When the main CPU 101a determines that the special winning opening 8 is being opened, in step S340-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. I do. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the special winning opening rule winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0 and Has been adopted). Then, when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9, and when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the big hit game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. The special winning opening closing process sets the energizing stop data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in order to close the special winning opening 8, and opens and closes the special winning opening determined in step 340-3. Referring to the control table, the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current round number (R) and the special power operation number (K). As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special power operation number (K) is equal to the number of open times set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the special winning opening rule winning counter is a specified number ( (For example, 9), the condition is terminated, and it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. When it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12, and when it is determined that one round has not been completed, the big hit game process is completed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the special winning opening 8 is not open, it determines in step S340-11 whether a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process ends, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special power operation number storage area is cleared, and the counter value of the special winning opening regulation winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the jackpot game has ended, that is, whether the value (round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game). When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, moves the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a updates and stores the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area by adding “1” to the current round number (R).

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game end process. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, the type of the jackpot is confirmed in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data, and an ending designation command associated with the type of the jackpot to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the ending time according to the type of the jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S340-18 and proceeds to step S340-18. If it is determined that the game has not been completed, the jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special power processing data, and shifts the processing to the big hit game end processing shown in FIG.

(End processing of jackpot game on main control board)
The big hit game end processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a compares the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. When determining that the high probability flag is not ON, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S350-5, and when determining that the high probability flag is ON, in step S350-3, stores the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. (01H) is turned ON, and a high-probability game state setting process of setting the executable number (Xa) to the high-probability game state remaining number counter is performed.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a sets a high probability number designation command corresponding to the high probability game state remaining number (X) set in the high probability game state remaining number counter in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the high-probability game state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and a process for displaying the high-probability remaining number information (also referred to as remaining probable change number information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a compares the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time-saving flag is turned on in the time-saving flag storage area. When determining that the time-saving flag is not turned on, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S350-8, and when determining that the time-saving flag is turned on, turns on the time-saving flag in the time-saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-6. Then, a time-saving game state setting process of setting the executable number (Ja) to the time-saving game state remaining number counter is performed.

  In step S350-7, the main CPU 101a sets a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the time-saving game state remaining number (J) set in the time-saving game state remaining number counter in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the number of time saving game state remaining times (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and a process for displaying the time saving remaining number information (also referred to as remaining time saving number information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, sets a game state designation command indicating the current state of the game condition in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S350-9, The figure special power processing data is set to 0, and the processing shifts to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a command indicating the number of time saving game state remaining times (J) is transmitted as the number of time saving time designation command, but may be a command indicating the number of variable displays executed in the time saving game state. Although the command indicating the high-probability gaming state remaining number (X) is transmitted as the high-probability number-of-times designation command, it may be a command indicating the number of variable displays executed in the high-probability gaming state.

  In addition, the time saving number designation command and the high probability number designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 102 separately from the game state designation command. However, the time saving game state remaining number (J) and the high probability game state remaining number ( X) may be included in the game state designation command and transmitted to the effect control board 102. Further, the command for specifying the number of times saved or the command for specifying the number of times of high probability may not be transmitted to the effect control board 102.

(General control and control of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 27, the general-purpose power control process will be described. The main CPU 101a first loads the value of the general-purpose general-purpose processing data in step S401, refers to the branch destination address from the general-purpose general-purpose processing data loaded in step S402, and determines whether the general-purpose general-purpose processing data = 0. For example, a normal symbol storage determination process including a normal symbol determination as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary game (open the second starting port 7) based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the winning in the winning gate 10 The process shifts to (Step S410), and if the ordinary figure ordinary electric processing data = 1, the ordinary symbol variation processing (Step S420) when the ordinary symbol display device 22 varies based on the ordinary symbol determination is performed. If the normal figure general processing data = 2, the processing shifts to the normal design stop processing (step S430) when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped, and Data = if 3 controls the opening and closing of the second start hole 7 (actuating the second start hole control device 70) and moves the process to the auxiliary game process (step S440).

(Normal symbol storage judgment processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol storage determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a variable display of a normal symbol is being displayed, and if it is determined that the variable symbol is being displayed, terminates the normal symbol storage determination process. If not, the process moves to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the general-purpose reserved number counter for counting the general-purpose reserved number (G) is 1 or more. When the number of ordinary symbols reserved (G) is “0”, the ordinary symbol variation display is not performed, and thus the ordinary symbol variation process ends.

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-2 that the number of ordinary drawing reservations (G) is “1” or more, in step S410-3, the main CPU 101a calculates “G” from the counter value (G) of the ordinary symbol reservation number counter. In step S410-4, a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the subtracted general figure holding number (G) is transmitted for production in step S410-4. Set in the data storage area. As a result, the number of ordinary drawing reservations (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S410-5, the main CPU 101a performs a shift process of the general symbol determination information stored in the normal symbol holding storage area. Specifically, the general-purpose map determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the storage unit of the immediately preceding number. At this time, the ordinary symbol determination information stored in the immediately preceding storage unit is written into a predetermined processing area and is deleted from the ordinary symbol holding storage area. Here, in order to change the display content of the ordinary symbol holding display device 25 with the shift of the ordinary symbol determination information, specifically, to display the current number of ordinary symbol holdings (G), the ordinary symbol holding display data is displayed. Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 101a performs a hit determination, that is, a hit determination random number stored in the normal symbol holding storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 101a compares the random number for hit determination in the 0th storage unit shifted in the above step S410-5 with the hit determination table for ordinary symbols stored in the main ROM 101b to determine whether or not a hit has occurred. Is determined. In the present embodiment, the hit determination table is associated with the state of the start opening winning easiness (non-time saving game state / time saving game state) (see FIG. 10A). Is checked, and a hit determination table for ordinary symbols relating to the current state of the start-up winning a prize is selected.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 101a performs a normal symbol determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a compares the random number for normal symbol determination in the 0th storage unit shifted in step S410-5 with the ordinary symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 101b to perform the ordinary symbol determination. As described above, since the ordinary symbol determination table is associated with the result of the hit determination (hit / loss), the result of the hit determination is confirmed, and the normal symbol determination table relating to the result of the hit determination is displayed. select.

  Then, in step S410-8, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data relating to the normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “normal symbol stop symbol data”), that is, the type of the normal symbol, based on the result of the normal symbol determination, The determined normal symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c, and in step S410-9, a normal effect symbol designating command corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol data is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the general-purpose stop data is notified to the effect control board 102.

  The determined general symbol stop symbol data is used in determining the general symbol variation pattern in the general symbol variation pattern determination, in the ordinary symbol stop process in FIG. Is also used to determine the opening / closing mode of the second starting port 7 in the above.

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 101a performs a normal pattern change pattern determination. Specifically, the main figure 101a first checks the time saving flag storage area because the general figure fluctuation pattern determination table for performing the general figure fluctuation pattern determination is classified according to the state of the start opening winning easiness. A general-purpose change pattern determination table relating to the current state of the start-up winning easiness is selected. Then, the main CPU 101a compares the random number for general pattern fluctuation pattern determination, which is shifted in step S410-5 in the zeroth storage unit, with the selected general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and Fluctuating time).

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 101a sets a general figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined general figure variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. The ordinary figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and by receiving this command, the effect control board 102 recognizes that the variation display of the ordinary symbol starts, and can execute a roulette effect described later.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 101a sets the general-purpose variation time corresponding to the determined general-purpose variation pattern in the auxiliary game timer counter. Note that the auxiliary game timer counter is subjected to a subtraction process every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S410-13, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol variation display data for performing the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 22, and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the process proceeds to step S410-14. Then, the normal game stop symbol data is compared with the auxiliary game reference data determination table to determine the auxiliary game reference data, and is set in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-15, the main CPU 101a sets “1” to the ordinary figure general electric processing data, and ends the ordinary symbol fluctuation processing. The data for normal symbol fluctuation display includes information such as the type of the normal symbol display device 22 to be operated, the mode of the fluctuation display, the fluctuation time, and the like.

(Normal symbol fluctuation processing of the main control board)
Next, the normal symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol ends, in other words, whether or not the general fluctuation time set in step S410-12 has elapsed (the auxiliary game timer counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not ended, the normal symbol fluctuation process is ended and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S420-2, the main CPU 101a sets an ordinary effect symbol stop designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S420-3, based on the ordinary symbol stop symbol data set in step S410-8. The general stop display data for stop display on the symbol display device 22 is set. Thus, the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is notified to the player. In step S420-4, the main CPU 101a sets a normal symbol stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the auxiliary game counter. It should be noted that the auxiliary game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

  Then, in step S420-5, the main CPU 101a sets “2” to the general-purpose general-purpose processing data, and terminates the normal symbol variation processing.

(Normal symbol stop processing of main control board)
Next, the normal symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S430-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the stop display of the ordinary symbol ends, in other words, whether the ordinary symbol stop time set in the auxiliary game timer counter in step S420-4 has elapsed. No (auxiliary game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when it is determined that the stop display of the ordinary symbol is not ended, the ordinary symbol stop processing is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the stop display of the normal symbol is to be ended, in step S430-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the hit determination related to the normal symbol stop process is “win”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol data stored in the normal symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to a hit normal symbol. Here, if it is determined to be a winning normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-4, and if it is not determined to be a winning normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-3.

  In step S430-4, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the general-purpose general-purpose processing data. Then, in step S430-5, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and responds to the general symbol stop symbol based on the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game opening process of setting the opened time to the auxiliary game timer counter is performed. Note that the auxiliary game timer counter is subjected to a subtraction process every 4 ms in step S110. When this process ends, the normal symbol stop process ends.

  In step S430-3, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the general-purpose general-purpose processing data, and ends the normal symbol stop processing.

(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
The auxiliary game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S440-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the opening is currently being performed. If it is determined that the opening is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S440-2. If it is determined that the opening is not currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S440-5.

  In step S440-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, and if the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the present auxiliary game process is terminated. If the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S440-3.

  In step S440-3, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, first, the main CPU 101a selects the second opening opening / closing control table based on the auxiliary game reference data stored in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and stores the selected table in the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set.

  In step S440-4, the main CPU 101a performs a second opening opening process. In the second opening opening process, first, the value stored in the general operation number storage area ("1" is added to the general operation number (D) and stored). Is set to the energization start data of the second start-up opening / closing solenoid 70B, and by referring to the second start-up opening / closing control table set in step S440-3, based on the current ordinary power operation number (D). The opening time of the second starting port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

  In step S440-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. The ending here refers to a period from the end of the second opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-12 when it is determined that the ending is currently being performed, and moves to step S440-6 when it is determined that the ending is not currently being performed.

  In step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second starting port 7 is being opened. When the main CPU 101a determines that the second start-up port 7 is being opened, in step S440-7, it is determined whether the “opening end condition” for terminating the opening of the second start-up port 7 is satisfied. Is determined. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the starting opening prescribed winning counter has reached a prescribed (maximum) number (for example, 10), or one opening time of the second starting opening 7 has elapsed ( (Auxiliary game timer counter = 0). Then, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S440-8 when determining that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, and ends the auxiliary game processing when determining that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied. .

  In step S440-8, the main CPU 101a performs a second startup port closing process. In the second start-up opening closing process, the energization stop data of the second start-up opening / closing solenoid 70B is set to close the second start-up opening 7, and the second start-up opening / closing control table set in step S440-3 is set. , The closing time of the second start-up port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current ordinary operation number (D). As a result, the second starting port 7 is closed.

  In step S440-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied and the auxiliary game is ended. The auxiliary game termination condition is that the normal power operation number (D) is equal to the preset number of times of opening of the second starting port 7 or the counter value of the second starting port prescribed winning counter is the maximum number (for example, 10 pieces). ). Then, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-10 when determining that the auxiliary game end condition has been satisfied, and ends the auxiliary game process when determining that the auxiliary game end condition has not been satisfied. .

  In step S440-10, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game ending process of setting “0” in the ordinary power operation number storage area and setting “0” in the second start-up winning regulation counter. In other words, the normal power operation number storage area and the second starting port regulation winning counter are cleared.

  In step S440-11, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area, and sets an ending time corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol data based on the auxiliary game control table. Is set to the auxiliary game timer counter.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-6 that the second start-up port 7 is not open, it determines in step S440-13 whether the closing time set in step S440-8 has elapsed. I do. The closing time is also determined based on whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter is 0 as in the case of the opening time. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process, and when determining that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S440-4.

  In step S440-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S440-14 and proceeds to step S440-14. If it is determined that it has not been performed, the present auxiliary game process is terminated.

  In step S440-14, the main CPU 101a sets the general-purpose general-purpose processing data = 0, and ends the auxiliary game processing.

(Control processing of production control board)
Next, a control process executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

(Main processing of production control board)
First, the main processing of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. This main process is executed when power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, and a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a.

  First, in step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 102b, and an initialization process for initializing the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored is performed.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a determines a random number for icon display mode determination, a random number for effect design stop display pattern determination, a random number for look-ahead zone effect scenario determination, a random number for final number of people determination, a random number for precursor effect scenario determination, and a random effect pattern described later. An effect random number update process for updating the effect random number, which is composed of a judgment random number, an effect mode judgment random number, and the like and used for the judgment for controlling the effect, is performed.

  In addition, a random number counter is provided in the sub RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the effect random number. In the process of updating the random number for effect, the random number counter provided for each type of random number is incremented by "1". Various random numbers constituting the effect random number have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of the random number. This is to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to be able to prevent the random number counters related to the production random numbers from completely synchronizing, instead of making the maximum values of various random number ranges different, different initial value random numbers are provided for various production random numbers, In updating the random numbers, when the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, each random number value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. This timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

  First, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs a time control process of updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  When receiving the command transmitted from main control board 101, effect control board 102 performs a reception interrupt process of effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in a reception buffer. Thereafter, a process of analyzing the received command in the command analysis process is performed.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs a customer waiting effect control process for controlling a customer waiting effect performed in a customer waiting state in which a special symbol variation display and a special game (big hit game) are not executed.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a checks an input signal from the effect button detection switch 18a or the selection button detection switch 19a, and executes an operation effect or the like based on an operation on the effect button 18A or the selection button 19A. An effect input control process is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a can execute the game information relating to the game to be notified (displayed) in the current game state (the right-handed information for urging the user to shoot a game ball in the right area of the game area 2A, the probable change game state). Remaining number of times of variable display that is high probability remaining number of times information, remaining time of variable display that can be executed in low-probability time saving game state, remaining number of time saving time information, jackpot that occurred while the time saving game state continued Game information display control process for causing the image display device 14 to display the jackpot number of times, which is the number of times, and the left-handing information that prompts the player to shoot a game ball in the left area of the game area 2A.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing of transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing of production control board)
The command analysis processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a receives a new command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. When determining that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis, and shifts the processing to step S1302 when determining that the command has been received.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303, and shifts the processing to step S1304 if it determines that the command is not the customer waiting state specification command.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a performs a customer waiting effect preparation process, and ends the command analysis process. In the customer waiting effect preparation process, the sub CPU 102a turns on the customer waiting effect waiting flag in the customer waiting effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and waits until the customer waiting effect starts (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, 30 seconds) is set in the customer waiting effect timer counter.

  The sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the customer waiting effect standby time set in the customer waiting effect timer counter has elapsed in the customer waiting effect control process of step S1400, and determines that the customer waiting effect standby time has elapsed. Then, the customer waiting effect wait flag is turned off, the customer waiting effect execution flag is turned on, and the customer waiting effect control command indicating the effect information of the customer waiting effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  As a result, the customer waiting effect control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 wait for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds). The effect is repeatedly executed. The execution and the standby of the customer waiting effect are terminated based on the game state designation command, the special symbol designation command, the special figure variation pattern designation command, etc. being transmitted from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1305, and if it determines that the command is not a special symbol storage specification command, shifts the processing to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a updates the special figure reservation number stored in the effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c described later in response to the special symbol storage designation command, and updates the special figure reservation number stored in the effect information reservation storage area. Hold information update processing for shifting the effect information and displaying the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of special figure holds on the image display device 14 is performed, and the command analysis processing ends. The suspension information update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting opening winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307, and if it determines that the command is not the starting opening winning designation command, shifts the processing to step S1308.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a performs a so-called look-ahead notice, such as a look-ahead zone effect (continuous notice effect) or a reserved icon change notice, which is executed over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols based on the result of the preliminary determination. The start-port winning process is performed to determine the (effect) and to set information related to the prefetch notice (effect), and the command analysis process ends. The start-up winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

  In addition, as a continuous announcement effect, a countdown announcement effect of performing a countdown display on the image display device 14 for each variation effect for the variation effect of the announcement target, and a notice on the image display device 14 for each variation effect for the variation effect of the announcement target Continuous cut-in announcement effect to perform cut-in display of image, continuous step-up announcement effect to perform step-up display of preview image on image display device 14 for each variation effect for variation effect of announcement object, to variation effect of announcement object For example, a chance eye announcement effect in which the effect symbols (effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3) are stopped and displayed in an array having a predetermined regularity for each of the fluctuation effects may be executed.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1309. If it determines that the command is not a game state specification command, it shifts the processing to step S1311.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a performs a game state update process for updating the game state stored in the predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 102c to the game state specified by the game state designation command. An effect mode setting process for setting any one of a plurality of effect modes related to the execution of the effect is performed, and the command analysis process ends. The effect mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a classification mode of a variable effect performed by an effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to a variable display of a special symbol executed based on the result of the jackpot determination (category). ), And in the present embodiment, three types of effect modes, effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C, are provided.

  The effect mode A is a normal effect mode that represents a disadvantageous game state for the player that is set corresponding to the normal game state that is the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state. The effect mode B is an effect mode that is set to correspond to the high-probability game state and the probability-change game state that is the time-saving game state and is the most advantageous game state for the player. The effect mode C is an effect mode that represents the second most advantageous game state that is set corresponding to the low-probability time-saving game state that is the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designating command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1312, and if it determines that the command is not an effect symbol designating command, shifts the processing to step S1313.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a stops on the predetermined effective line, that is, an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 14 as a result of the variable effect (special figure lottery effect) performed during the variable display of the special symbol. An effect symbol stop display pattern determination process for determining an effect symbol array (combination) is performed. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1314. If it determines that the command is not the special figure variation pattern designation command, it shifts the processing to step S1318. .

  In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to start a look-ahead zone effect, which is a type of look-ahead advance notice (effect) based on the result of the advance determination, and determines whether to start a look-ahead zone effect. Perform processing. The look-ahead zone effect start determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a performs a variable effect pattern determination process for determining a variable effect pattern which is the effect content (mode) of the variable effect (special figure lottery effect) performed during the variable display of the special symbol. The variable effect pattern determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to execute the operation effect during the fluctuation effect based on the determination result of the jackpot determination process and the fluctuation effect pattern determined in the fluctuation effect pattern determination process, An operation effect determination process for determining a type or the like is performed. The operation effect determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a determines whether to change the hold icon or the changing icon displayed on the image display device 14 (hereinafter, the case where both the hold icon and the changing icon are referred to as “icon”). Is performed, and the command analysis processing ends. The icon change notice determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure change stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special figure change stop designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1319. If it determines that there is no special figure change stop specification command, shifts the processing to step S1321. .

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect symbol variation control process of setting an effect symbol stop control command indicating that the effect symbol is to be stopped and displayed to end the variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The effect symbol fluctuation stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. By receiving the effect design stop control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the fluctuating effect is finished, stop the effect design, and end the fluctuating effect.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs a look-ahead zone effect ending process for ending the look-ahead zone effect upon the end of the change display of the special symbol, and ends the command analysis process. The look-ahead zone effect ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a high probability number designation command or a time reduction number designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the high probability number designation command or the time reduction number designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1322 and determines that the command is not the high probability number designation command or the time reduction number designation command. Then, the process moves to step S1323.

  In step S1322, the sub-CPU 102a updates the remaining high-probability count, which is the remaining count of the variable display (fluctuation effect) that can be executed in the certainty-variable game state, based on the received high-probability count specification command, or specifies the received time reduction Based on the command, the remaining number of times, which is the remaining number of times of the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, is updated.

  In step S1323, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game opening designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1324. If it determines that there is no jackpot game opening designation command, it shifts the process to step S1326.

  In step S1324, the sub CPU 102a determines an opening effect pattern that is an effect mode of the opening effect performed during the opening of the jackpot game, and sets an opening effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined opening effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Opening effect pattern determination processing is performed.

  The opening effect pattern designating command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700, and the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1325, the sub CPU 102a updates the number of extended games, which is the number of extended games, which is the number of jackpot games that occur while the time-saving gaming state (including the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state) continues. And terminate the present command analysis process.

  Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed during the normal game state, the number of extended games is set to “1”, and the jackpot game is performed during the time-saving game state (including the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state). When it is executed, a process of adding “1” to the number of extended holidays is performed.

  In step S1326, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. When determining that the command stored in the reception buffer is the round designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1327, and shifts the processing to step S1328 when determining that there is no round designation command.

  In step S1327, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect performed during the round of the jackpot game, and sets a round effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined round effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The round effect pattern determination processing is performed, and the command analysis processing ends. The round effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute a round effect of a jackpot game.

  In step S1328, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game ending designation command (big hit game ending designation command). When determining that the command stored in the reception buffer is the jackpot game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1329, and terminates the command analysis process when determining that the command is not the jackpot game ending designation command.

  In step S1329, the sub CPU 102a determines an ending effect pattern that is an effect mode of the ending effect performed during the ending of the jackpot game, and sets an ending effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined ending effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The big hit game ending effect pattern determination processing is performed, and the command analysis processing ends. The ending effect pattern designating command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700, and the ramming game ending effect is executed by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

(Update processing of pending information on production control board)
With reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of the hold information updating process performed by the effect control board 102.

  In step S1305-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current special figure reservation number stored in the effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1305-2, executes the first special figure storage designation command in accordance with the special symbol storage designation command. The figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2) is updated.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, the effect information suspension storage area includes a first special figure suspension number storage area in which the first special figure suspension number (U1) is stored and a second special figure suspension number (U2). A second special figure reservation number storage area to be stored, a first production information reservation storage area to store production information related to a look-ahead notice (production) based on the result of the first preliminary determination, and a result of the second preliminary determination Effect information in which effect information relating to prefetching notice (effect) based on the first effect information is stored, and effect information shifted from the first effect information suspend storage area or the second effect information suspend storage area is stored. And the storage area.

  The first effect information holding storage area and the second effect information holding storage area are divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit like the first special figure holding storage area and the second special figure holding storage area of the main RAM 101c. Have been. The effect information storage area is a storage area that corresponds to the currently displayed special symbol change display (change effect) and is common to the first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area. For this reason, for convenience, it is referred to as the 0th storage unit.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (b), each storage unit includes, as a storage area for effect information related to a pre-reading notice (effect), a starting-port winning designation command area in which a starting-port winning designation command is stored, and a prefetch zone described later. A look-ahead zone effect scenario area for storing a look-ahead zone effect scenario data representing a scenario of an effect, a sign effect scenario region for storing a sign effect scenario data representing a sign effect scenario described later, and a scenario of an icon display mode described later. An icon display mode scenario area for storing icon display mode scenario data.

  In step S1305-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (U1, U2) has decreased. If it is determined that the number of special figure reservations has decreased, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1305-4. If it is determined that the number of special figure reservations has not decreased, the process proceeds to step S1305-8 assuming that the number of special figure reservations has increased.

  In step S1305-4, the sub CPU 102a stores, in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the various types of information stored in the respective storage units of the effect information holding storage area corresponding to the type of the reduced special figure holding number (starting port). Shifts production information.

  Specifically, the effect information (data) stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit. For example, various effect information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first effect information holding storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first effect information holding storage area. Further, the effect information stored in the first storage unit of the first effect information holding storage area is converted into the effect information common storage area (the 0th memory) of the first effect information holding storage area and the second effect information holding storage area. Part). As a result, the effect information stored in the effect information storage area is deleted.

  In step S1305-5, the sub CPU 102a stores the reserved icon shift control command (the first reserved display shift control command or the second reserved display shift control command) indicating the type of the reduced special figure reserved number (starting port) in the sub RAM 102c. Set in the transmission buffer.

  The hold icon shift control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process in step S1700. Upon receiving the hold icon shift control command, the image control board 105 performs a shift process of shifting the hold icon related to the starting port indicated by the received hold icon shift control command toward a changing icon display area described later.

  In step S1305-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario data (details will be described later) stored in the effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and determines whether the icon already displayed is It is determined whether or not there is an icon that changes the display mode (executes a pending icon change notice) according to the shift (execution of the fluctuation effect). If it is determined that there is an icon that changes the display mode, step S1305 is performed. Then, if it is determined that there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the suspension information updating process ends.

  In step S1305-7, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, an icon change control command indicating the contents of change according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the icon display mode scenario for the icon whose display mode is to be changed. Here, the “change content according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the icon display mode scenario data” includes the icon whose display mode is to be changed and the display mode to be changed.

  The icon change control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output processing in step S1700. When receiving the icon shift control command, the image control board 105 changes the display mode of the icon according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received icon change control command, together with the shift of the hold icon according to the hold icon shift processing.

  In step S1305-8, the sub CPU 102a adds a reservation icon based on the increase in the number of special figure reservations, and stores a reservation icon addition control command indicating the type of the increased number of special figure reservations (starting port) in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Is set, and the hold information updating process is terminated.

  The hold icon addition control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process in step S1700. Upon receiving the hold icon addition control command, the image control board 105 additionally displays a hold icon corresponding to the start port indicated by the received hold addition control command.

(Description of look-ahead zone effect, icon display, icon display area)
Before describing the start-up winning processing shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, first, a pre-reading zone effect, a hold icon display, a changing icon display, and the like, which are performed based on a preliminary determination result or the like indicated by the start-up winning designating command, will be described. Keep it.

(Direction of look-ahead zone)
First, the look-ahead zone effect will be described. The look-ahead zone effect indicates that the degree of expectation (expected value) of winning a jackpot is high over one or a plurality of variable effects (variable display of special symbols) (to expect execution of a special game). This is a look-ahead announcement effect, and in the present embodiment, can be executed in the effect mode A set in the normal game state, and is executed based on a preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command.

  While the look-ahead zone effect is being executed, a zone background image dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 (there is a portion not shown), and a zone BGM dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect is output as audio. The output from the device 15 is performed, and the zone lighting dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect is executed in the stage lighting device 16. The zone background image, the zone BGM, and the zone lighting can be collectively referred to as a zone effect.

  In addition, as an effect related to the look-ahead zone effect, a zone-inducing effect is provided. The zone-inducing effect is an effect that stimulates whether or not a look-ahead zone effect is performed. In the display of change and stop of the effect design, a special effect design dedicated to zone-inducing effect (hereinafter, referred to as “special design”) is used. It is performed using. In addition, in this embodiment, the zone fanning effect is performed using a special design, but it is not a special effect design for the zone fanning effect, but it is also possible to use a special effect design different from a normal one. Yes, it is also possible to stop and display a chance (a predetermined combination of effect symbols) with a normal effect symbol. Further, the zone-inducing effect can also be performed using other effect images (characters, etc.) instead of effect images, and other effect devices other than the image display device 14 (for example, the sound output device 15 and the effect device). Lighting device 16 for example) to perform an effect in a predetermined mode.

  In the present embodiment, as the types of the zone fueling effects, a zone fueling success effect and a zone fueling failure effect are provided. The zone-inducing success effect is composed of an effect for invoking whether or not a look-ahead zone effect is executed and an effect for notifying that a look-ahead zone effect is executed after the effect. In the zone-inducing success effect, a plurality of preset special symbols are stopped or temporarily stopped, and when all the preset special symbols are aligned, it is notified that the pre-reading zone effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect is executed from the start of the effect design variable display (including the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous effect) which is started after the zone-fighting successful effect is executed.

  On the other hand, the zone-boosting failure production is composed of a production that stimulates whether or not a pre-reading zone production is performed and a production that notifies that the pre-reading zone production after the production is not performed. In the zone tilt failure effect, only a part of a plurality of preset special symbols is stopped and displayed, and the fact that all the preset special symbols are not aligned informs that the pre-reading zone effect is not executed. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect is not executed in the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (including the re-variation display in the pseudo continuous effect) that is started after the zone-boosting failure effect is executed. However, it is possible to perform a zone-boosting success effect in the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (including the re-fluctuation display in the pseudo continuous performance) started after the zone-boosting failure performance is executed. The look-ahead zone effect is to be executed from the start of the effect design variable display (including the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous effect) which is started after the zone fanning success effect has been executed.

  In the present embodiment, as a special symbol used for the zone-inducing effect, a special symbol including a character “look-ahead” (referred to as a “look-ahead symbol”) and a special symbol including a character “zone” (a symbol “zone”) ) And a special symbol including a character “rush” (referred to as a “rush” symbol). The zone-inducing effect in which all the special symbols of these "look-ahead" symbols, "zone" symbols and "rush-in" symbols are stopped and displayed is "zone-inducing successful effect", and these "look-ahead" symbols and "zone" symbols In addition, the zone-pumping effect in which some special symbols of the “rush-in” symbol are stopped and displayed is “zone-pumping failure effect”. As for the zone tilting failure effect, the zone tilting failure effect 1 in which the "read ahead" symbol and "zone" symbol are stopped and displayed as some special symbols, and the zone where only the "read ahead" symbol is stopped and displayed as some special symbols It consists of a fantastic failure production 2.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbols are stopped one by one. For example, in a zone-boosting successful performance, the "look-ahead" symbol stops first, then the "zone" symbol stops, and finally the "rush" symbol decelerates to see if it stops while decelerating. When the symbols stop at a preset stop position, all special symbols are aligned. Then, an effect of whether or not the prefetch zone effect is executed is configured from the first stop of the “read ahead” symbol to the last stop of the “rush” symbol.

  On the other hand, in the zone-boosting failure effect, for example, first, the "look-ahead" symbol stops, then the "zone" symbol stops, and finally, the "rush-in" symbol decelerates whether it stops while decelerating. As a result, the vehicle slips past a preset stop position, and as a result, only some special symbols are aligned. Then, from the first stop of the “look-ahead” symbol to the slip of the “rush-in” symbol, an effect as to whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed is configured.

  In the present embodiment, as a mode in which “all the special symbols are aligned”, the “look-ahead” symbol, the “zone” symbol, and the “rush” symbol gradually stop, but all of these special symbols are simultaneously aligned. In other words, it is also possible that all the special symbols are suddenly aligned without the effect of whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed.

(Icon display)
Next, the hold icon display and the changing icon display will be described. The holding icon display means displaying a holding icon in a first holding icon display area 141 and a second holding icon display area 143 described later. The special icon determination information is stored in the main RAM 101c in the first starting port detection signal input processing in step S230 or the second starting port detection signal input processing in step S240, and the special icon is fluctuated and displayed (or the special symbol lottery). ), But the right to execute the variable display of the special symbol in the holding state (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol holding”) is in a holding state in which the changing display of the special symbol cannot be started immediately. ) Is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The holding icon is a first holding icon indicating a right to execute a variable display of a first special symbol based on winning in the first opening 6 and a variable displaying of a second special symbol based on winning in the second opening 7. (Hereinafter, when both of the first and second holding icons are referred to, they are simply referred to as “holding icons”).

  Changing icon display means displaying a changing icon in a changing icon display area 142 described later. The fluctuating icon is an icon (image) representing a fluctuating display of the running special symbol corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the special symbol storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Will be displayed. In other words, if the start condition of the variable display of the symbol is satisfied with respect to the special figure hold indicated by the hold icon while the hold icon is displayed, the symbol corresponds to the variable display of the symbol related to the establishment of the start condition. The hold icon is displayed as a changing icon.

  In the following, when referring to both the hold icon and the changing icon, they are simply referred to as “icons”.

  In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a special mode are set as icon display modes. The normal mode is a standard display mode for icons, and the special mode is a special display mode for suggesting or notifying predetermined items set in advance. In the present embodiment, one type of normal mode is set, and special modes are classified into a plurality of types according to the contents to be suggested or notified. In the present embodiment, the special modes are classified into a first special mode, a second special mode, a third special mode, and a fourth special mode, and the hold icon is displayed in the special mode, and the type of the special mode is changed. By changing it, a change icon is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect, and a changing icon is displayed in a special mode, or by changing the type of the special mode, a changing icon change notification is executed. The display mode of the icon is not limited to the normal mode, the first special mode, the second special mode, the third special mode, and the fourth special mode, and can be set as appropriate.

  The normal mode is a standard display mode, and is a standard for predetermined items set in advance. As shown in FIG. 61, the shape of the icon in the normal mode is circular, and the color of the icon in the normal mode is white.

  The first special mode is a display mode that indicates that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot and / or the degree of expectation of a jackpot, and can be said to be a display mode that indicates that there is a possibility of changing to another special mode. In the present embodiment, only one type is set. As shown in FIG. 61, the shape of the icon of the first special mode is circular, and the color of the icon of the first special mode is blinking white. That is, it can be said that the first special mode is a state where the normal mode is blinking. It should be noted that the jackpot winning expectation degree indicated by the first special mode is the normal mode <the first special mode.

  The second special mode is a display mode that indicates that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot and / or the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and in the present embodiment, the type of the second special mode indicates the indicated jackpot expectation level. Are set, and five kinds of second special modes 21 to 25 are set.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the shapes of the icons of the second special mode 11 to the second special mode 15 are the same for one person regardless of the type, and the second special mode 11 to the second special mode. The colors of the 15 icons are different depending on the type. Specifically, the color of the icon of the second special mode 11 is white, the color of the icon of the second special mode 12 is green, the color of the icon of the second special mode 13 is red, and the color of the icon of the second special mode 14 Is a zebra pattern, and the icon of the second special mode 15 has a rainbow color.

  Regarding the jackpot winning expectation degree according to the second special mode, the normal mode <first special mode <second special mode 11 <second special mode 12 <second special mode 13 <second special mode 14 <second special mode 15> The order is higher. Note that the second special mode 15 indicates that the jackpot winning expectation degree is 100%, that is, notifies the jackpot winning.

  Further, the second special mode 11 and the second special mode 14 can be generated for both the holding icon and the changing icon, but the second special mode 15 is generated only for the changing icon. This is because, if the hold icon indicating the special figure holding is displayed in the second special mode 15 and the jackpot winning is notified at the stage where the change display of the special symbol related to the special figure holding is not started, the interest of the game is reduced. For this reason, the second special mode 15 is not generated for the hold icon. However, the items can be appropriately set, and the hold icon can be displayed in the second special mode 15.

  Note that the normal mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode are not set as a common mode in the normal game state and the time-saving game mode (including the high-accuracy time-saving and the low-accuracy-time-saving mode), but the normal mode for the time-saving game state ( For example, the shape of the icon is a square, the color of the icon is blue), the first special mode for the time-saving gaming state (for example, the shape of the icon is a square, and the color of the icon is blinking blue), the time-saving gaming state (For example, the shape of the icon is a square and the color of the icon is the same) may be set. Further, the normal mode and the first special mode may be different between the normal game state, the high-accuracy time-short game state, and the low-accuracy time-short game state.

  The third special mode suggests a degree of expectation for the execution of the look-ahead zone effect (hereinafter, referred to as “a look-ahead zone execution expectation degree”). As the types of the third special modes, six types of the third special modes 1 to 6 having different expected read-ahead effect execution expectations are set.

  Here, the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3 are icons (hereinafter, referred to as “zone effect target icons”) corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command for executing the look-ahead zone effect or the zone tilting effect. In the third special mode 4 to the third special mode 6, an icon that is not an icon corresponding to a start-up winning award designation command for executing a look-ahead zone effect or a zone-inducing effect (hereinafter referred to as “zone (Referred to as an effect non-target icon). In other words, the icon for the zone effect non-target icon corresponds to the icon corresponding to the start-port win-specifying command before or after the icon corresponding to the start-port win-specifying command for executing the look-ahead zone effect or the zone tilting effect. Or, an icon for which a variable effect is executed later).

  As shown in FIG. 62, the icons of the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3 are images including the icons of the second special mode. Specifically, the icon shape of the third special mode 1 (11 to 15) is such that the silhouette of one person is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. In addition, a character "? Zone?", Which indicates execution of a look-ahead zone effect, is attached to a substantially central portion. The shape of the icon of the third special mode 2 (21 to 25) is such that the silhouettes of the two persons are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of the single person according to the second special mode, respectively, and are substantially in the center. In addition, "{Zone}" is attached with a character indicating that the look-ahead zone effect is executed and the degree of expectation of the execution is higher than "? ZONE?" In the third special mode 1. The shape of the icon of the third special mode 3 (31 to 35) is such that four human silhouettes are arranged on each of the left and right sides of the one human silhouette according to the second special mode, and a substantially central portion. Is attached with a character indicating the execution of a look-ahead zone effect called “○ zone ○”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, the icons of the third special mode 4 to the third special mode 6 also have shapes including the icons of the second special mode. Specifically, the icon shape of the third special mode 4 (41 to 45) is such that the silhouette of one person is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. It has a configuration. The icon shape of the third special mode 5 (51 to 55) has a configuration in which two person silhouettes are arranged on the left and right sides of the one person silhouette according to the second special mode, respectively. . The icon shape of the third special mode 6 (61 to 65) has a configuration in which three person silhouettes are arranged on the left and right sides of the one person silhouette according to the second special mode, respectively. . In the third special mode 4 to the third special mode 6, characters such as “? Zone?” Are not attached as in the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3. That is, it is also suggested that the “? Zone?” In the third special mode 1, the “△ zone の” in the third special mode 2, and the “○ zone」 ”in the third special mode 3 are zone production target icons. ing.

  The look-ahead zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect target icon is higher in the order of (normal mode <) second special mode <third special mode 1 <third special mode 2 <third special mode 3. On the other hand, the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect non-target icon increases in the order of (normal mode <) second special mode <third special mode 4 <third special mode 5 <third special mode 6. I have.

  Here, the reason why the second special mode is included regarding the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect target icon and the zone effect non-target icon is that the icon display mode is the second special mode and the third special mode. This is because a zone indication effect that suggests or informs of the execution of a look-ahead zone effect described later is executed, and the second special aspect also suggests a look-ahead zone execution expectation degree.

  As described above, the shapes of the icons of the second special mode and the third special mode include a silhouette of a person, and the number of silhouettes of the icon of the second special mode is “1”, and the third special mode 1 The number of people in the icon silhouette of the icon 4 is “3”, the number of people in the icon silhouette of the third special modes 2 and 5 is “5”, and the number of people in the icon silhouette of the third special modes 3 and 6 is Is "7". The larger the number of icon silhouettes, the higher the degree of expectation of the prefetching zone execution.

  Further, in the present embodiment, each of the third special mode 1 and the third special mode 4, the third special mode 2 and the third special mode 5, the third special mode 3 and the third special mode 6, It is assumed that the attributes of the target icons are different (the zone production target icon and the zone production non-target icon), but have a correspondence and the same look-ahead zone execution expectation degree is set. That is, the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special mode 1 and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special mode 4 are the same, and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special mode 2 and the second The look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 5 is the same, and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 3 is the same as the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 6. .

  Further, the third special modes 3 and 6 indicate that the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree is 100%, that is, notify that the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Further, as will be described in detail later, the icons are displayed in the third special modes 3 and 6 even when the look-ahead zone effect is being executed. Therefore, the third special modes 3 and 6 may notify that the look-ahead zone effect is being executed.

  In the following, the third special modes 1 and 4 are referred to as “look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1”, and the third special modes 2 and 5 are referred to as “a look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2”. Aspects 3 and 6 are referred to as “read-ahead zone effect notification mode”. In addition, when referring to both the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 and the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2, it is simply referred to as “look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode”.

  Further, as described above, the shape of the icon according to the third special mode is constituted by a silhouette of a person, and includes the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. Is defined as a main silhouette portion, and the silhouette portions of the person on the left and right sides of the main silhouette portion are defined as sub-silhouette portions.

  As for the main silhouette portion of the icon according to each of the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 6, a plurality of types of colors are set similarly to the second special mode. According to the color of the main silhouette portion, the third special mode 1 is divided into the third special mode 11 to the third special mode 15, and the third special mode 2 is divided into the third special mode 21 to the third special mode 25. The third special mode 3 is divided into the third special mode 31 to the third special mode 35, the third special mode 4 is divided into the third special mode 41 to the third special mode 45, and the third special mode 5 is changed to the third special mode 5. The third special mode 51 is divided into the third special mode 55 to the third special mode 55, and the third special mode 6 is divided into the third special mode 61 to the third special mode 65.

  The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special mode 11, the third special mode 21, the third special mode 31, the third special mode 41, the third special mode 51 and the third special mode 61 is white. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special mode 12, the third special mode 22, the third special mode 32, the third special mode 42, the third special mode 52 and the third special mode 62 is green. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special mode 13, the third special mode 23, the third special mode 33, the third special mode 43, the third special mode 53 and the third special mode 63 is red. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special mode 14, the third special mode 24, the third special mode 34, the third special mode 44, the third special mode 54 and the third special mode 64 is a zebra pattern. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special mode 35 and the third special mode 65 is iridescent. And like the 2nd special mode, the color of the main silhouette part of the 3rd special mode suggests a jackpot winning expectation, and it is high in order of white <green <red <zebra pattern <rainbow color.

  On the other hand, the fourth special mode suggests or informs about predetermined matters related to the handshake event notice. The handshake event notice is an effect that suggests a jackpot winning expectation using a changing icon. In the present embodiment, this is executable in the effect mode A, and is based on the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command. However, it may be performed based on the determination result at the start of the fluctuation effect. The details of the production of the handshake announcement will be described later.

  Four types of the fourth special mode 1 to the fourth special mode 4 are set as the types of the fourth special mode. Here, the fourth special mode 1 (11 to 15) is a changing icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command for executing the handshake event notice (hereinafter, referred to as a “handshake event notice target changing icon”). In a fourth special mode 2 (21 to 24), a hold icon corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command to execute the handshake event notice (hereinafter referred to as a “shake handshake event notice target hold icon”) ), And a fourth special mode 3 (31) is a changing icon (hereinafter, “shake handshake”) corresponding to a start-up winning appointment designation command that is not a start-up award winning designation command that is to execute a handshake event notice. The fourth special mode 4 (41) is a start-up opening prize finger which is not a start-up prize designation command for executing a handshake event advance notice. Hold icon corresponding to the command (hereinafter, referred to as a "handshake meeting notice non-target Hold icon") is a display mode of.

  In other words, the handshake meeting non-target non-hold icon is an icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command before or after the icon corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command that is to execute the handshake announcement (before or after). Icon for performing a variable effect).

  As shown in FIG. 64, the icon of the changing icon in the fourth special mode 1 (11 to 15) is a silhouette of a person who is shaking hands, viewed from substantially the side, and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. It is composed of The shape of the hold icon of the fourth special mode 2 (21 to 24) is composed of a silhouette of a person who has taken a predetermined pose viewed from the front, and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. “Heart” commonly attached to the icons of the fourth special mode 1 and the fourth special mode 2 indicates that the handshake event is to be announced.

  In addition, the shape of the changing icon of the fourth special mode 3 (31) is composed of the same person silhouette as the changing icon of the fourth special mode 1, and the heart is shaped like the fourth special mode 1. Not attached. The shape of the hold icon of the fourth special mode 4 (41) is also composed of the same person silhouette as the hold icon according to the fourth special mode 2, and the heart is not attached as in the fourth special mode 2. .

  Also, for the part of the silhouette of a person included in the icons of the fourth special mode 1 and the fourth special mode 2, a plurality of types of colors are set as in the second special mode. According to the color of the silhouette portion, the fourth special mode 1 is divided into five types of the fourth special mode 11 to the fourth special mode 15, and the fourth special mode 2 is the fourth special mode 21 to the fourth special mode 24. Are divided into four types.

  The color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to the fourth special mode 11 and the fourth special mode 21 is white, and the color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to the fourth special mode 12 and the fourth special mode 22 is green. The color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to the special mode 13 and the fourth special mode 23 is red, the color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to the fourth special mode 14 and the fourth special mode 24 is a zebra pattern, The color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to aspect 15 is iridescent.

  The reason why the rainbow color is set only in the fourth special mode 1 is that the handshake meeting notice target hold icon is displayed in rainbow color, and the change display of the special symbol related to the special figure hold corresponding to the changing icon has been started. This is because if the jackpot is announced at a stage where it does not exist, the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the items can be set as appropriate, and it is possible to provide a rainbow display mode for the handshake event notice target hold icon.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the handshake event notice non-target changing icon and the color of the handshake event notice non-target pending icon are one type of white. Like the icon and the handshake meeting notice target hold icon, the color can indicate the jackpot winning expectation.

  As described above, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the icon display modes, and the icon display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode and from a certain special mode to a different special mode during the game. In this way, the interest of the game is improved. The change pattern of the icon display mode will be described later.

(Icon display area)
Next, the holding icon display areas 141 and 143 displaying the holding icons and the changing icon display area 142 displaying the changing icons will be described. As shown in FIG. 78A, the pending icon display areas 141 and 143 and the changing icon display area 142 are formed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The first holding icon display area 141 where the first holding icon is displayed is formed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and the second holding icon display area 143 where the second holding icon is displayed is on the lower right side of the display unit 140 And the changing icon display area 142 in which the changing icon is displayed is formed between the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143 and does not overlap with each other.

  The first reserved icon display area 141 is divided into a first display section 141a, a second display section 141b, a third display section 141c, and a fourth display section 141d from the side of the changing icon display area 142. The display units 141a to 141d correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  Therefore, the first holding icon displayed on the first display unit 141a indicates special figure holding based on the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area, and the second display unit 141b The first hold icon displayed in the first special symbol hold storage area in the first special symbol hold storage area is based on the special figure determination information stored in the second storage section, the first hold icon displayed on the third display section 141c The icon indicates a special figure reservation based on the special figure determination information stored in the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, and the first reservation icon displayed on the fourth display unit 141d is the first special symbol. The special figure reservation based on the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the reservation storage area is shown.

  The second reserved icon display area 143 is divided into a first display section 143a, a second display section 143b, a third display section 143c, and a fourth display section 143d from the side of the changing icon display area 142. The display units 143a to 143d correspond to the first to fourth storage units in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  Therefore, the second holding icon displayed on the first display unit 143a indicates special figure holding based on the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area, and the second display unit 143b The second hold icon displayed in the second special icon indicates special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the second storage section of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed on the third display section 143c. The icon indicates a special figure reservation based on the special figure determination information stored in the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, and the second reservation icon displayed on the fourth display unit 143d is the second special symbol. The special figure reservation based on the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the reservation storage area is shown.

  Further, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 represents a change display of the special symbol that is currently being executed based on the special figure determination information stored in the special symbol storage area (the 0th storage unit). .

  The changing icon display area 142 in which the changing icon is displayed is provided on the pedestal image D in order to clearly distinguish it from the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143. Note that the broken line portion in FIG. 78 (a) indicates each display portion and display area, and is not actually displayed, but may be displayed.

(Processing at the start opening prize by the effect control board)
With reference to FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, a description will be given of the start-up opening winning process by the effect control board 102.

  In step S1307-1, the sub CPU 102a stores the starting port winning designation command determined to have been received in step S1304 in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  Specifically, if the received start-up opening winning designation command is the first startup opening winning designation command, the first special figure reservation number (from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first effect information reservation storage area) U1) is stored in the storage unit. If the received start-up opening prize designation command is the second start-up opening prize designation command, the second special figure reservation number (U2) in the first to fourth storage units of the second effect information reservation storage area is stored. It is stored in the corresponding storage unit.

  In step S1307-2, the sub CPU 102a acquires the icon display mode scenario determination random number indicated by the icon display mode scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1307-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode A, which is the normal effect mode, is currently set. If the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1307-3 that the effect mode A has not been set, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307-4. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A has been set in step S1307-3, the process proceeds to step S1307-5. Transfer processing.

  In step S1307-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the display mode of the icon already displayed at this time is the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode, in other words, the zone predictive effect is executed. Is determined.

  The zone indication effect is an effect for suggesting or notifying the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in the above-described look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode. It is determined whether or not the zone indication effect is to be executed based on a preliminary determination result indicated by the starting opening winning designation command, and when the starting opening winning designation command is stored, in other words, when the starting opening winning designation command is given. It can be executed from the time of occurrence of the corresponding special figure reservation until the end of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure reservation.

  In addition, even if the zone indication effect is executed, there is a case where the look-ahead zone effect is not executed. In the following, the zone precursor effect in this case is referred to as “gas zone precursor effect”. In addition, as the gaseous zone precursor effect, a zone fountain failure effect is executed after the zone precursor effect is executed, but the look-ahead zone effect may not be executed. Further, as the gaseous zone precursor effect, the zone precursor effect is executed, but there is a case where neither the zone fanning effect nor the look-ahead zone effect is executed.

  In step S1307-5, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the icon already displayed at this time is the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode because the icon is already displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or It is displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode, and when the zone sign effect is being executed, if a new hold icon is displayed, the new hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode already displayed or This is for displaying in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode.

  The new hold icon is displayed in the same display mode as the previously displayed look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode, so that the player can reliably recognize the notification or suggestion of the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. be able to. Whether or not the display mode of the icon already displayed at this time is the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode is determined by the predictive effect scenario indicated by the predictive effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c. Can be determined based on

  If the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1307-5 that the display mode of the icon already displayed at this time is displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to a step S1307-6. If it is determined that the display mode of the icon already displayed at this time is not the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode, the process proceeds to step S1307-7.

  In step S1307-6, the sub CPU 102a changes the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the start-port winning designation command according to the start-port winning process to the same type as the display mode of the icon already displayed at the present time. An icon effect control command for zone indication effect, which indicates that the prefetch zone effect is informed, the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2, is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The icon effect control command for zone indication effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. When the image control board 105 receives the zone sign effect icon effect control command, the image control board 105 changes the hold icon corresponding to the start-port winning designation command according to the start-port winning process to the display mode of the icon already displayed at the present time. By displaying the same type of display mode (look-ahead zone effect notification mode, look-ahead zone effect notification mode 1, look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 or look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2), the zone precursor effect is displayed. Do.

  In addition, the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the start opening winning designating command which triggers the execution of the zone indication effect is ended, and the zone effect target icon (change) displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode When the (middle icon) is deleted, the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode becomes the normal mode.

  In step S1307-10, the sub CPU 102a changes the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the start-port winning designation command related to the starting-port winning process to the normal mode, and thereafter basically does not change the display mode to the special mode. The normal icon display mode scenario data indicating the normal icon display mode scenario is stored in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The storage of the normal icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting port winning designation command in step S1305-1.

  Here, “basically” means that, as described above, when the zone indication effect is executed when the icon is displayed in the normal mode, the icon is normally set according to the execution. This is because the mode changes to the look-ahead zone effect execution suggestion mode or the pre-read zone effect execution notification mode.

  In addition, for the same start-up opening prize designation command, in other words, in the same start-up opening prize processing, an icon effect control command indicating a normal icon display mode scenario described later is set (step S1307-22). When the icon effect control command for zone indication effect is set (step S1307-6), the icon display control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 and the lamp control board 104 first. Therefore, in this case, immediately after the hold icon in the normal mode is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is immediately changed to the look-ahead zone effect execution suggestion mode or the look-ahead zone effect execution notification mode.

  In step S1307-7, the sub CPU 102a, based on the look-ahead zone effect scenario data and the sign effect scenario data stored in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c, performs a look-ahead zone effect, a zone boosting effect, or a zone sign effect. (Hereinafter, referred to as “read ahead zone effect, etc.”) is not executed at the present time, but it is determined whether it is already scheduled to be executed. The reason for this determination is to prevent a prefetch zone effect or the like from being performed repeatedly.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the look-ahead zone effect or the like is to be executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307-10. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the look-ahead zone effect or the like is not executed, the process proceeds to the step S1307-8. Move.

  In step S1307-8, the sub CPU 102a determines the jackpot determination result of the currently executed variable effect based on the variable effect data stored in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c to be described later as “big hit”. Is determined. The fluctuation effect data is identification information indicating the effect contents of the fluctuation effect, but the fluctuation effect data also includes a jackpot determination result that triggers the execution of the fluctuation effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a "big hit", the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307-10, and if it determines that it is not a "big hit", shifts the processing to step S1307-9.

  In step S1307-9, the sub CPU 102a uses the starting opening prize designation command related to the real opening prize winning processing among the starting entrance prize designation commands currently stored in the first effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not all of the pre-judgment results related to the first special figure hold (hereinafter, referred to as “preceding hold”) corresponding to the start-up opening winning designation command stored before are “reach without loss”. The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1307-11 if it is determined that all of them are "reach without loss", and shifts the process to step S1307-10 if it is not all of them that are "reach without loss".

  In step S1307-11, the sub CPU 102a acquires the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination random number indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1307-12, the sub CPU 102a selects a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 50) for performing a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination, and adds the look-ahead acquired in step S1307-11 to the selected determination table. A look-ahead zone effect scenario determination for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario is performed by comparing the zone effect scenario determination random numbers.

  The look-ahead zone production scenario refers to the contents of the production of the zone propulsion production and the pre-read zone production. The production contents of the zone promotion effect and the look-ahead zone production include the possibility of execution of the promotion effect, the timing of the performance of the promotion effect when the promotion effect is executed, the type of the production effect to be performed, and the execution of the look-ahead production. Whether or not it is possible and when the look-ahead zone effect is executed when the look-ahead zone is executed are included.

  The look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 50 is associated with the pre-determination result indicated by the starting-port winning designating command, which is the target of the starting-port winning processing, and the current first special figure reservation number (U1). Therefore, when selecting the look-ahead zone effect determination table, the sub CPU 102a determines the pre-determination result indicated by the start-up opening prize designating command stored in the sub-RAM 102c and which is the target of the final opening prize-winning processing and the second determination in the sub-RAM 102c. Reference is made to the number of first starting port winning designation commands stored in one effect information reservation storage area (first storage to fourth storage), that is, the first special figure reservation number (U1).

  Also, in each look-ahead zone effect scenario judgment table associated with the pre-judgment result and the first special figure reservation number (U1), a look-ahead zone effect scenario judgment value, such as a selection rate (%) for each scenario, The prefetch zone effect scenario is stored in association with the scenario.

  In addition, “the relevant change”, “before one change”, “before two changes” and “before three changes” described in the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table are the look-ahead zone effect, the successful fanning effect, the fantastic failure effect 1 or This indicates the timing at which the fanning failure effect 2 is executed. Here, the “variation” represents a variation display of a special symbol corresponding to the starting-port winning designation command related to the starting-port winning processing (hereinafter, referred to as “the variation”). The change display of the special symbol immediately before the change is performed, “2 before change” indicates the change display of the special symbol two changes before the change is performed, and “3 before change” indicates that the change is not performed. This shows the display of the change of the special symbol three times before.

  When performing the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination in step S1307-12, the sub CPU 102a stores the look-ahead zone effect scenario data indicating the look-ahead zone effect scenario, which is the determination result, in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c. . The pre-reading zone effect scenario data is stored in the pre-reading zone effect scenario area in the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start-up winning award designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-13, the sub CPU 102a determines that the result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination in the step S1307-12 is a look-ahead zone effect scenario that includes execution of a zone-pulling effect, not limited to whether or not a look-ahead zone effect is executed. In other words, in other words, it is determined whether or not to execute the zone-flicking effect based on the starting-port winning designation command related to the starting-port winning processing. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307-14 when determining to execute the zone tilting effect, and shifts the process to step S1307-4 when determining not to execute the zone tilting effect.

  In step S1307-14, the sub CPU 102a determines the final number of persons related to the icon of the zone indication effect (hereinafter, simply referred to as “final number”) by using the final number determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. Obtains the random number for final number determination indicated by.

  In step S1307-15, the sub CPU 102a selects the final number determination table for determining the final number, and checks the selected table against the final number determination random number acquired in step S1305-14 to determine the final number. The final number of people to determine is determined.

  The final number of persons is the number of persons constituting the icons used for the zone sign effect, and refers to the number of persons who finally reach. The reason why it is “final” is that the production mode of the zone predictive effect, in other words, the number of people constituting the icons used for the zone predictive effect (the display mode of the icons) may change in the middle. is there. In the present embodiment, the final number of persons is set to four types of one, three, five, and seven, and "one" corresponds to the second special mode, and "three" is the third. “5 people” corresponds to the third special mode 2, and “7” corresponds to the third special mode 3. In other words, deciding the final number of people can also be deciding the final icon display mode for the zone indication effect.

  The final number determination table shown in FIG. 51 is associated with the look-ahead zone effect scenario determined in the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination. In each final number determination table associated with the look-ahead zone rendering scenario, the final number determination value and the final number are stored in association with each other so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 51 is obtained. Therefore, when selecting the final number determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the look-ahead zone effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c.

  Further, the “sign effect scenario determination TBL.No” described in the final number determination table is identification information of a sign effect scenario determination table used in zone sign effect scenario determination described later, and is used in the starting opening winning process. The determination result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination is associated with the determination result of the final number of people determination. Therefore, the final number of persons is determined by the final number of persons determination, and the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone precursor effect scenario determination is determined.

  In step S1307-16, the sub CPU 102a obtains a zone precursor effect scenario determination random number indicated by the zone precursor effect scenario determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c in order to determine a zone precursor effect scenario.

  The zone precursor effect scenario means the effect content of the zone precursor effect. In the effect contents of the zone precursor effect, whether or not the zone precursor effect can be executed, and the icon display mode when the zone precursor effect is executed, are any of the second special mode or the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3. The change timing and the icon display mode after the change (the number of persons configuring the icon) when the change occurs are included.

  In step S1307-17, the sub CPU 102a selects the zone precursor effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 52) for performing the zone precursor effect scenario determination, and stores the zone precursor effect scenario acquired in step S1307-16 in the selected determination table. A zone predictive effect scenario determination for determining a zone predictive effect scenario is performed by collating random numbers for predictive effect scenario determination.

  As described above, the zone precursor effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 includes the precursor effect scenario determination TBL. No. Therefore, when selecting the zone indication effect scenario determination table, the sub CPU 102a determines the indication effect scenario determination TBL. Derived as the determination result of the final number determination in step S1307-15. No. is referred to.

  The timing of “winning”, “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”, and “before 2 changes → before 1 change” described in the zone precursor effect scenario determination table are the timings at which the number of icons constituting the zone precursor effect is generated Is represented. Here, “at the time of winning” indicates the time when a special figure hold corresponding to the starting-port winning-specifying command related to the starting-port winning processing is performed, and “3 before change → 2 before change” is performed. The period from the end of the change display of the special symbol three before the end to the start of the change display of the special symbol two before (at the time of shifting the hold icon). This represents a period from the end of the change display of the special symbol two places before the change is performed to the start of the change display of the immediately preceding special symbol (at the time of shifting the hold icon).

  In FIG. 52, the timing of the number of persons constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect is “at the time of winning”, “before 3 changes → 2 times before”, and “2 times before → 1 times before change”. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the number of persons constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes is “at the time of winning”, “4 before change → 3 before change”, and “3 before change → 2 before change”. And “one change before” and “one change before”, and the zone indication effect scenario determination table used when the zone indication effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 52 is the first special figure reservation number “3”. Therefore, only “at the time of winning”, “before 3 changes → 2 times before” and “2 times before → 1 times before change” can occur.

  In the zone predictive effect scenario determination table used in the case of the first special figure reservation number “4”, the timing at which the number of persons configuring the icons related to the zone predictive effect changes is “when a prize is won”, “before 4 changes → “3 before change”, “3 before change → 2 before change” and “2 before change → 1 before change” are set, and in the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the case of the first special figure reservation number “2”, the zone The timing of the change of the number of persons composing the icon related to the precursor effect is set to “at the time of winning” and “before two changes → before one change”, and the precursor effect scenario used in the case of the first special figure reservation number “1” In the determination table, “at the time of winning” is set as the timing at which the number of people configuring the icon related to the zone indication effect changes.

  In FIG. 52, the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” described below the column of the timing at which the number of persons configuring the icon related to the zone precursor effect change indicate at that timing. This indicates that the icon changes to a display mode icon composed of the number of persons.

  Therefore, for example, in the precursor effect scenario 17-1, the display mode of the hold icon generated at the time of winning and the icon displayed at that time is the display mode (second special mode) including the number of persons “1”, and “3” In “before change → 2 before change”, the display mode of the icon displayed at that time is a display mode (third special mode 1) including the number of persons “3”, and in “2 before change → before 1 change”, The display mode of the icon displayed at that time represents the effect content of the zone precursor effect in which the display mode of the number of persons “5” is the display mode (third special mode 2).

  When the sub CPU 102a performs the zone indication effect scenario determination in step S1307-17, the sub CPU 102a stores the zone indication effect scenario data indicating the zone indication effect scenario as the determination result in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c. . The storage of the zone predictive effect scenario data is performed in the zone predictive effect scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-18, the sub CPU 102a outputs the pre-read zone effect scenario that is the determination result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination in step S1307-12 and the zone predictive effect scenario that is the determination result of the zone predictive effect scenario determination in step S1307-17. A look-ahead zone effect control command indicating the effect contents is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The look-ahead zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the look-ahead zone effect control command, the zone precursor effect and the zone propulsion are performed according to the zone sign effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect control command and the effect contents indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario. The effect and the look-ahead zone effect are controlled.

  In step S1307-19, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination in the step S1307-12 is a look-ahead zone effect scenario including execution of a look-ahead zone effect, in other words, the starting port. It is determined whether or not to execute a pre-reading zone effect based on a start-up winning award designation command related to a winning process. If the sub CPU 102a determines to execute the look-ahead zone effect, the process moves to step S1307-20, and does not execute the look-ahead zone effect, but executes the zone-pulling effect (hereinafter, the pre-fetch zone effect is not executed, but the zone-pulling effect is executed. If it is determined that the execution is to be referred to as “gasse zone provoking effect”), the process proceeds to step S1307-21.

  In step S1307-20, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 53) for executing a look-ahead zone effect for determining an icon display mode scenario when performing a look-ahead zone effect. The icon display mode scenario determination for determining the icon display mode scenario is performed by collating the icon display mode scenario determination random number acquired in step S1307-2 with the determined determination table.

  An icon display mode scenario determination table for execution of a look-ahead zone effect shown in FIG. 53 is a sign effect scenario in which the determination result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number of people determination in the starting opening winning process are associated. It is provided for each. Therefore, when selecting the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the look-ahead zone effect, the sub CPU 102a refers to the precursor effect scenario indicated by the precursor effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c.

  In each icon display mode scenario determination table provided for each indication effect scenario, a plurality of icon display mode scenarios are provided, and an icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately assigned to each icon display mode scenario. ing.

  In addition, “at the time of winning”, “before two changes”, “before one change”, and “the relevant change” described in the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the look-ahead zone effect indicate the timing at which the icon display mode changes. Represents. As described above, when the look-ahead zone effect is being executed, the display mode of the displayed zone effect target icon is the third special mode 3, and the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon is the third special mode 6. .

  In addition, even if the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, before the look-ahead zone effect is executed, the zone effect target icon becomes the second special mode or the third special mode 1, 2 as the zone precursor effect, and the zone effect The non-target icons are the second special mode or the third special mode 4, 5. Then, when the icon of the second special mode or the third special mode including the silhouette of the person is displayed, the silhouette of the person configuring the changing icon (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode) May change in color.

  For example, “white → green” of “before two changes” in the icon display mode scenario “5” in FIG. 53 is a silhouette of a person configuring the icon displayed in white (the main silhouette portion in the third special mode). Changes to green.

  Similarly, “white → green → red → zebra → rainbow” of “variation” of the icon display mode scenario “15” in FIG. 53 indicates the silhouette of the person configuring the icon displayed in white (third. In the special mode, the color of the main silhouette portion changes gradually from green to red to zebra pattern to rainbow.

  The color of the silhouette of the person constituting the icon (the main silhouette portion in the third special mode) is appropriately changed in accordance with the content of the fluctuating performance performed at that time. The production contents of the variable production for changing the color of the silhouette of the person include temporary stop or re-variation of the pseudo continuous production, and step-by-step one or more times during the variable production depending on the expectation of the jackpot winning. At the time of step-up of a so-called step-up notice in which an effect (effect image, effect sound, or the like) is stepped up, a predetermined cut-in notice for displaying a cut-in image corresponding to the expectation of the jackpot winning on the image display device 14, the jackpot winning A speech state is output from the speech output device 15 while a speech image according to the degree of expectation is displayed on the image display device 14, a speech notice, the appearance of a character, or the execution of a development effect that evolves into super reach, a reach state is established. At this time, it is appropriately set according to the fluctuating effect at that time, such as a predetermined motion effect by the effect accessory device 17.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the color of the silhouette of the person (the main silhouette portion in the third special mode) constituting the icon according to the icon display mode scenario for executing the look-ahead zone effect changes is determined according to the present embodiment. The present invention is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate, such as when the icon shifts when a predetermined variable effect ends and the next variable effect starts.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the icon display mode scenario in step S1307-20, the sub CPU 102a stores the icon display mode scenario data indicating the icon display mode scenario indicating the determination result in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c. . The changing icon display mode scenario data is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit that stores the starting port winning designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-21, the sub CPU 102a shows the same normal icon display mode scenario as that in step S1307-10 as the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command that triggers the execution of the gasse zone provoking effect. The normal icon display mode scenario data is stored in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In the present embodiment, basically, the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command which is an opportunity to execute the gasse zone fueling effect is a normal mode. A determination table similar to the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the look-ahead zone effect is also provided for the icon display mode scenario of the icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command, and based on the table, step S1307-20 is performed. The determination may be performed in the same manner as the pre-reading zone effect icon display mode scenario determination.

  Here, “basically” means that, as described above, when the zone indication effect is executed when the icon is displayed in the normal mode, the icon is normally set according to the execution. This is because the mode changes to the look-ahead zone effect execution suggestion mode or the pre-read zone effect execution notification mode. The storage of the normal icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting port winning designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-22, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer, the icon display control command indicated by the icon display mode scenario set in the icon display mode scenario area of the sub RAM 102c in the main starting port winning process, and The time processing ends.

  The icon display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. Upon receiving the icon display control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 display icons according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the changing icon display control command.

  In step S1307-4, the sub CPU 102a performs an icon display mode scenario determination process in a case where the zone tilting effect is not executed (an icon display mode scenario determining process for not performing the tilting effect).

(Finding the icon display mode scenario for non-executing production by the production control board)
Here, the icon display mode scenario determination process for the fanning effect non-execution will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1307-4-1, the sub CPU 102a determines that the icon change notice prohibition period is a period during which the icon change notice that sets the icon display form to the special form is currently prohibited. During a reach effect such as during reach or SP reach, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the display of the special symbol is started and a predetermined time before the stop display of the special symbol is performed (for example, (10 seconds), or whether an effect for changing the display mode of the icon is already executed or scheduled to be executed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the icon change notice period, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307-4-16, and if it determines that it is not the icon change notice period, shifts the processing to step S1307-4-2.

  In step S1307-4-16, the sub CPU 102a stores the same normal icon display mode scenario data as the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in step S1307-10 in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The storage of the normal icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting port winning designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-4-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode A, which is the normal effect mode, is currently set. This is because, in the present embodiment, a handshake event notice described later is performed only in the effect mode A. When determining that effect mode A is set, sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1307-4-3, and shifts the process to step S1307-4-12 when determined that effect mode A is not set.

  In step S1307-4-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not all the preliminary determination results related to the preceding suspension are “loss without reach”. The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1307-4-4 when it is determined that all of them are "reach without loss", and shifts the process to step S1307-4-12 when it is determined that they are not all "reach without loss".

  In step S1307-4-4, the sub CPU 102a performs a handshake event notice determination to determine whether or not to execute the handshake event notice. Acquire the random number for handshake event notice execution determination.

  The handshake event announcement is a kind of announcement effect that indicates that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot and / or the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot, and is performed using a changing icon. In the handshake event notice, the changing icon to be notified is displayed in the fourth special mode 1, and a person who constitutes the changing icon of the fourth special mode 1 (hereinafter, referred to as a “handshake event hero”) A predetermined handshake character appearing near the changing icon display area 142 accompanying the execution of the handshake event notice shakes hands. Then, when the main character of the handshake society and the handshake character are shaking hands, the color of the main character of the handshake society gradually changes when a predetermined dialogue appears from the handshake character on the display unit 140. When the color of the handshake party hero gradually changes, then the color of the handshake party hero completely changes and the color change succeeds, and in the middle of the color change, it returns to the original color Color change may fail.

  A plurality of times the speech appears in one handshake announcement (hereinafter referred to as “the number of speeches”) is set. In the present embodiment, the number of lines is set to one of four to four.

  In addition, a handshake announcement notice suggestion effect is provided in connection with the handshake announcement. The handshake event announcement suggestion effect is an effect that indicates that the handshake event announcement is to be executed. The handshake event notice suggestion effect is to change the handshake event notice target holding icon to the fourth special icon for the execution of the handshake event notice from the time when it is determined to execute the handshake event notice until the start of the handshake event notice. This is executed by displaying the handshake event notice non-target changing icon in the fourth special mode 3 and displaying the handshake event notice non-target pending icon in the fourth special mode 4 in the second mode.

  In step S1307-4-5, the sub CPU 102a selects a handshake event notice execution determination table (see FIG. 54) for judging the execution of a handshake event notice, and acquires the selected table in step S1307-4-4. The random number for the handshake event notice execution determination is collated, and a handshake event notice execution determination for determining whether or not the handshake event can be executed is performed.

  The handshake event notice execution determination table shown in FIG. 54 is associated with the preliminary determination result of the starting opening winning designation command that is the target of the starting opening winning process. Therefore, when selecting the handshake event notice execution determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the pre-determination result indicated by the starting port winning designation command stored in the sub RAM 102c, which is the target of the starting port winning process.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in each of the handshake event notice execution determination tables associated with the pre-judgment result, the handshake event notice execution is determined whether or not the handshake event notice can be executed so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 54 is obtained. The judgment values are stored in association with each other.

  In step S1307-4-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the handshake event notice execution determination in step S1307-4-5 is "execute a handshake event notice". If it is determined that the handshake event notice is to be executed, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1307-4-7. If it is determined that the handshake event notice is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1307-4-12.

  In step S1307-4-7, the sub CPU 102a determines the final display mode of the icon when executing the handshake event notice, specifically, the final color of the handshake event notice protagonist constituting the changing icon of the handshake event notice target. In order to judge the final display mode of the icon, a random number for determining the final display mode of the icon for the handshake announcement that is indicated by the random number counter for determining the final display mode of the icon for the handshake announcement provided in the sub RAM 102c is acquired.

  In step S1307-4-8, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon final display mode determination table (refer to FIG. 55) for a handshake event notice for determining an icon final display mode for a handshake event notice, and selects the selected. An icon final display mode for handshake event announcement is determined by comparing the table with the icon final display mode determination random number acquired in step S1307-4-7 to determine an icon final display mode for handshake event announcement.

  The icon final display mode determination table for handshake event notice shown in FIG. 55 is associated with the preliminary determination result of the start-up opening winning designation command, which is the target of the start-up opening winning processing, and the current first special figure reservation number (U1). Have been. Therefore, when selecting the final display mode determination table for the handshake event notice, the sub CPU 102a determines in advance the start opening prize designating command indicated by the starting opening prize designation command stored in the sub RAM 102c and subjected to the final opening prize winning process. Reference is made to the result and the number of the first starting port winning designation commands stored in the first effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  As shown in FIG. 55, a plurality of icon final display modes are provided in the icon final display mode determination table for handshake event notice associated with the preliminary determination result and the first special figure reservation number (U1), An icon final display mode determination value is stored in association with each icon final display mode so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 55 is obtained.

  Further, the "final color pattern" described in the icon final display mode determination table for handshake event notice is used when selecting a dialog frequency determination table used in the dialog frequency determination described below, This is identification information in which the pre-judgment result, the first number of special figure reservations, and the icon final display mode associated with the start-port winning designation command related to the processing are associated. Therefore, the final icon display mode is determined by the final icon display mode determination for handshake event notice.

  In step S1307-4-9, the sub CPU 102a determines the number of lines appearing in the handshake event notice by the number of lines indicated by the line number determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c. Get the random number for judgment.

  In step S1307-4-10, the sub CPU 102a selects a dialog frequency determination table (see FIG. 56) for a handshake event notice for performing the dialog frequency determination, and stores the selected table in step S1307-4-9. The number of lines to determine the number of lines for the handshake announcement is determined by collating the acquired random number for the number of lines to be determined.

  The dialog count determination table shown in FIG. 56 is a table for determining the dialog count, and is associated with the final color pattern associated with the icon final display mode. Therefore, when selecting the dialog count determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the final color pattern derived as the determination result of the icon final display mode determination for the handshake event notice in step S1307-4-8.

  The number of lines of speech determination table associated with the final color pattern is provided with the number of lines of speech, and the number of lines of speech determination value appropriately corresponds to the number of lines of speech so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 56 is obtained. It is attached and stored. Therefore, the number of dialogues is determined by the number of dialogues determination for the handshake event notice.

  In step S1307-4-11, the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table (see FIG. 57) for the handshake event notice, and checks the selected table for the final color pattern and the number of dialogues. , An icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining an icon display mode when executing a handshake event notice is determined.

  "Icon display mode scenario determination TBL.No for handshake event notice" described in the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table shown in FIG. It is the identification information of the icon display mode scenario determination table (refer to FIG. 58) for the conference announcement, and the final color pattern and the number of lines related to the line number determination are associated with each other. Therefore, the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake announcement is determined by comparing the final color pattern with the number of lines.

  In step S1307-4-12, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for a handshake event notice for determining an icon display mode scenario when the handshake event notice is executed, An icon display mode scenario for handshake announcement is determined by comparing the selected display table with the icon display mode scenario determination random number acquired in step S1307-2 to determine the icon display mode scenario for the handshake announcement.

  The icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake event notice shown in FIG. 58 is a table for determining the icon display mode scenario when the handshake event notice is executed, and the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No. Therefore, when selecting the icon display mode scenario determination table for the handshake event notice, the sub CPU 102a determines the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. For the handshake event notice determined in step S1307-4-11. No. is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 58, an icon display mode for handshake event notice scenario determination TBL. In the icon display mode scenario for each handshake event notice associated with No, an icon display mode scenario for the handshake event notice is provided, and each handshake event notice is set so as to have a preset selection rate. The icon display mode scenario determination value is stored in association with the icon display mode scenario determination value. In the present embodiment, the number of icon display mode scenarios provided in the icon display mode scenario determination table for each handshake event announcement is various, and the number of icon display mode scenario determination tables for each handshake event announcement varies. The icon display mode scenario determination values are appropriately associated with the icon display mode scenarios for each handshake session announcement so that the selectivity of each icon display mode scenario provided in the medium icon display mode scenario determination table is uniform. It is assumed that

  FIG. 58 is an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake event notice. In the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake event notice, “at the time of winning”, “before 1 change → the relevant change”, “the (line) first time”, “the (line) second time”, “the ( The “line” for the third time and the “line for the (line) for the fourth time” indicate the timing at which the icon display mode changes due to the handshake announcement.

  As described above, the number of dialogues that can appear from a predetermined character in one handshake meeting notice is 1 to 4 times, and the “first (line)” is the appearance of the first speech in the handshake meeting notice. "The (the line) the second time" represents the appearance of the second line in the handshake announcement, and the "(the line) the third time" represents the appearance of the third line in the handshake announcement. "(Line) 4th" represents the appearance of the fourth line in the handshake announcement.

  “White” for “at the time of a prize” described in FIG. 58 indicates that when the handshake meeting notice target hold icon is displayed at the time of the prize, it is displayed in the white fourth special mode 21 immediately. . On the other hand, “white” for “before one change → the relevant change” indicates that the handshake meeting notice target holding icon displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the handshake meeting notice target change When the icon is displayed, it indicates that the handshake event notice target changing icon is displayed in the fourth special mode 11 in white.

  58 indicates that the change of the color of the “approaching success” to the color corresponding to “「 ”succeeds, and the“ approaching failure ” The change to the color that applies to "~" in "Faning success" failed, specifically, it tried to change to the color that applied to "~", but returned to the color before the change in the middle of the change . In the present embodiment, the color change is performed from the lower end to the upper end of the handshake event notice hero.

  For example, in the icon display mode scenario “120” for the handshake event notice, a handshake event notice target suspension icon of the fourth special mode 21 (the part of the person is white) is displayed at the time of winning, and the handshake event notice target suspension icon is: When the icon is shifted to the moving icon display area 142 and becomes the handshake event notification target changing icon, the fourth special mode 11 (the handshake event hero is white) becomes the handshake event notification target changing icon, and in the handshake event notification, After the first appearance of the dialogue, the handshake hero's color changes to green after a shaking handshake directing of whether the handshake hero's color of the icon during the handshake announcement notice change icon changes to green, After the appearance of the second dialogue, the protagonist directed whether or not the color of the handshake society hero changed to red, and then the color of the protagonist of the handshake society changed to red, and the third appearance of the dialogue The master of the handshake meeting The color of the protagonist of the handshake society changed to a zebra pattern after a directing of whether or not the color of the handshake changed to a zebra pattern and the appearance of the fourth dialogue, the color of the protagonist of the handshake society changed to a rainbow color It shows the content of the production where the color of the protagonist of the handshake party changes to rainbow color after the production of the change is performed.

  Further, in the icon display mode scenario “122” for the handshake event notice, the hold icon for the handshake event notice of the fourth special mode 21 (the part of the person is white) is displayed at the time of winning, and the hold icon for the handshake event notice is: When the icon is shifted to the moving icon display area 142 and becomes the handshake event notification target changing icon, the fourth special mode 12 (the handshake event hero is green) becomes the handshake event notification target changing icon, and in the handshake event notification, After the appearance of the first dialogue, the protagonist of whether the color of the handshake society hero changes to red is performed and then the color of the handshake society hero changes to red, and the second appearance of the dialogue Then, after a stir effect was performed to determine whether the color of the handshake party hero changed to a zebra pattern, the color of the handshake party hero returned to red without changing to the zebra pattern, triggered by the appearance of the third dialogue The color of the handshake party hero After the directing of whether or not it changes to a bra pattern, it returns to red without changing to a zebra pattern and whether the color of the protagonist of the handshake society changes to rainbow color with the appearance of the fourth dialogue It shows the content of the production where the color of the protagonist of the handshake party changes to rainbow color after the swaying production.

  Note that, in step S1307-4-12, the sub CPU 102a determines the icon display mode scenario for handshake event notice, and the icon display mode scenario for handshake event notice, which indicates the result of the determination. The data is stored in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The storage of the handshake event notice icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit that stores the starting port winning designation command in step S1307-1.

  In step S1307-4-13, the sub CPU 102a sets the final display mode of the icon (hereinafter, referred to as “normal icon final display mode”) when the look-ahead zone effect or the like is not executed and the handshake event notice is not executed. In order to perform the determination of the normal icon final display mode to be determined, the normal icon final display mode determination random number indicated by the normal icon final display mode determination random number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c is obtained.

  In step S1307-4-14, the sub CPU 102a selects a normal icon final display mode determination table for performing a normal icon final display mode determination, and adds the selected table to the selected table in step S1307-4-13. The normal icon final display mode determination for determining the normal icon final display mode by comparing the acquired normal icon final display mode determination random number is performed.

  The normal icon final display mode determination table is associated with the pre-determination result of the starting-port winning designation command, which is the target of the starting-port winning processing, and the current first special figure reservation number (U1) (FIG. 59). reference). Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the normal icon final display mode determination table, the preliminary determination result indicated by the starting port winning designation command stored in the sub RAM 102c, which is the target of the starting port winning processing, and Reference is made to the number of first starting port winning designation commands stored in the first effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  As shown in FIG. 59, a plurality of icon final display modes are provided in the normal icon final display mode determination table associated with the preliminary determination result and the first special figure suspension number (U1). The icon final display mode determination value is stored in association with each icon final display mode so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG.

  “Normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL.No” described in the normal icon final display mode determination table in FIG. 59 is used when selecting a later-described normal icon display mode scenario determination table. Used for Thus, the final icon display mode determination for the normal icon determines the final icon display mode, and the normal icon display mode scenario determination table is determined.

  In step S1307-4-15, the sub CPU 102a determines a normal icon display mode scenario determination table for performing an icon display mode scenario determination when a look-ahead zone effect or the like is not performed and a handshake event notice is not performed (see FIG. 60), and compares the selected table with the icon display mode scenario determination random number acquired in step S1307-2 to determine the normal icon display mode scenario. Do.

  The normal icon display mode scenario determination table shown in FIG. 60 is a table for determining an icon display mode scenario when a pre-reading zone effect or the like is not executed and a handshake event notice is not executed, and is stored in the sub RAM 102c. The result of the preliminary determination indicated by the starting-port winning designation command which is the target of the present starting-port winning processing, the number of the first starting-port winning designation commands stored in the first effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and , The normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the normal icon display mode scenario determination table, the normal icon display mode derived as the determination result of the normal icon final display mode determination in step S1307-4-13. Scenario determination TBL. No. is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 60, a normal icon display mode scenario determination TBL. In the normal icon display mode scenario determination table associated with No, a normal icon display mode scenario is provided, and each normal icon display mode scenario is set so as to have a preset selection rate. , An icon display mode scenario determination value is stored in an associated manner. In the present embodiment, the number of icon display mode scenarios provided in each normal icon display mode scenario determination table is various, and in each normal icon display mode scenario determination table, the changing icon display mode It is assumed that an icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately associated with each normal icon display mode scenario so that the selection rate of each icon display mode scenario provided in the scenario determination table is uniform.

  FIG. 60 is an example of a normal icon display mode scenario determination table. “At the time of winning”, “before two changes → before one change”, “before one change”, “before one change → the relevant change” and “the relevant change” described in the normal icon display mode scenario determination table are: The timing at which the icon display mode changes is shown.

  “Throwing kiss notice successful” described in FIG. 60 indicates that the throwing kiss notice described later is performed, and the display mode of the hold icon or the changing icon changes. “Throwing kiss notice failure 1” indicates that the throwing kiss notice described later is performed, but the display mode of the hold icon or the changing icon does not change. Further, "throwing kiss notice failure 2" indicates that a throwing kiss notice described later is about to be made, but the throwing kiss notice is not executed.

  In parentheses following “successful kiss notice successful” shown in FIG. 60, a display mode of a pending icon or a changing icon according to the throwing kiss notice is shown.

  For example, in the normal icon display mode scenario “70”, the hold icon of the second special mode is displayed at the time of winning, and the special symbol immediately before the change display of the special symbol two before the change is completed. Is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the second special mode 11, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the second special mode by the throwing kiss notice in the variable display of the immediately preceding special symbol. 12, the display content of the hold icon changes to the second special mode 13 when the change is started after the change display of the previous special symbol ends.

  In the normal icon display mode scenario “73”, the hold icon in the normal mode is displayed at the time of winning, and in the change display of the special symbol immediately before the change, the display mode of the hold icon in the throwing kiss notice is changed. 2 Attempt to change to the special mode 11, but the change ends in failure and remains in the normal mode, and when the change is started after the change display of the previous special symbol ends, the holding icon The display mode changes to the second special mode 12, and in this change, the display mode of the changing icon in the throwing kiss notice changes to the second special mode 13.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the normal icon display mode scenario in step S1307-4-15, the sub CPU 102a stores the normal icon display mode scenario data indicating the normal icon display mode scenario indicating the determination result in the sub RAM 102c. It is stored in the effect information holding storage area. The storage of the normal icon display mode scenario data is performed in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting port winning designation command in step S1307-1.

  In the present embodiment, the first special mode is set as the display mode of the normal icons when neither the pre-reading zone effect nor the handshake event notice is performed. As the first special mode, one type of blinking display mode in which the shape is circular and the color is white is set, but in addition to the above, similar to the second special mode 11 to the second special mode 15, the color is changed. A plurality of types of first special modes that change can be set.

  In this case, for example, the first special mode 11 is a display mode in which the image is circular and the color is white and blinks in white, the first special mode 12 is a display mode in which the image is circular and the color is green, and the display is a mode in which the image is circular and the color is red. The mode is a first special mode 13, the display mode is circular and the color is a zebra pattern, the first special mode 14, and the display mode is circular and the color is rainbow is the first special mode 15. Then, the first special mode in which the icon is displayed can be determined based on, for example, whether or not the pre-judgment result indicated by the starting port winning designation command related to the changing icon is a big hit.

  In this case, the jackpot winning expectation degree according to the first special mode 11 to the first special mode 15 is, like the second special mode, the first special mode 11 <the first special mode 12 <the first special mode 13 <the first special mode. It is also possible to increase the order in the order of special mode 14 <first special mode 15. When the display mode of the icon is changed from the first special mode 11 to the first special mode 15, the icon is displayed as a hold icon before the icon becomes a changing icon (a so-called “look-ahead stage”). When the icon is displayed as the reserved icon in the first reserved icon display area 141), it is possible to easily change to the first special mode 11 to the first special mode 15.

(Production mode setting process of production control board)
Next, the effect mode setting processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1310-1, the sub CPU 102a selects an effect mode determination table (see FIG. 65) for setting an effect mode related to execution of the variable effect, and in step S1310-2, the game state stored in the sub RAM 102c. Check the number of times saved, the number of remaining times with high probability.

  The effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 65 is a table for determining an effect mode, and includes a gaming state (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the number of remaining time-saving games, and a high probability. The remaining number of times, the production mode, and the production mode flag are associated with each other.

  The sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode by comparing the game state, the number of remaining time savings, and the number of remaining times with high probability with the selected effect mode determination table in step 1310-3, and sets the effect mode determined in step S1310-4. The corresponding effect mode flag (00H to 02H) is set (stored) in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process ends.

(Effect design stop display pattern determination processing of the effect control board)
Next, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and is associated with the current effect mode. Select the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table. This is because the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern representing the combination (arrangement) of the effect symbols on the predetermined effective line in the stop display of the effect symbol is divided according to the effect mode. It is.

  In step S1312-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the effect design specification command stored in the effect design specification command area of the effect information pertaining to the effect information in the sub RAM 102c. This is because each effect symbol stop display pattern determination table divided according to the effect mode is further divided by the effect symbol designation command. In step S1312-3, an effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) associated with the effect symbol designation command analyzed in step S1307-2 is selected. In step S1312-4, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the effect symbol stop display pattern determination random number.

  In each of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination tables, one or a plurality of effect symbol stop display patterns are stored in association with the effect symbol stop display pattern determination value, for example, as shown in FIG. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination value is appropriately assigned to the effect symbol stop display pattern so that the preset selectivity is achieved.

  In step S1312-5, the sub CPU 102a compares the effect symbol stop display pattern determination random number acquired in step S1312-4 with the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table selected in step S1312-3, and stops the effect symbol stop. An effect symbol stop display pattern determination for determining a display pattern is performed to determine an effect symbol stop display pattern.

  In step S1312-6, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect symbol stop display control command corresponding to the effect symbol stop display pattern determined in step S1312-5 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1312-7, the effect symbol The effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the stop display pattern is set in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The effect symbol stop display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command, when the stop display of the special symbol is performed, the stop display of the effect symbol based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command is performed. This is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a confirms the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1312-8, and in step S131-9, the variable effect corresponding to the stop display of the effect symbol according to the present effect symbol stop display pattern determination processing (from now on) (Floating effect to be performed), it is confirmed whether or not a zone-inducing effect is executed. The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1312-10 if it is determined that the zone boosting effect is to be executed, and ends the present effect symbol stop display pattern determination process if it is determined that the zone tilting effect is not to be executed.

  In step S1312-10, the sub CPU 102a determines the effect design stop display pattern for the zone propulsion effect by using the effect design stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) for the zone propulsion effect stored in the sub ROM 102b. Do. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the effect design stop display pattern determination table for the zone-boosting effect, the type (type) of the zone-boosting effect is associated with a special symbol used in the stop display of the effect symbol. Stored.

  In step S1312-11, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, an effect symbol stop display control command for zone-inducing effect corresponding to the effect symbol stop display pattern determined in the above 1312-10.

  Note that the effect symbol stop display control command for the zone flirting effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect design stop display control command for zone flirting effect, when the stop display of the special symbol is performed, the effect based on the effect design stop display pattern indicated by the command. The stop display of the symbol (special symbol) is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 in preference to the stop display of the effect symbol based on the above-described normal effect symbol stop display control command.

  For this reason, in the successful flirting effect, the special symbol related to the flirting effect is stopped and displayed in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140. On the other hand, in the fanning failure effect 1, the special symbol related to the fanning effect is stopped and displayed on the left area and the right area of the display unit 140, and the normal pattern determined in step S1312-5 is displayed on the central area. The effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fanning failure effect 2, the special symbol related to the fanning effect is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit 140, and the normal effect determined in step S1312-5 is displayed in the center area and the right area. The symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Pre-reading zone production start determination processing of the production control board)
The look-ahead zone effect start determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the look-ahead zone effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c in the storage area, and in step S1314-2, executes the real look-ahead zone effect. It is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead zone effect in the (current) fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command related to the determination process. If the sub CPU 102a determines to execute the look-ahead zone effect, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1314-3.

  In step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a look-ahead zone effect control command corresponding to the look-ahead zone effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c, and in step S1314-4, stores the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect in the sub-RAM 102c. Is set in the transmission buffer.

  The look-ahead zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process in step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105, when receiving the look-ahead zone effect control command, execute the look-ahead zone effect in the current variable effect, and when not receiving the look-ahead zone effect control command, Do not execute the look-ahead zone effect in the variable effect.

  The icon effect control command for prefetch zone effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. When receiving the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect, the image control board 105 changes the display mode of the currently displayed icon to the look-ahead zone effect information mode if the display mode of the currently displayed icon is not the look-ahead zone effect information mode. When receiving the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect, the image control board 105 continues the look-ahead zone effect notification mode if the icon is already displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode.

(Variation effect pattern determination processing of the effect control board)
With reference to FIG. 43, a description will be given of a variable effect pattern determination process performed by the effect control board 102.

  In step S1315-1, by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area, the current effect mode and Check the look-ahead zone production scenario.

  In step S1315-2, a variable effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 67 to 72) associated with the current effect mode and the look-ahead zone effect scenario is selected. This is because the variable effect pattern determination table for determining the effect content of the variable effect is set in association with the effect modes (effect modes A to C) and the look-ahead zone effect scenario.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 to 72, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with each effect mode includes a determination result of the jackpot determination, a special figure variation pattern designation command, and a selection rate (variable effect pattern determination random number). %), The type of the variable effect pattern to be selected, the variable effect control command corresponding to the variable effect pattern, the time of the variable effect corresponding to the variable effect pattern, and the effect contents of the variable effect.

  The fluctuating effect pattern is an effect mode of the fluctuating effect, and when the fluctuating effect pattern is determined, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory device 17, and The specific effect content (mode) of the variable effect performed by the effect button device 18 is also determined. For example, the effect contents of the variable effect on the image display device 14 include the components of the variable effect such as the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol (the presence or absence of the pseudo continuous effect), the presence or absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the effect development configuration. Are associated with each other. Details of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1315-3, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the effect information pertaining to the sub RAM 102c in the storage area. In step S1315-4, the random number counter for the fluctuation effect pattern determination random number is determined. In step S1315-5, the random number value shown is obtained, and in step S1315-2, the result of the jackpot determination, the special figure variation pattern designation command, and the random number for variation effect pattern determination are compared with the variation effect pattern determination table selected in step S1315-2. Determine the fluctuating effect pattern.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the variable effect control command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1315-6, and in step S1315-7, sets the variable effect time which is the effect time of the variable effect. The variable effect timer counter of the sub RAM 102c is set, and in step S1315-8, the variable effect data corresponding to the variable effect pattern is set in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  Note that the fluctuation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. Then, upon receiving the variable effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the effect device such as the image display device 14 to execute a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern indicated by the command.

  Further, the fluctuation effect timer counter is subjected to a subtraction process every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the variable effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the start of the variable effect, by using the variable effect timer counter.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table)
67 to 72 are diagrams illustrating a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a variation effect pattern. FIGS. 67 to 70 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode A, FIG. 71 is a variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode B, and FIG. It is a figure showing an effect pattern judgment table.

  Note that, of the variable effect pattern determination tables for the effect mode A, FIG. 67 is a table that is selected when the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect are not executed, and FIG. FIG. 68 (b) is a table selected at the time of execution of the zone fueling failure effect 2, and FIG. 69 is a table selected at the time of execution of the zone fueling success effect (rush into the look-ahead zone effect). FIG. 70 is a table selected during execution of the look-ahead zone effect.

  Here, each term described in the effect contents of the variable effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 67 to 72 will be described.

  “No pseudo panning” means that the pseudo panning effect that does not indicate whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol or chance that suggests the generation of the pseudo-continuous production temporarily stops (predicts the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous production) is not executed. . The “simulated fanning failure” means that the pseudo fanning effect is executed, but the pseudo-sequence symbols and the chance eyes are not temporarily stopped. “Successful pseudo-fanning” means that the pseudo-fanning effect is executed, and the pseudo-sequence symbols and chance eyes are temporarily stopped. The “pseudo-run” means that the temporarily stopped effect symbol is re-changed.

  “Fail to reach reach” means that a reach reach effect is performed to determine whether or not a reach effect is to be performed, but the reach effect is not executed without reaching reach. “Successfully reach reach” means that the reach reach effect is executed, the reach is established, and the reach effect is executed.

  “Shortening fluctuation” means that a shortened fluctuation effect in which an effect time (fluctuation time) is shorter than a normal fluctuation (6 seconds or 8 seconds) and no reach occurs is executed. “Ultra-shortened fluctuation” means that an ultra-shortened fluctuation effect in which an effect time (fluctuation time) is shorter than a shortened fluctuation effect (2 seconds or 4 seconds) and no reach occurs is executed.

  "N reach" means that a normal reach effect is executed. “N-reach (transition effect)” refers to a normal reach effect and a transition effect (developed in the process of developing into a SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) that indicates the development of SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect. Is executed. “N-reach (transition / return effect)” means that the normal reach effect and the transition effect are executed, but the return effect is executed and does not develop into the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect.

  “SP reach 1” means that the first (reachable) first SP reach effect is executed in the effect mode A (normal game state). “SP reach 2” means that the second SP reach effect dedicated to (specific to) the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. It should be noted that the second SP reach effect is set such that the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot (a special game is executed) is higher than that of the first SP reach effect.

  “SP reach 3” means that the third SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probable change game state) is executed. “SP reach 4” means that the fourth SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probable change game state) is executed. Note that the fourth SP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot (a special game is executed) is higher than that of the third SP reach effect.

  The “SP reach 5” means that the fifth (SP) reach effect dedicated (unique) is executed in the effect mode C (low probability time-saving gaming state). “SP reach 6” means that the sixth SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode C (low-probability time-saving gaming state) is executed. Note that the sixth SP reach effect is set to have a higher expectation of winning a jackpot (a special game is executed) than the fifth SP reach effect.

  “SPSP reach 1” means that a first (SPSP) reach effect dedicated to (specific to) the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. “SPSP reach 2” means that the second SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. Note that the second SPSP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot (a special game is executed) is higher than that of the first SPSP reach effect.

  "SPSP reach 3" means that the third (SPSP) reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probable change game state) is executed. “SPSP reach 4” means that the fourth SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probable change game state) is executed. Note that the fourth SPSP reach production is set so that the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot (a special game is executed) is higher than that of the third SPSP reach production.

  The “SPSP reach 5” means that the fifth (SPSP) reach effect dedicated to (specific to) the effect mode C (low-probability time-saving gaming state) is executed. The “SPSP reach 6” means that the sixth (SPSP) reach effect dedicated to (specific to) the effect mode C (low-probability time-saving gaming state) is executed. Note that the sixth SPSP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot (a special game is executed) is higher than the fifth SPSP reach effect.

  “ST effect 1” means that a first step effect, which is the first step of a story effect including a plurality of steps (stages), is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. "ST effect 2" means that the second step effect, which is the second step of the story effect, is executed. “ST effect 3” means that the third step effect, which is the last step of the story effect, is executed.

  In addition, the story production is expected to win the jackpot because the step production progresses to the next and subsequent step productions with the temporary stop and re-variation (special production) of the production design in the pseudo continuous production. This is an announcement effect that suggests (experiences the execution of a special game), and indicates that the expectation that the special game is executed is higher than in the case where the story effect is not executed (an expectation of the execution of the special game). It is a kind. In addition, the degree of expectation of winning a special game when each step effect of the story effect is executed is as follows: first step effect <second step effect <third step effect.

  “Zone fueling failure 1” means that a fueling failure fueling effect 1 that fuels whether or not a look-ahead zone rendering is performed is performed. “Zone fueling failure 2” means that a fueling failure fueling effect 2 that determines whether or not a look-ahead zone rendering is performed is performed. “Zone-inducing success” means that a zone-inducing success effect that informs (produces) that a look-ahead zone effect is to be performed is executed.

  “Zone effect” means that the first zone effect of the look-ahead zone effect is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. “The heat zone effect” means that the second zone effect of the look-ahead zone effect is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  Note that the look-ahead zone effect is a look-ahead notice effect in which a jackpot is expected to be expected by executing a zone effect over one or more variable effects (variable display of special symbols). It is a kind of predictive production that suggests that it is expensive. In addition, the degree of expectation of winning a special game when each look-ahead zone effect is executed is as follows: first zone effect <second zone effect.

  As described above, in each of the fluctuation effect pattern determination tables, a dedicated fluctuation effect pattern is set, or various effects are set so as to be executed at different rates. The effect mode of the variable effect is different for each effect mode (game state). In addition, the type of the variable effect pattern executed in the normal game state and the probable variable game state may be the same, or the type of the variable effect pattern executed in the normal game state and the low accuracy time-short game state may be the same. Alternatively, the types of the variable effect patterns executed in the probability-variable game state and the low-probability time-saving game state may be the same.

  As a first feature of the variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 67, 71 and 72, if the effect time (variation time) is the same variation effect pattern, a pseudo effect is not performed in a pseudo effect. The point is that the variable production pattern in which the continuous production is executed has a higher expectation degree of the jackpot winning (the special game is executed). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the pseudo continuous production is to be performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second feature of the variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 67, 71 and 72, if the effect time (variation time) is the same variation effect pattern, a pseudo continuous effect is executed without a story effect. The point that the degree of expectation of the big hit (the special game is executed) is higher in the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed with the story effect than in the variable effect pattern. By doing so, the player's expectation of whether or not the pseudo continuous production is accompanied by a story production can be excited, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As a third feature of the variable effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 67, 71 and 72, a specific effect is achieved by executing a transition effect after a story effect (corresponding to a sign effect) is executed as a variable effect pattern. A first story pseudo-variation effect pattern (corresponding to a first specific effect mode) that evolves into an effect (SP / SPSP reach effect), and a transition effect is executed after the story effect is executed, but a return effect is executed. A second story pseudo-variation effect pattern (corresponding to a second specific effect mode) in which a transition effect is executed after returning to the story effect to develop into a specific reach effect is set. By doing so, a novel and unprecedented fluctuation effect can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As a fourth feature of the variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 67, 71 and 72, the second story pseudo variation effect pattern has a big hit (the special game is executed) than the first story pseudo variation effect pattern. High expectations). In this way, when the story effect is executed, the player's expectation of whether the pattern is the first story pseudo-variation effect pattern or the second story pseudo-variation effect pattern can be excited, and the interest of the game can be increased. Can be improved.

  A fifth feature of the variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 67, 71 and 72 is that the story effect that returns after the return effect is executed in the second story pseudo-variation effect pattern is the first story effect before the execution of the transition effect. The third step effect is not the second step effect following the step effect (step skipping is performed across the transition effect). By doing so, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first story pseudo fluctuation production pattern and the second story pseudo fluctuation production pattern, and to excite the player's expectation for the second story pseudo fluctuation production pattern, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the above-described second story pseudo fluctuation effect pattern, the story effect that returns after the return effect has been executed is the third step effect, but may be the second step effect. Also, a pattern that executes the second step effect after the return effect is executed is defined as a second story pseudo-variable effect pattern, and a signal that executes the third step effect after the return effect is executed is a third story pseudo-variable effect pattern. When each story pseudo fluctuation production pattern is executed, the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning (the special game is executed) is set to the first story pseudo fluctuation production pattern <the second story pseudo fluctuation production pattern <the third story pseudo fluctuation production. It may be a pattern. By doing so, it is possible to excite the player's expectation as to whether or not the step is skipped with the return effect therebetween, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, in each story pseudo-variation effect pattern, the SPSP reach effect may be executed via the SP reach effect after the transition effect, or the SPSP reach effect may be executed after the transition effect without passing through the SP reach effect. It may be executed. Further, the story effect (indication effect) is executed in the variable effect pattern accompanied by the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, but may be executed in the variable effect pattern not accompanied by the execution of the pseudo continuous effect.

  The first characteristic of the variable effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 69 and 70 is that, as a variable effect pattern, a zone effect (corresponding to a sign effect) is executed, and then a transition effect is executed. / SPSP reach effect), and a zone effect by executing a transition effect after the zone effect is executed, and a return effect being executed after the zone effect is executed. And a second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern (corresponding to a second specific effect mode) that is set to execute a transition effect after returning to, and develop into a specific reach effect. By doing so, a novel and unprecedented fluctuation effect can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As a second feature of the fluctuation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, the second zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern has a big hit (the special game is executed) than the above-described first zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern. ) High expectations are high. By doing so, when the look-ahead zone effect is executed, the player's expectation of whether the pattern is the first zone pseudo-fluctuation effect pattern or the second zone pseudo-fluctuation effect pattern can be excited, and the It is possible to improve interest.

  The third characteristic of the fluctuation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 69 and 70 is that the second zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern is expected to win the jackpot (the special game is executed) than the first zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern. The point is high. By doing so, when the zone effect is executed, the player's expectation of whether the pattern is the first zone pseudo-variation effect pattern or the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern can be excited, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

  A fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 69 and 70 is that a transition effect is executed after the first zone effect is executed, but a return effect is executed to return to the second zone effect. A third zone pseudo-variation effect pattern (corresponding to a third specific effect mode) that is developed after the transition effect is executed and develops into a specific reach effect is set. By doing in this way, it is possible to excite the player's expectation as to whether or not the promotion of the zone effect is performed with the return effect interposed therebetween, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The fifth characteristic of the fluctuation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 69 and 70 is that the third zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern is more likely to win the jackpot (the special game is executed) than the second zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern. The point is high. In this way, when the zone effect is executed, the player's expectation of which of the first to third zone pseudo-variation effect patterns can be raised, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

  In addition, in each zone pseudo fluctuation production pattern, it is assumed that the transition to the SP reach production is made after the transition production, and then to the SPSP reach production (developed). However, the SP reach production is not performed after the transition production. The process may be shifted (developed) to SPSP reach production. Further, the zone effect (indication effect) is executed in the variable effect pattern accompanied by the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect, but may be executed in the variable effect pattern not accompanied by the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect.

  Further, the zone sign effect and the look-ahead zone effect are not executed in the effect mode B (probable change game state) and the effect mode C (low-probability time-short game state), but are executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C. Or in the effect mode B or effect mode C.

  Further, in each of the effect modes, the execution probabilities of the zone sign effect and the look-ahead zone effect may be made different.For example, the zone sign effect and the zone effect effect become more advantageous for the player in order to eliminate the trouble of the player. The execution probability of the look-ahead zone effect may be reduced (effect mode A> effect mode B, effect mode A> effect mode C, effect mode A> effect mode C> effect mode B, etc.), or vice versa. In order to further excite the player's expectation, the effect of the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect increases as the effect mode becomes more advantageous for the player (effect mode A <effect mode B, effect mode A <effect). Mode C, effect mode A <effect mode C <effect mode B, etc.).

  Furthermore, in each effect mode, it is possible to execute only the look-ahead zone effect without executing the zone sign effect, or to execute the zone sign effect and the look-ahead zone effect in some effect modes, but in other effect modes. Only the look-ahead zone effect may be executed. Even in this case, the execution probabilities of the look-ahead zone effects in each effect mode may be made different as described above.

(Operation effect decision processing of the effect control board)
Next, the operation effect determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1316-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1316-2, the effect stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. An operation effect determination table (see FIG. 73) corresponding to the current effect mode specified by the mode flag is selected. This is because the operation effect pattern for determining whether or not the operation effect is to be executed and the content of the effect are set in association with the effect modes (effect modes A to C).

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a) to FIG. 73 (c), in the operation effect determination table associated with each effect mode, the variation effect pattern, the selection ratio based on the random number for operation effect pattern determination, the selected operation The type of effect pattern and the effect content of the operation effect are associated with each other.

  The operation effect pattern refers to an execution mode of the operation effect. When the operation effect pattern is determined, whether or not to execute the operation effect or the operation effect in the variable effect is determined at any timing (at the timing). It is determined whether to perform the operation effect or the operation effect. Details of the operation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1316-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for operation effect pattern determination, and in step S1316-4, displays the variation effect pattern in the operation effect pattern determination table selected in step S1316-2. Then, the operation effect pattern is determined by comparing the operation effect pattern determination random numbers, and in step S1316-5, the determined operation effect pattern is set in the operation effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The sub CPU 102a determines in step S1316-6 whether the determined operation effect pattern is an operation effect pattern for executing an operation effect (including operation effect fanning), and determines that the operation effect pattern is an operation effect pattern for executing the operation effect. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S1316-7, and if it is determined that the operation effect pattern is not an operation effect pattern for executing an operation effect, the operation effect determination process ends.

  In step S1316-7, the sub CPU 102a selects an operation effect scenario determination table (see FIGS. 74 to 76) corresponding to the determined operation effect pattern. This is because the operation effect scenario for determining the operation effect scenario is set in association with the operation effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, in each operation effect scenario determination table, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the selection ratio (%) by the random number for operation effect scenario determination, the operation effect scenario to be selected, and the effect contents of the operation effect Are associated with each other.

  The operation effect scenario is an effect state of the operation effect, and when the operation effect scenario is determined, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory device 17, and The specific effect contents (aspect) of the operation effect fanning and operation effect performed by the effect button device 18 are also determined.

  For example, the effect content of the operation effect is displayed on the image display device 14, indicating that the operation effect is likely to be executed and / or the type of the operation effect that indicates (notices) the type of the operation effect to be executed. The type of the promotion image for prompting the operation (operation input) of the production button 18A, the light emission mode of the production button 18A during the display of the promotion image, and the production mode of the operation production executed by the operation of the production button 18A are associated with each other. ing. Details of the operation effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The sub CPU 102a acquires the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for operation effect scenario determination in step S1316-8, and in step S1316-9, determines the jackpot in the operation effect scenario determination table selected in step S1316-7. As a result, the operation effect scenario is determined by collating the operation effect scenario determination random numbers, and in step S1316-10, the determined operation effect scenario is set in the operation effect scenario storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  Note that the operation effect pattern set in the operation effect pattern storage area and the operation effect scenario set in the operation effect scenario storage area are referred to in the effect input control process in step S1500, and the operation effect stimulus and operation based on the operation effect scenario are performed. The effect is executed by the effect device such as the image display device 14.

(Operation effect determination table)
FIGS. 73A to 73C are diagrams illustrating an operation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining an operation effect pattern. FIG. 73 (a) is an operation effect determination table for effect mode A, FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing an operation effect determination table for effect mode B, and FIG. 73 (c) is an effect effect mode It is a figure which shows the operation effect determination table for C.

  In the effect contents of the operation effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (c), “N reach” means a normal reach effect. “△” means that the operation effect of the gasse that does not execute the operation effect is executed. “O” means that the operation effect is executed and the operation effect is executed.

  The first feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode A shown in FIG. 73 (a) is that a variable effect pattern having a higher expectation of a jackpot win has a lower rate of execution of the gaseous operation effect fanning. Can be By doing so, the player's expectation of whether or not the jackpot game is executed is less likely to be attenuated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  A second feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode A shown in FIG. 73A is that during the second normal reach effect, during the SP reach effect, and during the SPSP reach effect, the gaseous operation effect is not executed. Is set to. By doing so, the player does not feel a sense of loss after the fluctuation effect has progressed to some extent, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a first feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode B shown in FIG. 73 (b), there is no point in which the operation effect fanning of the gasses is executed. By doing so, in the effect mode B (probable change game state) that is most advantageous to the player, the player can play the game without impairing the mood of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

  The first feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode C shown in FIG. 73 (c) is that a variable effect pattern having a higher expectation of the jackpot win has a lower rate of execution of the gaseous operation effect fanning. Can be By doing so, the player's expectation of whether or not the jackpot game is executed is less likely to be attenuated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As a second feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode C shown in FIG. 73 (c), during the second normal reach effect, during the SP reach effect, and during the SPSP reach effect, the gaseous operation effect is not executed. Is set to. By doing so, the player does not feel a sense of loss after the fluctuation effect has progressed to some extent, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  A third feature of the operation effect determination table for effect mode C shown in FIG. 73 (c) is that the execution probability of the operation effect fanning of the gaseous operation is lower than that of the operation effect determination table for effect mode A. By doing in this way, in the effect mode C (low-probability time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the effect mode A, it is possible to play the game without impairing the mood of the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to do.

  Note that in the production mode A and the production mode C, the operation effect of the gasket is not executed except during the first normal reach production, but the timing thereafter (during the second normal reach production, during the SP reach production, (During SPSP reach production), the operation production fanning of the gasp may be executed. In this case, the rate at which the gaseous operation effecting is executed may become lower as the timing of the variation effect progresses, or the gaseous operation effecting may not be executed only during the SPSP reach effect. .

  Also, in the production mode B, the operation effect of the gasse is not executed. However, the operation effect of the gaseous operation may be executed only during the first normal reach effect. It may be made to execute, or it may be made not to carry out the operation production fanning of gasse only during SPSP reach production. In such a case, it is preferable that the ratio of the execution of the gaseous operation staging at each timing is lower than in the other staging modes.

  In addition, in each of the production modes, when performing the operation effect of the gaseous operation at the timing after the first normal reach effect, the operation effect of the gaseous operation is more prominent during the second normal reach effect than during the first normal reach effect. The execution ratio may be set to be higher, or the ratio of the execution of the gaseous operation effect is increased during the first normal reach production during the SP reach production and during the SPSP reach production. Is also good.

(Operation production scenario determination table)
74 to 76 are operation effect scenario determination tables that are referred to when determining an operation effect scenario. FIG. 74 is an operation effect scenario determination table for operation effect pattern A8 determined in effect mode A, and FIG. 75 is an operation effect scenario determination table for operation effect pattern B4 determined in effect mode B. Reference numeral 76 denotes an operation effect scenario determination table for the operation effect pattern C4 determined in the effect mode C.

  In the production contents of the operation production scenario determination table, the item of “operation production promotion” indicates that the operation production is likely to be executed and / or the type of operation production production that indicates (notices) the type of operation production to be performed. The type is specified.

  In the item of "operation effect swaying", "gase swaying effect" is the operation effect swaying of the gusset which is selected when the operation effect is not executed, and "suction effect A" and "stomping effect B" are the operation effects. It is the operation directing that is selected when it is performed. A specific example of each fanning effect will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the effect contents of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item of “promotion image” specifies the type of the promotion image (see FIG. 77) displayed on the image display device 14 to prompt the operation (operation input) of the production button 18A. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 77, “promoting image 1A” in the item of “promoting image” imitates a base image AG of a first form (shape) having a predetermined decorativeness and effect button 18A in a normal state (shown). ) Button image BG and a gauge image CG indicating the remaining time of the valid period. The promotion image 1A has two display modes. If the color of the button image BG is white, the promotion image 1A-1 is obtained, and if the color of the button image BG is yellow, the promotion image 1A-2 is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the “promotion image 1B” includes a base image AG of the first mode (shape), a button image BG imitating (showing) the effect button 18A in the protruding state, and a gauge image. I have. The promotion image 1B has two display modes. If the color of the button image BG is white, the promotion image 1B-1 is obtained, and if the color of the button image BG is yellow, the promotion image 1B-2 is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the “promoting image 2A” has a base image AG of a second mode (shape) that is more decorative than the first mode, and a button image BG that imitates (shows) the effect button 18A in the normal state. And a gauge image. The promotion image 2A has three display modes. If the color of the button image BG is blue, the promotion image 2A-1 is displayed. If the color of the button image BG is green, the promotion image 2A-2 is displayed. The color of the button image BG is red. Then, the promotion image 2A-3 is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the “promotion image 2B” includes a base image AG of the second mode (shape), a button image BG that simulates (shows) the effect button 18A in the protruding state, and a gauge image. I have. The promotion image 2B has three display modes. If the color of the button image BG is blue, the promotion image 2B-1 is displayed. If the color of the button image is green, the promotion image 2B-2 is displayed. The color of the button image is red. Then, the promotion image 2B-3 is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the “promotion image 3A” is a base image AG of a third mode (shape) having a higher decorativeness than the second mode, and a button image BG imitating (showing) the effect button 18A in the normal state. And a gauge image. The promotion image 3A has three display modes. If the color of the button image BG is blue, the promotion image 3A-1 is displayed. If the color of the button image BG is green, the promotion image 3A-2 is displayed. Then, the promotion image 3A-3 is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the “promotion image 3B” includes a base image AG of the third mode (shape), a button image BG imitating (showing) the effect button 18A in the protruding state, and a gauge image. I have. The promotion image 3B has three display modes. If the color of the button image BG is blue, the promotion image 3B-1 is displayed. If the color of the button image BG is green, the promotion image 3B-2 is displayed. The color of the button image is red. Then, the promotion image 3B-3 is obtained.

  The expectation of the jackpot winning corresponding to the type of the promotion image (the special game is executed) is as follows: promotion image 1A <promotion image 1B (specifically, promotion image 1A-1 <promotion image 1A-2, promotion image 1B-1) <Promoted image 1B-2), promoted image 2 <promoted image 3, and promoted image 2A <promoted image 2B (specifically, promoted image 2A-1 <promoted image 2A-2 <promoted image 2A-3, promoted image 2B -1 <the promotion image 2B-2, the promotion image 2B-3), and the promotion image 3A <the promotion image 3B (specifically, the promotion image 3A-1 <the promotion image 3A-2 <the promotion image 3A-3, the promotion image) 3B-1 <promotion image 3B-2 <promotion image 3B-3). That is, the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning (the special game is executed) corresponding to the color of the button image BG of the promotion image is white <yellow and blue <green <red.

  In the effect content of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item of “effect button” defines the operation state and the light emission mode of the effect button 18A during the effective period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid.

  "Normal" in the item of "effect button" means that the effect button 18A is arranged at the normal position (normal state), and "protruding" means that the effect button 18A is arranged at the projecting position (projecting state). Means that. Further, “○ light emission” means a light emission mode of the effect button 18A.

  The expectation degree of the jackpot winning (the special game is executed) corresponding to the arrangement (state) of the effect button 18A is such that the normal state (normal position) <the protruding position (protruding state). In addition, the expectation degree of the jackpot winning (the special game is executed) corresponding to the light emission mode of the effect button 18A is white light emission <yellow light <yellow blink, and blue light <green light <red light <red blink. ing.

  In the effect contents of the operation effect scenario determination table, the item of “operation effect” defines the type of operation effect to be executed when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period.

  “Flower 1” in the item “operation effect” means that an operation effect image in which a small amount of petals are scattered is displayed on the image display device 14, and “Flower 2” is displayed on the image display device 14. The operation effect image in which a large amount of petals are scattered is displayed, and “flower storm 3” means that the image display device 14 displays an operation effect image in which a large amount of petals are scattered. The degree of expectation of winning a jackpot (special game is executed) corresponding to each flower storm is as follows: flower storm 1 <flower storm 2 <flower storm 3.

  “Green cut-in 1” means that a cut-in image by the character 1 is displayed on the image display device 14 with a green background and / or edge, and “green cut-in 2” indicates that the image display device 14 has a background. And / or means that a cut-in image by the character 2 is displayed with a green edge, and “red cut-in 2” means that a cut-in image by the character 2 is displayed with a red background and / or edge. “Rainbow cut-in 2” means that a cut-in image by the character 2 is displayed with a rainbow background and / or edge.

  The expectation degree of the jackpot winning corresponding to each cut-in image (the special game is executed) is as follows: green cut-in 1 <green cut-in 2 <red cut-in 2 <rainbow cut-in 2 (big hit determination). Note that the rainbow cut-in 2 may be an effect that determines that a special game most advantageous to the player is executed.

  As a first feature of the operation effect scenario determination tables shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the type of the promotion image selected / determined in the effect mode A and the type of the promotion image selected / determined in the effect mode B and the effect mode C are described. It is different from the type. By doing so, the promotion image displayed on the image display device 14 can be changed according to the change in the game state (production mode), and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to make it easier for the player to recognize (understand) a change in the game state.

  The type of the promotion image selected / determined in all the production modes may be different, or the type of the promotion image selected / determined in the production mode A and the production mode B may be the same, and the type selected in the production mode C may be selected. The type of the promotion image to be determined may be different from the type of the promotion image to be determined, or the type of the promotion image selected and determined in the production mode A and the production mode C is the same, and the promotion image selected and determined in the production mode B May be different from the type.

  Further, the type of the promotion image selected and determined in the effect mode A may be larger than the type of the promotion image selected and determined in the effect mode B and the effect mode C. In this way, in the effect mode A in which the stay period is longer than in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, the types of the promotion images displayed on the image display device 14 are increased, and it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the type of the promotion image selected / determined in the production mode B may be larger than the type of the promotion image selected / determined in the production mode A and the production mode C, or may be selected / determined in the production mode C. The type of the promotion image may be larger than the type of the promotion image selected and determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode B.

  As a second feature of the operation effect scenario determination tables shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the promotion image selected and determined in the effect mode B (high-probability game state) and the effect mode C (low-probability time-short game state) is better. The point that the decorative image (appealing power to the player) is higher than the promotion image selected and determined in the effect mode A (normal game state), in other words, the promotion image selected and determined in the effect mode A is simpler. Is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to improve a player's expectation of winning a jackpot in a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the decorativeness (appealing power to the player) of the promotion image selected / determined in all the rendering modes may be different, or the decorativeness of the promotion image selected / determined in the rendering mode B and the rendering mode C The decorativeness of the promotion image selected and determined in the production mode A may be higher than that of the promotion image, and the decorativeness of the promotion image selected and determined in the production mode A and the production mode C may be higher in the production mode B. The decoration property of the selected and determined promotion image may be enhanced, or the promotion image selected and determined in the rendering mode C may be higher than the decoration property of the promotion image selected and determined in the rendering mode A and the rendering mode B. May be enhanced.

  As a third feature of the operation effect scenario determination tables shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, a plurality of types of promotion images (promotion image 2A, promotion image 2B, promotion image 3A, There is a promotion image 3B), the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning corresponding to each promotion image (a special game is executed) is different, and the appearance rate of each promotion image is a production mode B (high probability game state) and a production mode C (Low probability time-saving gaming state). By doing so, the promotion image that is easily displayed on the image display device 14 can be changed according to the change in the game state (production mode), and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the appearance rate of the promotion image 2 is the production mode B <the production mode C, and the promotion image 3 is the production mode B> the production mode C, but the appearance rate of the promotion image 2 is the production mode B> the production mode. The mode C may be set, and the appearance rate of the promotion image 3 may be set as the effect mode B <the effect mode C. Further, the appearance rates of the promotion image 2A, the promotion image 2B, the promotion image 3A, and the promotion image 3B in the effect mode B and the appearance rate in the effect mode C may be individually set.

  The fourth feature of the operation effect scenario determination tables shown in FIGS. 74 to 76 is that the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting mode) of the effect button 18A selected / determined in the effect mode A, and the effect buttons of the effect modes B and C 18A is different from the light emission mode selected / determined in 18A. By doing so, the light emission mode of the effect button 18A can be changed according to the change in the game state (effect mode), and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired, and to make it easier for the player to recognize (understand) a change in the game state.

  In addition, the lighting mode of the effect button 18A selected / determined in all effect modes may be different, or the light emitting mode of the effect button 18A selected / determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode B may be the same. The light emission mode of the effect button 18A selected / determined in the mode C may be made different, or the light emission mode of the effect button 18A selected / determined in the effect mode A and the effect mode C may be the same, and the effect mode B The light emission mode of the effect button 18A selected / determined in may be made different.

  A fifth feature of the operation effect scenario determination tables shown in FIGS. 74 to 76 is that, in any of the effect modes, the display color of the button image BG of the selected and determined promotion image and the selected and determined effect. That is, the light emission color of the button 18A is the same color. By doing so, there is no inconsistency between the display color of the button image BG displayed on the image display device 14 and the emission color of the effect button 18A, and it is possible to improve the effect.

  At a predetermined ratio (for example, 10% or the like) when the jackpot is won, the display color of the button image BG of the selected and determined promotion image and the emission color of the selected and determined effect button 18A are inconsistent. May be set to occur. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot has been won before the operation of the effect button 18A, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  A sixth feature of the operation effect scenario determination tables shown in FIGS. 74 to 76 is that, in any of the effect modes, the form (normal, protruding) of the button image BG of the promotion image to be selected / determined, The point that the form (usually protruding) of the effect button 18A to be determined is the same form. By doing so, there is no obvious inconsistency between the form of the button image BG displayed on the image display device 14 and the form of the effect button 18A, and it is possible to improve the effect.

  In addition, at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10% or the like) when the jackpot is won, a clear contradiction exists between the form of the button image BG of the promotion image selected and determined and the form of the effect button 18A selected and determined. May be set to occur. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot has been won before the operation of the effect button 18A, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the promotion image selected and determined in each effect mode is different, but the type of the promotion image selected and determined in each effect mode is displayed on the image display device 14 as the same. Only the display size of the promotion image may be different. For example, in the effect mode A, the promotion image is displayed at the first display size, in the effect mode B, the promotion image is displayed at the second display size, and in the effect mode B, the promotion image is displayed at the third display size. It is.

  In this case, which of the first display size to the third display size is the largest display size may be arbitrarily set, but the first display size <the third display size <the second display size. As described above, if the display size of the promotion image is set to be larger as the effect mode becomes more advantageous for the player, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectation of the jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game. Become.

  Further, the promotion image may be displayed in the first display size in any two of the effect modes A to C, and the promotion image may be displayed in the second display size in the other one of the effect modes. . Further, a plurality of display sizes of the promotion image in each effect mode may be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the form of the effect button 18A in each of the effect modes A to C is the same, but the form (projection state) of the effect button 18A in each of the effect modes A to C is set differently. In each of the effect modes A to C, a promotion image corresponding to the form of the effect button 18A may be displayed. For example, in the effect mode A, the effect button 18A is set to the normal state, and a promotion image simulating the effect button 18A in the normal state is displayed. In the effect mode B, the effect button 18A is set to the first protruding state, and the effect button in the first protruding state is set. For example, in the effect mode C, the effect button 18A is set to the second protruding state, and the prompting image imitating the effect button 18A in the second protruding state is displayed.

  In this case, it is good to arbitrarily set which one of the first protruding state and the second protruding state has the large amount of the effect button 18A protruding. If the effect button 18A is set such that the projection amount of the effect button 18A increases as the mode becomes higher, the player's expectation of the big hit can be easily increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the effect modes A to C, the effect button 18A is set to the normal state, and a promotion image simulating the effect button 18A in the normal state is displayed. In the other effect mode, the effect button 18A is protruded. As the state, a promotion image simulating the effect button 18A in the protruding state may be displayed. Further, the difference in the arrangement of the effect buttons 18A in each of the effect modes A to C may be limited only during the valid period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one effect button operated during the valid period is not provided, but a plurality of effect buttons having different shapes are provided, and the types of effect buttons to be operated in the effect modes A to C are changed. In each of the effect modes A to C, a promotion image simulating an effect button to be operated may be displayed. For example, in the effect mode A, a promotion image simulating the first effect button is displayed with the operation target as the first effect button, and in the effect mode B, the promotion image simulating the second effect button with the operation target as the second effect button. In the effect mode C, the operation target is a third effect button, and a promotion image imitating the third effect button is displayed.

  Further, in any two of the effect modes A to C, the operation target is used as the first effect button, and a promotion image simulating the first effect button is displayed. In the other effect mode, the operation object is set to the second effect. A promotion image simulating the second effect button may be displayed as a button. Further, a plurality of effect buttons may be provided in a number greater than the number of effect modes, and a plurality of effect buttons to be operated in each effect mode may be set. In addition, the operation target is not limited to the effect button, but may be anything that can receive an input from the player, such as a touch panel, or a motion such as an infrared sensor without an operation unit. It may be a sensor.

(Electronic control board icon change notice judgment processing)
Next, the icon change notice determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario data stored in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c in the storage area in step S1317-1, and in step S1317-2, the special figure change related to the present icon change notice determination processing. It is determined whether or not to perform the throwing kiss notice in the (present) variation effect corresponding to the pattern designation command.

  When determining that the throwing kiss notice is to be executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1317-3, and shifts the processing to step S1317-4 when determining that the throwing kiss notice is not executed.

  In step S1317-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a throwing kiss announcement effect control command indicating the effect contents according to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1317-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines the icon change advance announcement determination. The process ends. Here, the “effect contents according to the icon display mode scenario” include whether the character related to the throwing kiss notice performs the throwing kiss or leaves, and the icon that the thrown heart hits when performing the throwing kiss (the notice of the notice). Target icon), whether or not to change the display mode of the icon, and the changed display mode when the icon is changed.

  The throwing kiss announcement effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. Upon receiving the throwing kiss announcement effect control command, the image control board 105 executes the throwing kiss announcement according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received throwing kiss announcement effect control command. Details of the throwing kiss notice will be described later.

  In step S1317-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to execute the handshake event announcement in the (current) variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command related to the icon change determination process, and If it is determined to execute, the process moves to step S1317-5, and if it is determined not to execute the handshake meeting advance notice, the icon change advance notice determination processing ends.

  In step S1317-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a handshake event announcement effect control command indicating the effect contents according to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1317-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines the icon change advance announcement determination. The process ends. Here, the “effect content according to the icon display mode scenario” includes the number of dialogues in the handshake event notice and the change pattern of the display mode of the changing icon.

  The handshake event announcement effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700. Upon receiving the handshake event announcement effect control command, the image control board 105 executes the handshake event announcement in accordance with the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received handshake event announcement effect control command. Details of the handshake announcement will be described later.

(Pre-reading zone production end processing of the production control board)
Next, the look-ahead zone effect ending process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1320-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current mode is the effect mode A, that is, whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area. If it is determined that there is, the process proceeds to step S1320-2, and if it is determined that the mode is not the effect mode A, the pre-read zone effect ending process is ended.

  In step S1320-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms the look-ahead zone effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the effect information in the sub RAM 102c, and ends the look-ahead zone effect in the current variable effect. It is determined whether or not the pre-reading zone effect ends, and the process moves to step S1320-3. If it is determined that the pre-reading zone effect does not end, the process moves to step S1320-5.

  In step S1320-3, the sub CPU 102a ends the look-ahead zone effect, and sets a look-ahead zone effect end control command for returning to the background image for effect mode A in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The look-ahead zone effect end control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the look-ahead zone effect end control command, the look-ahead zone effect is ended, and the background image, the background music, and the lighting effect of the effect lighting device 16 are switched for the effect mode A. Return to things.

  In step S1320-4, the sub CPU 102a sets an icon effect control command (hereinafter, referred to as “1st icon”) that sets the display mode of all icons displayed in the prefetch zone effect notification mode by executing the prefetch zone effect to the normal mode. Reset icon effect control command ") in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  As a result, the icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and all the icons of the look-ahead zone effect notification mode displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are changed to the normal mode. A process for changing (returning) is performed.

  In step S1320-5, the sub CPU 102a confirms the zone indication effect scenario indicated by the zone indication effect scenario data stored in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c in the storage area, and ends the gasse zone indication effect with the current variable effect. If it is determined whether or not the gaseous zone precursor effect ends, the process moves to step S1320-6, and if it is determined that the gaseous zone precursor effect does not end, the present look-ahead zone effect end process ends.

  In step S1320-6, the sub CPU 102a sets an icon effect control command (hereinafter, referred to as “2nd icon”) to set the display mode of all icons displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode by executing the gaseous zone precursor effect to the normal mode. Reset icon effect control command ") in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  As a result, the second reset icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and all the icons of the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are displayed. Processing for changing (returning) to the normal mode is performed.

(Production input control processing of the production control board)
Next, the effect input control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the fluctuation effect is currently being executed. If it is determined that the fluctuation effect is being executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1500-2 and executes the fluctuation effect. If it is determined that it is not, the effect input control process is terminated.

  The sub CPU 102a checks the operation effect pattern set in the operation effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1500-2, and determines in step S1500-3 whether the operation effect pattern is an operation effect execution pattern. If it is determined that the pattern is not an operation effect execution pattern, the process proceeds to step S1500-4, and if it is determined that the operation effect is not an execution pattern, the present effect input control process ends.

  In step S1500-4, the sub CPU 102a confirms the operation effect scenario set in the operation effect scenario storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the current effect state of the variable effect. In step S1500-5, the operation effect condition is determined. It is determined whether or not the condition has been satisfied, and if it is determined that the operation effect condition has been satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1500-6. If it is determined that the operation effect condition has not been satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1500-7.

  Specifically, when the current production state of the variable production is the timing to generate the operation production promotion specified by the operation production scenario, it is determined that the operation production promotion condition is satisfied, and the current production state of the fluctuation production is determined. Is not the timing to generate the operation effect fanning specified by the operation effect scenario, it is determined that the operation effect fanning condition is not satisfied.

  In step S1500-6, the sub-CPU 102a sets an operation effect fanning designation command corresponding to the type of operation effect fanning specified by the operation effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the present effect input control process. As a result, the operation effect tilting designation command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 displays the type of tilting image (moving image) corresponding to the operation effect tilting designation command on the image display device 14. Processing for displaying is performed.

  In step S1500-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the validity period occurrence condition has been satisfied. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the validity period occurrence condition has been satisfied, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1500-8. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied, the process moves to step S1500-10.

  Specifically, when the current production state of the variable production is a timing (after execution of the operation production promotion) at which the validity period specified by the operation production scenario is generated, it is determined that the validity period generation condition is satisfied, If the current effect state of the variable effect is not the timing for generating the valid period specified by the operation effect scenario (after execution of the operation effect stimulus), it is determined that the valid period occurrence condition is not satisfied.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the validity period flag and the validity time in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1500-8, and in step S1500-9, the operation promotion corresponding to the type of operation promotion effect specified by the operation effect scenario. The designated command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the present effect input control processing ends.

  Thereby, the operation promotion designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the lamp control board 104 causes the effect button 18A to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation promotion designation command. Processing for changing the effect button 18A to the protruding state, and processing for displaying the type of promotion image (moving image) corresponding to the operation promotion designation command on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. Is performed, and the operation promotion effect is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the valid period flag is set in the sub RAM 102c (whether or not the valid period is being set) in the sub RAM 102c in step S1500-10, and determines that the valid period flag is set in step S1500. The process proceeds to -11, and if it is determined that the validity period flag has not been set, this effect input control process ends.

  In step S1500-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect button 18A has been operated. If it is determined that the effect button 18A has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1500-12, where the effect button 18A has not been operated. If it is determined, the process moves to step S1500-13.

  In step S1500-12, sub CPU 102a sets an operation effect designation command corresponding to the type of operation effect specified by the operation effect scenario in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1500-14.

  As a result, the operation effect designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105, and a process for driving the effect lighting device 16 and the effect accessory device 17 is performed by the lamp control board 104. Processing for displaying an operation effect image (moving image) corresponding to the operation effect command on the image display device 14 by the control board 105 is performed, and the operation effect is executed.

  In step S1500-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the valid time has elapsed. If it is determined that the valid time has elapsed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1500-14. The effect input control process ends.

  In step S1500-14, the sub CPU 102a clears the validity period flag set in the sub RAM 102c, sets an operation promotion end designation command indicating the end of the operation promotion effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and executes the main effect input control. The process ends.

  As a result, the operation promotion end designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105, and the lamp control board 104 is used to terminate the emission of the effect button 18A or to return the effect button 18A to the normal state. At the same time as the processing is performed, processing for ending the display of the promotion image (moving image) is performed by the image control board 105, and the execution of the operation promotion effect ends.

  The operation promotion command may be transmitted at a point in time that is a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the generation timing of the valid period. In this way, since the operation promotion image is displayed before the validity period occurs, it is possible to eliminate the useless period in which the effect button 18A cannot be operated at the beginning of the validity period.

  Further, the operation promotion end command may be transmitted at a point in time that is a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the end timing of the valid period. In this way, the display of the promotion image ends before the end of the validity period, so that the operation of the effect button 18A in the final part of the operation promotion effect can be prevented from being useless, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

(Game information display control processing)
Next, the game information display control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1600-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the jackpot game has been started. If it is determined that the jackpot game has been started, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1600-2, and if it determines that the jackpot game has not been started. The process moves to S1600-4.

  In step S1600-2, the sub CPU 102a sets the right hit display command for the big hit in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, the right hit display command for the big hit is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output processing of step S1700, and the game control board 105 fires the game ball toward the right area of the game area 2A on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. A process is performed to display right-handed information (right-handed image) prompting the user to display the right-handed information in a jackpot display mode.

  In addition, as a display mode of the right-handed information (right-handed image), in addition to the above-described large-hit display mode (size: large, decorativeness: high), a high-precision display in a high-probability game state described later. There are modes (size: large, decorativeness: medium) and low-probability time saving display modes (size: medium, decorativeness: low) for saving time during the game state. The appealing power (appealing power) of the right-handed information (right-handed display image) to the player is as follows: time saving display mode <high-accuracy display mode <big hit display mode.

  In step S1600-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a number display end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the count display end command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the jackpot number-of-plays information (number-of-plays images) displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105; A process for terminating the display of the high-probability remaining count information (high-probability remaining count image) and the time-saving remaining count information (time-saving remaining count image) is performed.

  In step S1600-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the high-probability gaming state has been started. If it is determined that the high-probability gaming state has been started, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1600-5, where the high-probability gaming state is started. If not, the process moves to step S1600-8.

  In step S1600-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a high-precision right-handed display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, a high-precision right-handed display command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the game control board 105 fires a game ball on the image display device 14 toward the right area of the game area 2A. A process for displaying right-handed information (right-handed image) prompting the user to perform the display in a highly accurate display mode is performed.

  In step S1600-6, the sub CPU 102a sets a high-accuracy extended-village-number display command corresponding to the current extended-village number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, the command for displaying the number of consecutive villas for high accuracy is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output processing in step S1700, and the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to display information on the number of villas to be hit (the number of villas image). Is displayed in a highly accurate display mode.

  In addition, as the display mode of the number-of-contests information (number-of-concierge-images), in addition to the display mode for high accuracy (size: medium, number display: white lighting), in the low-precision time-saving game state described later. There is a display mode for time saving (size: medium, frequency display: blinking white). The appealing power (appealing power) to the player in each display mode of the number of consecutive times information (number of consecutive times image) satisfies the display mode for high accuracy <the display mode for time reduction.

  In step S1600-7, the sub CPU 102a sets the high probability remaining count display command 1 corresponding to the current high probability remaining count in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the high probability remaining count display command 1 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the high probability remaining count information (high probability remaining count image) is transmitted to the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. Processing for displaying in the first display mode for certainty is performed.

  As the display mode of the high-probability remaining count information (high-probability remaining count image), in addition to the above-described first display mode for high-precision (size: medium, frequency display: blue light), And a third display mode for high accuracy (size: large, frequency display: red). The appealing power (appealing power) to the player in each display mode of the high-probability remaining count information (high-probability remaining count image) satisfies the first display mode <the second display mode <the third display mode.

  In step S1600-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the high-probability gaming state. If it is determined that the current gaming state is in the high-probability gaming state, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1600-9. If it is determined that it is not in the gaming state, the process moves to step S1600-15.

  In step S1600-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the high-probability remaining count has been updated. If it is determined that the update has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1600-10. If it is determined that the update has not been performed, the main game information display control is performed. The process ends.

  In step S1600-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the high-probability remaining count is greater than "30". If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the high-probability remaining count is greater than "30", the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1600-11. If it is determined that the number is not too large, the process moves to step S1600-12.

  In step S1600-11, the sub CPU 102a sets the high probability remaining count display command 1 corresponding to the current high probability remaining count in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the high probability remaining count display command 1 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the high probability remaining count information (high probability remaining count image) is transmitted to the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. Processing for displaying in the first display mode for certainty is performed.

  In step S1600-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the high-probability remaining count is greater than “10”. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the high-probability remaining count is greater than “10”, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1600-13. If it is determined that the number is not too large, the process moves to step S1600-12.

  In step S1600-13, the sub CPU 102a sets the high probability remaining count display command 2 corresponding to the current high probability remaining count in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the high probability remaining count display command 2 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the high probability remaining count information (high probability remaining count image) is transmitted to the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. Processing for displaying in the second display mode for certainty is performed.

  In step S1600-14, the sub CPU 102a sets the high probability remaining number display command 3 corresponding to the current high probability remaining number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the high probability remaining number display command 3 is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the high probability remaining number information (high probability remaining number image) is transmitted to the image display device 14 by the image control board 105. Processing for displaying in the third display mode for certainty is performed.

  In step S1600-15, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the low-probability time-short game state has been started. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the low-probability time-short game state has started, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1600-16. Is determined not to have been started, the process moves to step S1600-19.

  In step S1600-16, the sub CPU 102a sets a right-hand display command for time saving in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, the right-handed display command for time saving is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the game control board 105 fires a game ball on the image display device 14 toward the right area of the game area 2A. A process is performed to display right-handed information (right-handed image) prompting the user in a display mode for time saving.

  In step S1600-17, the sub CPU 102a sets a command for displaying the number of time-saving holidays corresponding to the current number of holidays in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, the command for displaying the number of consecutive holidays for time saving is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 transmits the information on the number of consecutive holidays to the jackpot to the image display device 14 (the number of consecutive holidays image). Processing for displaying in a time-saving display mode is performed.

  In step S1600-18, the sub CPU 102a sets the remaining time saving number display command 1 corresponding to the current number of remaining time savings in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the command 1 for displaying the number of remaining time savings is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output processing of step S1700, and the image control board 105 transmits the information on the number of remaining time savings to the image display device 14 (the image of the number of remaining time savings) to the first time saving number. Processing for displaying in one display mode is performed.

  In addition, as a display mode of the number of remaining time saving times information (image of the number of remaining time savings), in addition to the above-described first display mode for time saving (size: large, number of times display: white lighting), a second display for time saving to be described later. There is an aspect (size: medium, number display: white blinking). The appealing power (appealing power) to the player in each display mode of the number-of-time-remaining-times information (image of the number of remaining hours reduction) is such that the first display mode> the second display mode.

  In step S1600-19, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the low-probability time-saving gaming state. If it is determined that the game is not in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1600-24.

  In step S1600-20, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the number of remaining working hours has been updated. If it is determined that there has been an update, the process proceeds to step S1600-21. If it is determined that there has been no update, the main game information display control process. To end.

  In step S1600-21, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the high-probability remaining count is greater than “20”. If it is determined that the high-probability remaining count is greater than “20”, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1600-22. If it is determined that the number is not too many, the process moves to step S1600-23.

  In step S1600-22, the sub CPU 102a sets the remaining time saving number display command 1 corresponding to the current remaining time saving number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the command 1 for displaying the number of remaining time savings is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output processing of step S1700, and the image control board 105 transmits the information on the number of remaining time savings to the image display device 14 (the image of the number of remaining time savings) to the first time saving number. Processing for displaying in one display mode is performed.

  In step S1600-23, the sub CPU 102a sets the remaining time saving number display command 2 corresponding to the current remaining time saving number in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the command 2 for displaying the number of remaining time savings is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the image control board 105 displays the second information on the number of remaining time savings (image of the number of remaining time savings) on the image display device 14. Is performed to display the information.

  In step S1600-24, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the low-probability time-short game state has ended. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the low-probability time-short game state has ended, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1600-25, Is determined not to be completed, the present game information display control processing ends.

  In step S1600-25, the sub CPU 102a sets a normal leftward display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, a normal left-handed display command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the game control board 105 fires a game ball on the image display device 14 toward the left area of the game area 2A. A process is performed to display left-handed information (left-handed image) that prompts the user to display in a normal display mode (size: medium, decorative: low).

  The left-handed information (left-handed image) displayed on the image display device 14 is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds from the start of display or the execution of three fluctuation effects less than the upper limit of the number of second special figure reservations). Or the execution of five variable effects that are larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved second special figures, etc.), and then the image control board 105 terminates the display of left-handed information (left-handed display image). Processing is performed.

  In step S1600-26, the sub CPU 102a sets the count display end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the game information display control process. As a result, the number display end command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1700, and the jackpot number-of-plays information (number-of-houses-number image) displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 is displayed. Processing for terminating the display of the information on the number of remaining time reductions (image of the number of remaining time reductions) is performed.

  As described above, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, the type of game information to be displayed on the image display device 14 is different for each game state. Specifically, right-hit information is displayed during the jackpot game, right-hit information, consecutive-village count information, high-probability remaining count information is displayed during the high-probability game state, and right-hit information is displayed during the low-probability time-short game state. , The number of consecutive holidays and the number of remaining hours saved are displayed, and the left-handed information is displayed during the normal gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with appropriate game information according to the game state (game progress), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game information display control process according to the present embodiment, the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the right-handed information and the number of consecutive times displayed on the image display device 14 is changed for each game state. ing. Specifically, in the display mode of the right-handed information, the appealing power (appealing power, conspicuousness) to the player is high in the order of during the low-probability time-saving gaming state <high-probability gaming state <big hitting game, In the display mode of the number-of-rendition-times information, the appealing power to the player increases in the order of during the low-probability time-saving gaming state <the high-probability gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The display mode (at least one of the size, decorativeness, and color) of the right-handed information is displayed in the order of jackpot game <high-probability game state <low-probability time-short game state (appealing power, prominence) ) May be higher, or another order may be used. In addition, the display mode of the right-handed information in any two game states of the jackpot game, the high-probability game state, and the low-probability time-short game state is the same, and the right-handed information display mode in the remaining one game state You may make it different.

  In addition, the number of extended games may be displayed during the jackpot game, and the display mode (at least one of the size, decorativeness, and color) of the number of extended games is set in the low-probability time-saving gaming state <the high-probability gaming state. The appealing power to the player may be increased in the order of the middle <big hit gaming state, or may be set in another order. In addition, the display mode of the number-of-enclosed-games information in any two states of the jackpot game, the high-probability game state, and the low-probability-time-short game state is set to be the same, and the display mode of the extended-house count information in the remaining one state You may make it different.

  Further, in the game information display control processing in the present embodiment, the display mode of the advantageous period information indicating the period in which the state advantageous to the player such as the high-probability remaining number information and the time saving remaining number information to be displayed on the image display device 14 continues ( At least one of size, decoration, and color) is different between the high-probability game state and the low-probability time-short game state. Specifically, the appealing power (appealing power, conspicuousness) to the player is increased in the order of during the low-probability time-saving gaming state <the high-probability gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize (understand) that the degree of advantage to the player is different, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the advantageous period information is set such that the appealing power (appealing power, conspicuousness) to the player increases in the order of the high-probability gaming state <the low-probability time-saving gaming state. It may be. In this way, it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game information display control process according to the present embodiment, the display mode of the advantageous period information indicating the period in which the state advantageous to the player such as the high-probability remaining count information and the time saving remaining count information to be displayed on the image display device 14 continues ( At least one of size, decorativeness, and color) is changed according to the number of times of performing the variable effect (variable display) in the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability time-saving gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the game information display control process according to the present embodiment, the display mode (at least one of the size, the decoration, and the color) of the high-probability remaining number information in the high-probability game state is changed until the high-probability game state ends. It is changed a plurality of times, and the appealing power (appealing power, conspicuousness) to the player is increased with each change. By doing so, it is easy for the player to recognize (understand) that the high-probability game state is approaching the end, and it is possible to effectively incite the player's frustration and improve the interest of the game It is possible to do.

  When the display mode of the high-probability remaining count information is changed over a plurality of times, the display mode of the high-probability remaining count information is changed so that the appealing power to the player becomes mountain-shaped, or the appealing power to the player is changed. The display mode of the high-probability remaining count information may be changed so as to form a valley shape, or the display mode of the high-probability remaining count information may be changed such that the appealing power to the player becomes wavy. In this way, the player's feelings (expectation, frustration, etc.) can be easily increased and decreased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the game information display control process according to the present embodiment, the display mode (at least one of the size, the decorativeness, and the color) of the number-of-time-saving-remaining-times information in the low-probability time-saving game state is changed until the low-probability time-saving game state ends. Is changed a plurality of times so that the appealing power (appealing power, conspicuousness) to the player is reduced with each change. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be gradually calmed down, and the player's dissatisfaction with the end of the low-probability time-saving gaming state can be reduced.

  In addition, when the display mode of the number of remaining hours reduction information is changed a plurality of times, the display mode of the number of remaining hours reduction information is changed so that the appealing power to the player becomes mountain-shaped, or the appealing power to the player becomes valley-shaped. The display mode of the information on the number of remaining time reductions may be changed so as to satisfy the following condition, or the display mode of the information on the number of remaining time reductions may be changed so that the appealing power to the player becomes a wave shape. In this way, the player's feelings (expectation, frustration, etc.) can be easily increased and decreased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the game information display control process according to the present embodiment, the number of changes in the display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) of the high-probability remaining count information (advantageous period information) during the high-probability game state is determined by the low probability. The number of changes in the display mode of the number-of-hours-remaining-number-of-times information (advantageous-period information) during the time-saving game state is different. Specifically, the number of changes during the high-probability gaming state is three, and the number of changes during the low-probability time-saving gaming state is two. By doing so, it is possible to make the manner of change in the emotions (expectation, frustration, etc.) of the player different between the high-probability game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, and recognize that the game state is different. It is easy to make the game more enjoyable.

  It should be noted that the number of changes in the display mode of the number-of-hours-remaining-number information (advantageous-period information) in the low-probability time-saving gaming state is lower than the number of changes in the display mode of the high-probability remaining-number-of-times information (advantageous-period information) in the high-probability gaming state. The number may be larger. In addition, one of the display mode of the high-probability remaining count information (advantageous period information) in the high-probability game state and the display mode of the time-saving remaining count information in the low-probability time-saving game state is not changed, and the other is once or once. It may be changed a plurality of times. Further, the display mode of the advantageous period information may be changed when the change lottery is won, or the display mode of the advantageous period information may be changed when the change lottery is won when the remaining number of the advantageous period information reaches a predetermined number. You may.

  Further, in the game information display control process in the present embodiment, the display mode (size, decorativeness, color) of the shooting operation information indicating the mode of the shooting operation of the game ball such as right-handed information or left-handed information displayed on the image display device 14 is displayed. At least one) is different for each game state. Specifically, the appealing power (appealing power, conspicuousness) to the player is increased in the order of during the normal gaming state <low-probability time-short game state <high-precision time-short game state <big jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel dissatisfied during the normal game state while increasing the player's euphoria during the jackpot game.

  In addition, the appearance of the firing operation information (at least one of the size, the decoration, and the color) is set to appeal to the player in the order of normal gaming state <high-probability gaming state <low-precision short-time gaming state <big hitting game. (Appealing power, conspicuousness) may be increased, or the order may be different. In addition, the display mode of the firing operation information during the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability gaming state may be the same, or during the normal gaming state, the low-probability-saving time gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state. The display mode may be the same. Furthermore, the display mode of the launch operation information during the jackpot game is made different from the high probability game state or the low probability game time only during the opening, and the high probability game state or the low probability game state during the round game or the interval. It may be the same as inside.

  In the case where left-handed information is displayed for a predetermined period after the passing of the game ball to the winning gate 10 in the normal game state in order to warn of a right-handed shot in the normal game state, a low accuracy is provided. The display mode (at least one of size, decorativeness, and color) may be different from the case where left-handed information is displayed for a predetermined period after the end of the time-saving gaming state.

  In addition, if the display mode of the game information (launch operation information, information on the number of consecutive holidays, advantageous period information) is different over the entire period of the game state (normal game state, high-probability game state, low-probability time-short game state, jackpot game). Instead, there may be a period during which the same display mode is set. For example, a predetermined period (elapse of a predetermined time, execution of a variable number of times of display) from the start of the high-probability game state and the low-probability time-short game state is the same display mode, and thereafter, the high-probability game state and the low-probability time-short game state Until the end, the display mode may be different, or vice versa. Further, starting from a period in which game information is displayed in the same display mode or a period in which game information is displayed in different display modes, these two types of periods may be generated alternately.

  In addition, the display mode of the predetermined game information (at least one of the launch operation information, the number of extended stays information, and the advantageous period information) is changed according to the game state, and the other game information (the launch operation information, the extended stay information, etc.) , The rest of the advantage period information) may be the same regardless of the game state.

  Also, the predetermined game information (at least one of the launch operation information, the number of consecutive holidays information, and the advantageous period information) may be displayed intermittently instead of being continuously displayed during the display target period. Then, the normal production period (for example, other than during the SP / SPSP reach production, other than the pseudo continuous production) is displayed, and the specific production period (during the SP / SPSP reach production, the pseudo continuous production) is not displayed. Is also good. For example, the launch operation information (right-handed information) may be displayed continuously irrespective of the effect period, and the number of extended holidays information and the advantageous period information may be displayed during a specific effect period.

  Although the display positions of the game information (launch operation information, number of consecutive holidays information, and advantageous period information) are the same irrespective of the game state, they may be different depending on the game state. For example, launch operation information (left-handed information, right-handed information) is displayed in the left area of the image display device 14 during the normal gaming state, during the low-probability short-time gaming state, during the high-probability gaming state, and during the jackpot game (round). During (), it may be displayed in the right area of the image display device 14. In addition, the information on the number of consecutive times is displayed near the upper and lower sides of the image display device 14 during the low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability game state, and is displayed near the upper and lower sides of the image display device 14 during the big hit game. Good to do. In addition, the advantageous period information (high-probability remaining count information, time-saving remaining count information) is displayed near the upper and lower sides of the image display device 14 during the high-probability game state, and is displayed during the low-probability time-short game state. It may be displayed near the top and bottom on the other side.

  Also, the display position of the predetermined game information (at least one of the launch operation information, the information on the number of extended holidays, and the information on the advantageous period) is the same irrespective of the gaming state, and the other game information (the information on the launch operation, the number of extended holidays) The display position of (the rest of the advantageous period information) may be made different depending on the game state.

  When two image display devices are provided, different image display devices may be displayed according to the type of game information. For example, predetermined game information (at least one of launch operation information, information on the number of extended holidays, and information on the advantageous period) is displayed on the first image display device, and other game information (launch operation information, information on the number of extended holidays, advantageous period) is displayed. The rest of the information may be displayed on the second image display device.

  In addition, an image display device that displays game information according to a game state (a normal game state, a high-probability game state, a low-probability time-short game state, a jackpot game) and an effect state (whether or not an SP / SPSP reach effect is present). May be changed. For example, in a predetermined game state (at least one of a normal game state, a high-probability game state, a low-probability time-short game state, and a jackpot game) and a production state (other than SP / SP reach production), predetermined game information (launch operation information, The first image display device displays at least one of the advantageous period information and the information on the number of consecutive times, and displays other game states (normal game state, high-probability game state, low-probability time-short game state, remaining jackpot game) and effects. In the state (SP / SP reach effect), predetermined game information may be displayed on the second image display device.

  When three image display devices are provided, different image display devices may be displayed depending on the type of game information. For example, the first image display device may display the firing operation information, the second image display device may display the information on the number of consecutive holidays, and the third image display device may display the advantageous period information.

  The types of game information include right-handed information, consecutive-number-of-houses information, high-probability-remaining-number-of-times information, time-remaining-number-of-times-remaining information, and left-handed information. Alternatively, a background image that informs (indicates) a game state to a player may be included in the game information.

(Display example of image display device in each game state)
Next, display examples of the image display device 14 in each game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 (a) is a display example during the normal game state (effect mode A), and FIG. 78 (b) is a display example during the high-probability game state (effect mode B), and FIG. 78 (c). FIG. 78 shows a display example during the low-probability time-saving gaming state (staging mode C), and FIG. 78D shows a display example during the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), during the normal gaming state, an effect mode image AMG indicating the effect mode A is displayed on the upper left of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. In the center, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side, and three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second hold icon display area. You.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), during the high-probability game state, an effect mode image BMG indicating the effect mode B is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit 140 The right-handed image KMG, which is the above-described high-precision display mode, is displayed on the upper right side of the display. It is displayed, the high probability remaining number image KKG, which is the display mode for high accuracy described above, is displayed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side in the center of the display unit 140. Then, three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second hold icon display area 143.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), during the low-probability time-saving gaming state, an effect mode image CMG indicating the effect mode C is displayed on the upper left of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit On the upper right side of 140, right-handed image ZMG, which is the above-described time-saving display mode, is displayed, and near the upper center of display unit 140, the above-described jackpot villa count image ZRG, which is the above-described time-saving display mode, is displayed. In the lower left portion of the display unit 140, the time saving remaining number image ZKG, which is the above-described display mode for time saving, is displayed. In the center of the display unit 140, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side. Three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of 140 and the second hold icon display area 143.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (d), during the big hit game (during the opening), the right-handed image OMG which is the above-described big hit display mode is displayed on the upper right side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, An opening image OPG indicating that it is a jackpot game opening is displayed on the remaining portion of the display unit 140.

  The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, which are mainly displayed during the normal gaming state (during a customer-waiting effect waiting, a frequently-executed variable reach below normal reach, etc.) are a vertically long rectangular symbol base image ZBG and nine types of characters. Is superimposed with a character image CYG indicating any one of the above, and an identification image SG indicating any one of numbers 1 to 9 corresponding to the nine types of characters on a one-to-one basis, and has high decorativeness. The design is complicated (there are many colors, bright colors, etc.).

  The character image CYG is a single image imitating any of the nine types of characters, and the identification image SG is a superimposition of a hexagonal base image and any one of the numerical images 1 to 9 (identifiers). The composite image is obtained.

  Note that the effect symbols in the first display mode may be stored as single symbol data in the CGROM 105Bb, or the symbol base image ZBG, the character image CYG, and the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105Bb. They may be combined when displayed on the display device 14. In addition, the base image and the numeral image constituting the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105Bb, and may be combined when displayed on the image display device 14.

  The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, which are mainly displayed during the high-probability game state and the low-probability time-saving game state (during a customer waiting effect standby, during all variable effects), are any of numerical images 1 to 9 (identifiers). Is a single image, and has a lower decorativeness than the first display mode (simple design, few colors, dark colors, etc.), and is an effect design of the second display mode (second effect design). .

  The effect symbols in the second display mode are stored as single symbol data in the CGROM 105Bb, but have the same shape (form) as the numeral image forming the identification image SG in the effect symbol in the first display mode. Therefore, when the numerical image is stored in the CGROM 105Bb independently, the numerical image may be displayed on the image display device 14 using the same image data. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb from being compressed.

  The special effect symbol TZ4 displayed during the normal gaming state, the high-probability gaming state, and the low-probability time-saving gaming state superimposes a hexagonal base image and any one of the numeral images (identifiers) 1 to 9. It is a composite image having lower decorativeness than the first display mode but higher decorativeness than the second display mode (complex design, many colors, bright colors, etc.). 3rd production design).

  The effect symbol in the third display mode is stored as single symbol data in the CGROM 105Bb. However, since the effect symbol has the same shape (form) as the identification image SG in the effect symbol in the first display mode, the identification symbol is not used. When the image SG is independently stored in the CGROM 105Bb, the image SG may be displayed on the image display device 14 using the same image data. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb from being compressed.

  As described above, the types (basic display mode) of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 mainly displayed in the normal game state (effect mode A), the high-probability game state (effect mode B), and the low-probability time-saving game state ( The effect symbols displayed on the image display device 14 when there is a change in the game state due to different types (basic display modes) of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 mainly displayed during the effect mode C). Can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Example of display of effect design in fluctuation effect)
Next, display examples of effect symbols in the variable effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 82.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a display example in a case where a variable effect is performed by the variable effect pattern A001 (normal fluctuation without pseudo-fanning) in the normal gaming state (effect mode A).

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), on the image display device 14, the effect symbols (first effect symbols) "1", "3", and "5" in the three first display modes of showing loss as effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed. Are stopped and displayed, and three special effect symbols (third effect symbols) "1", "3" and "5" in the third display mode corresponding to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed as the special effect symbol TZ4. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the hold icon A00 in the normal mode displayed on the first display section 141a of the first hold icon display area 141 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and changed to the changing icon A00. Then, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start changing display. Along with this, the special effect symbol TZ4 also starts to fluctuate.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (c), when the effect symbol “1” in the first display mode temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ1, the character image CYG of the effect symbol “1” in the first display mode performs a predetermined action. The stop action effect (changing the display mode) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the left symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 79D, when the effect symbol “9” in the first display mode temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ3, the character image CYG of the effect symbol “9” in the first display mode performs a predetermined action. The stop-time action effect is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the right symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 is not temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 is continued.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (e), when the effect symbol “4” in the first display mode temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ2, the character image CYG of the effect symbol “4” in the first display mode performs a predetermined action. The stop-time action effect is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the middle display of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (f), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the effect symbol “4” in the first display mode as the effect symbol TZ2 is temporarily stopped, the first effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed. The effect symbols “1”, “4”, and “9” in the display mode are stopped and displayed. Along with this, three special effect patterns "1", "4" and "9" in the third display mode corresponding to the special effect symbols "1", "4" and "9" in the first display mode are stopped and displayed as the special effect symbol TZ4. , The fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, in the case where the fluctuation effect pattern A001 (normal fluctuation without pseudo swaying) is executed in the normal game state (effect mode A), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are the first effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 over the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. It is designed to be displayed by the effect symbol (first effect symbol) in the display mode. In addition, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped, a stop action effect is performed by the effect image character image CYG in the first display mode.

  As for the variable effect patterns without reach, such as the variable effect pattern A002, the variable effect pattern A003, the variable effect pattern A021, and the variable effect pattern A024, from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation, similarly to the case of the above-described variable effect pattern A001. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the effect symbol (first effect symbol) of the first display mode over the entire period of the first symbol. In addition, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped, a stop action effect is performed by the effect image character image CYG in the first display mode.

  By doing in this way, it is possible to improve the effect of the variable effect by increasing the movement of the effect symbols while increasing the decorativeness of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 during the period in which the variable effect without the reach is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a display example in the case where the variable effect pattern A000 (short change without pseudo-fanning) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A).

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the hold icons A00 to A03 in the normal mode displayed in the first to fourth display portions 141a to 141 of the first hold icon display area 141 are shifted toward the changing icon display area 142. Then, when the holding icon A00 becomes the changing icon A00, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the first display mode start to change and display. Along with this, the special effect symbol TZ4 of the third display mode also starts the variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (b), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change, the effect symbol “1” in the first display mode is temporarily stopped without performing the stop-time action effect as the effect symbol TZ1, and the effect symbols TZ2 and TZ3. The effect symbols “4” and “9” fluctuate at low speed. At this time, the left symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (c), when a predetermined time elapses from the temporary stop of the effect symbol TZ1, the effect symbol "9" in the first display mode is temporarily stopped without performing the stop-time action effect as the effect symbol TZ3. When a predetermined time elapses from the temporary stop of the symbol TZ3, the effect symbol "4" in the first display mode is temporarily stopped without performing the stop-time action effect as the effect symbol TZ2. At this time, the middle and right symbols of the special effect symbols TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbols TZ2 and TZ3 do not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 is continued.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (d), when a predetermined time (for example, one second) elapses after the effect symbol "4" of the first display mode as the effect symbol TZ2 is temporarily stopped, the first effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed. The effect symbols “1”, “4”, and “9” in the display mode are stopped and displayed. Along with this, three special effect patterns "1", "4" and "9" in the third display mode corresponding to the special effect symbols "1", "4" and "9" in the first display mode are stopped and displayed as the special effect symbol TZ4. , The fluctuation effect ends.

  In this manner, when the variable effect pattern A000 (simulation-less shortened change) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are changed to the first effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 over the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. It is designed to be displayed in an effect symbol (first effect symbol) in one display mode. In addition, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped, the action effect at the time of stop by the character image CYG of the effect symbol in the first display mode is not performed.

  Note that the fluctuation effect pattern A020 (zone tilt failure 1 shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation effect pattern A023 (zone tilt failure 2 shortening fluctuation) are the same as in the above-described fluctuation effect pattern A000, from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbol (first effect symbol) in the first display mode over the period. In addition, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped, the action effect at the time of stop by the character image CYG of the effect symbol in the first display mode is not performed.

  By doing in this way, the movement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the shortened fluctuation effect executed during the normal game state is smaller than the movement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal fluctuation effect, and the effect of identifying the effect symbol (visual recognition) Sex) can be secured, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced due to the difficulty in identifying the effect symbols.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a display example in the case where the variable effect pattern A006 (SP reach 1 effect) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A).

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the hold icon A00 in the normal mode displayed on the first display section 141a of the first hold icon display area 141 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and changed to the changing icon A00. Then, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the first display mode start changing display. Along with this, the special effect symbol TZ4 of the third display mode also starts the variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (b), when the effect symbol “1” in the first display mode temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ1, the character image CYG of the effect symbol “1” in the first display mode performs a predetermined action. The stop action effect (changing the display mode) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). At this time, the left symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (c), when the effect symbol "1" of the first display mode temporarily stops as the effect symbol TZ3, the character image CYG of the effect symbol "9" of the first display mode performs a predetermined action. The stop-time action effect is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and a normal reach effect is performed. At this time, the right symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 is not temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 is continued.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (d), a transition effect (development effect) suggesting the development to a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) (executed in the process of developing into the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect). The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are executed and moved to the upper right side of the screen to be reduced and displayed, and the effect symbols in the second display mode are the same as those in the high-probability game state and the low-probability time-short game state (second effect symbol). Changes to At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not change with the effect symbol of the third display mode, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (e), when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the transition effect, an effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed, and the SP reach effect is started. You. At this time, the fluctuation display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 continues as the effect symbol of the second display mode, and the fluctuation display of the special effect symbol TZ4 continues as the effect symbol of the third display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (f), when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the SP reach effect, a character image indicating that the ally character has won the battle is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol TZ2 variably displayed on the upper right side of the screen temporarily stops at the effect symbol "1" in the second display mode, and a combination of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the big hit is displayed. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not change with the effect symbol of the third display mode, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (g), when a predetermined time (for example, one second) elapses after the character image indicating that the ally character has won the battle is displayed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 move to the original positions. Then, the display is enlarged to the normal size and returned to the effect symbol of the first display mode (first effect symbol), and the stop action effect is performed in a temporarily stopped state. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not change with the effect symbol of the third display mode, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (h), when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the stop-time action effect is started, the effect symbol “1” in the first display mode is used as effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the jackpot. “1” and “1” are stopped and displayed. Along with this, as three special effect symbols TZ4, three effect symbols "1", "1" and "1" in the third display mode corresponding to the effect symbols "1", "1" and "1" in the first display mode are stopped and displayed. , The fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, when the variable effect pattern A006 (SP reach 1 effect) is executed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the period from the start of the change to the execution of the transition effect and the specific reach effect (here, In the period from the end of SP reach effect) to the stop display, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the effect symbol of the first display mode (first effect symbol), and the SP reach effect is started after the transition effect is started. In the period up to the end, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbol (second effect symbol) in the second display mode. Further, at the time of the temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 before the start of the transition effect and after the end of the SP reach effect, a stop action effect is produced by the effect symbol of the first display mode.

  In addition, as for the variable effect patterns such as the variable effect patterns A007 to A017, A034 to A040, and A054 to A060, which are equal to or larger than the SP reach effect, the transition effect is executed from the start of the change, as in the case of the variable effect pattern A006 described above. Effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbol (first effect symbol) of the first display mode in a period until the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is completed and before the stop display is performed. In the period from the start of the effect to the end of the SP reach effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the effect symbol of the second display mode (second effect symbol). Also, at the time of the temporary stop of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 before the start of the transition effect and after the end of the SP / SPSP reach effect, a stop action effect is produced by the effect symbol of the first display mode.

  In this way, during the period in which the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the normal size, the effect of the variable effect is increased by increasing the movement of the effect symbols while increasing the decorativeness of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. During the period in which the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the reduced size while improving the effect, the movement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is reduced while the movement of the effect symbols is reduced, thereby improving the discrimination (visibility) of the effect symbols. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are rendered in most of the period other than the period in which the reduced size is displayed (the period in which the SP / SPSP reach effect is executed from the transition effect). Since the effect symbols of the first display mode are displayed as TZ1 to TZ3, it can be said that the basic display mode of the effect symbols in the normal gaming state is the first display mode.

  Although the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 are not displayed during the customer waiting effect in the normal gaming state, when displaying the effect symbol during the customer waiting effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed in the first display mode. Then, it may be displayed in the second display mode or in the third display mode, but the basic display mode of the effect symbols in the normal gaming state remains the first display mode.

  In the normal game state, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbols of the first display mode after the end of the SP / SPSP reach effect, but the display of the effect symbols of the second display mode is continued. You may do so. Further, when the result of the fluctuation effect is lost, SP / SPSP after the end of the reach effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed by the effect symbol of the first display mode, while when the result of the fluctuation effect is a big hit, SP is displayed. After the end of the / SPSP reach effect, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed in the second display mode, or vice versa. Further, in the normal game state, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may not be changed as they are in the first display mode.

  In addition, in the normal game state, a plurality of effect modes for changing based on the operation of the effect button 18A by the player or changing based on the establishment of the change condition are provided, and a plurality of first display modes of the effect symbols are provided. The type of the first display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the image display device 14 may be changed according to the type of the effect mode in the gaming state. Even in this case, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed in the second display mode (common display mode) during the period from the start of the transition effect to the end of the SP reach effect.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a display example in a case where the variable effect is executed by the variable effect pattern B001 (no pseudo-fanning) in the high-probability gaming state (effect mode B).

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), on the image display device 14, the effect symbols (second effect symbols) “1”, “3”, and “5” in three second display modes of showing a loss as effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed. Are stopped and displayed, and three special effect symbols (third effect symbols) "1", "3" and "5" in the third display mode corresponding to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed as the special effect symbol TZ4. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the hold icon A00 in the normal mode displayed on the first display section 141a of the second hold icon display area 143 shifts to the changing icon display area 142 and changes to the changing icon A00. Then, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start changing display. Along with this, the special effect symbol TZ4 also starts to fluctuate.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (c), when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the effect symbol “8” in the second display mode temporarily stops without performing the stop action effect as the effect symbol TZ1. At this time, the left symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ1 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (d), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect symbol TZ1 is temporarily stopped, the effect symbol "5" in the second display mode is temporarily stopped without performing the stop action effect as the effect symbol TZ3. . At this time, the right symbol of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 is not temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 is continued.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (e), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect symbol TZ3 is temporarily stopped, the effect symbol “2” in the second display mode is temporarily stopped without performing the stop action effect as the effect symbol TZ2. . At this time, the middle display of the special effect symbol TZ4 corresponding to the effect symbol TZ3 does not temporarily stop, and the variable display of the three special effect symbols TZ4 continues.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (f), when a predetermined time (for example, one second) elapses after the effect symbol “2” in the second display mode as the effect symbol TZ2 is temporarily stopped, the second effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are set. The effect symbols "8", "2", and "5" in the display mode are stopped and displayed, and a combination of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the loss is displayed. Along with this, as three special effect symbols TZ4, three effect symbols "8", "2", and "5" in the third display mode corresponding to the effect symbols "8", "2", and "5" in the second display mode are stopped and displayed. , The fluctuation effect ends.

  As described above, in the case where the variable effect pattern B001 (normal fluctuation without pseudo-fanning) is executed in the high-probability gaming state (effect mode B), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the first time in the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. It is designed to be displayed in an effect symbol (second effect symbol) in two display modes. In addition, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped, the stop action effect by the effect symbol of the second display mode is not performed.

  It should be noted that the other variable effect patterns in the high-probability gaming state (effect mode B) and all the variable effect patterns in the low-probability time-saving gaming state (effect mode C) also have the same variation as in the case of the variable effect pattern B001 described above. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the effect symbol (second effect symbol) in the second display mode over the entire period from the start to the fluctuation stop. In addition, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped, the stop action effect by the effect symbol of the second display mode is not performed.

  By doing in this way, in the high-probability game state or the low-probability time-short game state in which the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect (variation display) executed more easily than in the normal game state is likely to be shorter (ultra-shortened fluctuation is more likely to be executed). By reducing the movement of the effect symbols while lowering the decorativeness of the symbols TZ1 to TZ3, it is possible to secure the distinctiveness (visibility) of the effect symbols, and it is difficult to identify the effect symbols, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be prevented.

  Further, in any of the normal game state (effect mode A), the high-probability game state (effect mode B), and the low-probability time-saving game state (effect mode C), the effect symbol of the third display mode (third effect symbol) The special effect symbol TZ4 displayed in ()) does not execute the stop-time action effect. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of seeing the special effect symbol TZ4 smaller than the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp (recognize) the progress state of the variable display.

  As described above, in the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the effect symbols of the second display mode are displayed as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 during the waiting for customer effect or during the execution period of all the variable effects. Therefore, it can be said that the basic display mode of the effect symbols in the high-probability game state or the low-probability time-saving game state is the second display mode.

  In addition, the effect design TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect design TZ4 are not displayed during the customer waiting effect in the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability time saving gaming state, but the first display is performed when the effect symbol is displayed during the customer waiting effect. It may be displayed in a mode, may be displayed in a second display mode, or may be displayed in a third display mode. The basics of effect symbols in a high-probability game state or a low-probability time-short game state Is the second display mode.

  In addition, the high-probability game state and the low-probability time-saving game state are divided into a plurality of periods (early and middle and late, the first and second half, and the like), and a plurality of types of second display patterns of the effect symbols are provided. The type of the second display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the image display device 14 may be changed according to the type of the period in the certain time reduction gaming state. In this case, during the execution of the SP / SPSP reach effect, for example, the effect symbol of the second display mode common to a plurality of periods may be displayed, or the effect symbol of the second display mode of the type corresponding to the period may be displayed. It may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal game state (effect mode A), the high-probability game state (effect mode B), and the low-probability time-saving game state (effect mode C), the special effect symbol TZ4 is an effect symbol of the third display mode. (3rd production symbol), but in the second display mode like the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the high-probability game state (production mode B) and the low-probability time-saving game state (production mode C). You may make it display by a symbol (2nd effect symbol).

  Further, in the normal game state (production mode A), during the period in which the specific reach production (SP / SPSP reach production) is being executed, the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the production symbol (second production symbol) of the second display mode. However, as in the case of the special effect symbol TZ4, it may be displayed in an effect symbol of the third display mode (third effect symbol).

  In addition, the basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal game state (effect mode A) is the first display mode, and effects in the high-probability game state (effect mode B) and the low-probability time-saving game state (effect mode C). Although the basic display mode of the symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is the second display mode, the basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal game state is a third display mode having higher decorativeness than the second display mode. The basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the probability game mode and the low-probability time-saving game mode may be the second display mode. In this case, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed in the second display mode from the transition effect in the variable effect executed in the normal gaming state to the end of the SP / SPSP reach effect.

  Further, in the normal game state (production mode A), when the specific reach production (SP / SPSP reach production) is completed and the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are returned to the normal size, the stop action production is performed. However, the stop-time action effect may not be performed, or the stop-time action effect may be performed in the case of a big hit, and the stop-time action effect may not be performed in the case of a loss.

  Also, instead of notifying the result of the variable effect (variable display) by the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the variable effect (variable display) is performed by the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the three special effect symbols TZ4. May be notified.

  Also, the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 when the variable effect (variable display) is finished is the same. The combination of TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 are made the same, and in the case of loss, the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 are different. Is also good. In that case, the number of patterns of the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 may be larger or smaller than the number of the patterns of the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3.

  Although the change of the display pattern of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the case where the game state has changed is not mentioned, here, the predetermined return condition (in the present embodiment, the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times). However, it may be replaced with winning in a drop lottery) .A brief description will be given of a case in which a specific game state such as a high-probability game state or a low-probability time-short game state returns to a normal game state based on the establishment of the game state. Keep it.

  When returning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined return condition, the last of the last variable display executed during the specific gaming state (during symbol stop time) or the first timing of the next variable display (Before the start of the fluctuation or during the fluctuation acceleration period), an effect image for shielding the effect symbol displayed on the image display device 14 (for example, a stage change image for switching the background image of the display unit 140, only the effect symbol) And a movable member for shielding the effect design displayed on the image display device 14 (a state positioned in front of the effect design and a state retracted from the front). With the execution of the predetermined effect such as the effect of activating the (convertible member), the effect of the shielded (restricted viewing) second display mode effect is changed to the first display mode effect. Or when you switch on the symbol. It should be noted that the predetermined effect may be an effect that can draw the player's attention, instead of an effect that shields the effect symbol.

(Example of display from operation effect to operation effect)
Next, a display example from the operation effect fanning to the operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84.

  FIG. 83 (a) is a diagram illustrating a display example of a gaseous booming effect that is executed during the first normal reach effect when the operation effect scenario A8-3 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A.

  First, as shown in FIG. 83 (a-1), when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped at the same effect symbol "1" on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 and the normal reach effect is started, the promotion is performed. The image 1A-1 or the promotion image 1A-2 is displayed, and the swaying image AG1 (a dark image composed of the base image AG of the first embodiment and the button image BG in the normal state) that indicates that there is a possibility that a valid period may occur. ) Moves from the upper right to the lower left of the screen, and a gagging effect is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (a-2), although the normal reach effect continues, the fanning image AG1 that has moved to the lower left of the screen disappears outside the screen, and the effect button 18A does not occur during the effective period. Is maintained in a state where no light emission is maintained. As a result, the player recognizes (understands) that the executed operation effect fanning is a fuzzy fanning effect.

  FIG. 83 (b) is a display example from the operation effect boost to the operation effect executed during the second normal reach effect when the operation effect scenario A8-3 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A. .

  First, as shown in FIG. 83 (b-1), when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped at the same effect symbol “1” on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 and the normal reach effect is started, the promotion is performed. The image 1A-1 or the promotion image 1A-2 is displayed, and the fanning image AG1 (a dark or translucent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promotion image 1A) that indicates that a valid period may be generated is displayed on the screen. Fanning effect A that moves from the upper right to the lower left is executed. Up to this point, since the production mode is the same as that of the frustrating production, the player cannot grasp whether it is the frustrating production or the production A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (b-2), while the normal reach effect is continuing, the fanning effect A is continuously moved to the lower left of the screen, and the fanning image AG1 is moved back to the center of the screen. The promotion image 1A-1 is displayed instead of the fanning image AG1. At this time, the effect button 18A emits white light and an effective period occurs, and the gauge width of the gauge image of the promotion image 1A-1 decreases in accordance with the remaining time of the effective period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (b-3), when the effect button 18A is operated during the effective period, the display of the promotion image 1A-1 displayed at the center of the screen in a state where the normal reach effect is continued. When the light emission and the effective period of the effect button 18A end, and an image in which a large amount of petals are scattered is displayed for a predetermined period, the operation effect (flower blowing snow 3) is executed. In this way, the player is notified of the degree of expectation (the jackpot game is executed) of the jackpot winning in the variable effect (variable effect) being executed.

  As described above, the gassing fanning effect and the fanning effect A are effects that expect (fan) that there is a possibility that a promotion image is displayed and a valid period may occur. For this reason, by performing the frustrating effect and the propelling effect A, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the validity period will occur, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the case of the gusset effect and the effect A in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, it is predicted that a validity period will occur and the promotion image 2A (2A-1 to 2A-3) will be displayed. A fluttering image AG3 (a dark or translucent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promoting image 2A) is displayed.

  FIG. 84 (a) is a display example from the operation effect boost to the operation effect executed during the SPSP reach effect when the operation effect scenario A8-2 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A.

  First, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-1), at a predetermined timing during the SPSP reach effect, a valid period occurs on the front side of the heart-shaped effect image, and the promotion image 1A-1 or the promotion image 1A -2, which indicates that the effective image is to be displayed, and AG2, which indicates that the accelerated image 1B-1 or the accelerated image 1B-2 is to be displayed due to the expiration of the validity period (from the accelerated image 1B to the gauge image). The darkness or translucent image (excluding the CG) moves in an annular shape, so that the effect B is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-2), the fanning effect B ends in a state where the SPSP reach effect is continued, and the radial effect image and the promotion image 1A are substituted for the fanning image AG1 and the fanning image AG2. -2 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 18A emits yellow light and an effective period occurs, and the gauge width of the gauge image of the promotion image 1A-2 decreases in accordance with the remaining time of the effective period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-3), when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period, the promotion image 1A-2 displayed in the center of the screen in a state where the SPSP reach effect is continued. The operation effect (green cut-in 2) is performed by displaying the cut-in image CIG of the character 2 with the background and / or the edge being green over a predetermined period while the light emission and the effective period of the display and effect button 18A end. Be executed. In this way, the player is notified of the degree of expectation (the jackpot game is executed) of the jackpot winning in the variable effect (variable effect) being executed.

  FIG. 84 (b) is a display example from the operation effect booster to the operation effect performed during the SPSP reach effect when the operation effect scenario A8-3 (see FIG. 74) is determined in the effect mode A.

  First, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-1), at a predetermined timing during the SPSP reach production, a valid period is generated on the front side of the heart-shaped production image, and the promotion image 1A-1 or the promotion image 1A The moving image AG1 that indicates that the display of the promotion image -2 is displayed and the rotation image AG2 that predicts that the promotion image 1B-1 or the promotion image 1B-2 is displayed after the validity period moves in an annular shape. Thus, the stir effect B is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-2), the fanning effect B ends while the SPSP reach effect continues, and the radial effect image and the promotion image 1B replace the fanning image AG1 and the fanning image AG2. -2 is displayed. At this time, the effect button 18A changes from the normal state to the protruding state, the effect button 18A in the protruding state emits yellow light, and a valid period is generated, and the promotion image 1B-2 is displayed according to the remaining time of the valid period. The gauge width of the gauge image decreases.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-3), when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period, the promotion image 1B-2 displayed at the center of the screen in a state where the SPSP reach effect is continued. The operation effect (red cut-in 2) is performed by displaying the cut-in image CIG of the character 2 with the background and / or the edge being red over a predetermined period while the light emission and the effective period of the display and effect button 18A end. Be executed. In this way, the player is notified of the degree of expectation (the jackpot game is executed) of the jackpot winning in the variable effect (variable effect) being executed.

  In this way, the swaying effect B is an effect in which it is determined that the promotion image is displayed after the valid period is generated, and that the type of the promotion image to be displayed is foreshortened (notified). For this reason, by executing the fanning effect B, the player's expectation of which type of promotion image is displayed can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the fanning effect B is executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, the fanning image AG3 that indicates that a valid period is generated and the promotion image 2A (2A-1 to 2A-3) is displayed. A fanning image AG4 (a dark or translucent image obtained by removing the gauge image from the promotion image 2B) that indicates that a valid period is generated and the promotion image 2B (2B-1 to 2B-3) is displayed; Is generated and a promotion image AG5 (a dark or translucent image obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promotion image 3A), which indicates that the promotion image 3A (3A-1 to 3A-3) is displayed, and a valid period is generated. Out of four of the fanning images AG6 (dark or translucent images obtained by removing the gauge image CG from the promoting image 3B), which is a sign that the promotion image 3B (3B-1 to 3B-3) is to be displayed. Or 2 There has been adapted to be selectively displayed.

  In other words, in the flirting effect B executed in the effect modes A to C, there is one tilting image corresponding to the facilitating image displayed during the validity period generated thereafter and the facilitating image displayed during the validity period. One other fanning image is displayed. For example, when the promotion image 2A-1 is displayed during the effective period in the effect mode B, the fanning image AG3 and any one of the fanning images AG4 to AG6 are displayed as other images. By doing so, a clear inconsistency between the fanning image and the promotion image displayed on the image display device 14 does not occur, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that, instead of randomly determining other fanning images to be displayed when the panning effect B is executed in the directing mode B and the directing mode C, it may be determined in accordance with the expectation of the jackpot winning. .

  Specifically, since the expected degree of the jackpot winning when the fanning image is displayed is the fanning image AG3 <the fanning image AG4 <the fanning image AG5 <the fanning image AG6, the lower the expectation of the jackpot winning is, the lower the expectation is. It is preferable that a fanning image (for example, the fanning image AG3) having a low expectation is easy to be selected, and a fanning image having a high expectation (for example, the fanning image AG6) is easily selected as the expectation degree of the jackpot winning is high. This makes it possible to suggest to the player the expectation of the jackpot winning by the other fanning images, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the fanning effect B is executed in the effect modes A to C, two or more other promotion images may be displayed instead of displaying only one other promotion image. In this manner, when determining the other fanning images in accordance with the expectation of the jackpot winning, it is possible to suggest the expectation of the jackpot winning in more detail.

  Further, as for the frustrating production effect, the production effect A, and the production effect B, which are executed in the production modes A to C, the production mode is the same except that the type of the displayed image is different. Different rendering modes may be used, or the same rendering mode may be used in two rendering modes, while different rendering modes may be used in the remaining one rendering mode. In this way, the effect style of the fanning effect is diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the fanning image and the promotion image are displayed so that they do not overlap the front of the reduced effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed on the left side of the screen portion or the special effect symbol TZ4 displayed on the lower right portion of the screen. It may be displayed on a layer behind the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with at least one of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4.

(Notice of handshake event)
Next, a handshake event notice will be described. The handshake event notice is constituted by a combination of a pending icon change notice and a changing icon notice, and is displayed by a handshake event (an operation including a conversation) between the changing icon and a predetermined character in a special mode. This is an announcement effect of whether or not the expectation of the jackpot winning in the jackpot determination (special symbol lottery) corresponding to the changing icon is changed by changing the aspect (so-called, whether or not the chance is increased). This is a kind of pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) performed based on the result. First, an effect flow of a handshake event notice will be described with reference to FIG.

  The changing icon to be notified of the handshake event is displayed in the changing icon display area 142, and when the changing display of the effect design (fluctuating effect) is started, the changing icon display area 142 is first provided as a handshake event notice. , A handshake character performing a handshake with the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon and an escort character escorting the handshake character appear at predetermined locations on the display unit 140.

  Then, when the handshake character and the changing icon shake hands, and a predetermined dialogue appears from the handshake character along with the handshake, the color gradually changes from under the changing icon, and the color of the changing icon changes. An effect of whether or not the icon changes (whether or not the display mode of the changing icon changes) (hereinafter, referred to as “changing icon color change inducing effect”) is executed. Then, when the color completely changes (color change succeeds), it becomes a so-called “promotion success (chance up)”, and the jackpot winning expectation for the changing icon increases, while the color change ends in the middle, When the color of the icon during the change is returned to the color before the effect of the change of the icon (the color change fails), a so-called “promotion failure” occurs, and the jackpot winning expectation degree for the icon during the change is maintained.

  After the first changing icon color-changing effect is completed, the second handshake character appears again from the handshake character to continue the handshake announcement, and the escort character leaves the changing icon for the changing icon. Is performed, and the handshake event notice ends.

  When the second dialogue appears again from the handshake character and the notice of the handshake session continues, a second icon color change inducing effect during the change is executed. Then, during the second change, the icon color change inducing effect is the same as in the first case, and the color is completely changed (color change is successful) and the promotion is successful (chance up). Termination (color change failed) results in promotion failure.

  Then, when the second changing icon color change inducing effect is completed, a third dialogue appears again from the handshake character, and furthermore, the notice of the handshake session continues, and the escort character leaves the changing icon. The process branches when guidance is given and the handshake event notice ends.

  When the third dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues, the third icon color change inducing effect during the change is executed. Then, during the third change, the icon color change inducing effect is also completed in the same manner as in the first and second times, so that the color is completely changed and the promotion is successful (chance up), or the color change ends in the middle. Promotion fails.

  Then, when the third changing icon color change inducing effect is completed, a fourth dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice further continues, or the escort character gives a leaving guidance to the changing icon. Then, the process branches when the notice of the handshake event ends.

  When the fourth dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues, the fourth color change during icon fluctuating production always changes the color completely and succeeds in promotion (chance up). The escort character gives a leaving guidance to the changing icon, and the handshake event notice ends.

  Next, a handshake event notice will be described using a specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the hold icons A10 to A12 in the normal mode are displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, a loss may occur. It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol shown is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (b) to FIG. 88 (c), the hold icons A10 to A12 displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141c are changed to the changing icon display area 142 and the first The display is shifted to the display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b, and the variation display of the effect symbol is started. The pending icon A10 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, and is therefore changed from the holding icon A10 to the changing icon A10.

  Then, when the variation display of the effect symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is being executed, a game ball enters the first starting port 6 and a first special figure suspension is newly generated. In response to the occurrence of the special figure reservation, the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and in the starting opening winning process, it is determined that the handshake event notice is to be executed, and the number of lines in the handshake event notice is twice. And the color of the changing icon changes to green (fourth special mode 12) in the fourth special mode 21 → the first dialogue at the time of winning → the color of the changing icon changes to red (the fourth special mode 12 in the second dialogue). It is assumed that the icon display mode scenario for the handshake announcement of the effect contents changed to the special mode 13) is selected.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the hold icon A13 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the fourth special mode 21. At this time, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A10 does not change, but the holding icons A11 and A12 corresponding to the preceding holding for the newly generated first special figure holding are changed to the fourth special icons. While changing to the mode 41, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), the handshake meeting place AK appears near the changing icon display area 142 while being partially hidden by the effect EF1.

  By executing the handshake event notice based on the occurrence of the first special map reservation, the reservation icon A13 is displayed in the fourth special mode 21 and the reservation icons A11 and A12 are displayed in the fourth special mode 41. However, in order to allow the player to easily recognize the target of the handshake announcement, a heart is attached to the chest portion of the silhouette of the person related to the hold icon A13 that is the target of the handshake announcement. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), when the effect EF1 is erased, a handshake character C1 performing a handshake according to a handshake meeting notice and an escort character C2 escorting the handshake character C1 are placed in the handshake meeting venue AK. Appear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the effect symbol indicating the loss is stopped and displayed, and the changing icon A10 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. When the change display of the effect symbol is started, the holding icons A11 to A13 shift and shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display units 141a and 141b, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A11 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the holding icon A11 changes from the holding icon A11 to the changing icon A11, and the display mode is changed from the fourth special mode 41 to the fourth special mode 31 with the shift. Change.

  As soon as the changing icon A11 is displayed in the changing icon display area 142, as shown in FIG. 90B, the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A11 and the handshake character C1 shake hands. Here, since the changing icon A11 is not a target of the jackpot winning expectation related to the handshake meeting notice, no dialogue appears from the handshake character C1, and the display mode (color) of the changing icon A11 also changes. do not do.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b) and FIG. 90 (c), a reserved icon A13 of the fourth special mode 21, a reserved icon A12 of the fourth special mode 41, and a changing icon A11 of the fourth special mode 31 are displayed. In other words, if a game ball enters the first starting port 6 while the handshake event announcement suggestive effect is being performed, the hold icon A14 corresponding to the entry is displayed in a normal manner. You.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake event notice is to be executed, this occurs because the ball has entered the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 before the handshake event notice ends. This is because the execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold. However, the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold caused by entering the first starting port 6 or the like before the end of the handshake meeting notice is permitted, and the determined icon display mode The hold icon A14 may be displayed in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

  Immediately before the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the changing icon A11 ends, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the escort character C2 performs an operation of checking the clock, and the change display of the effect symbol ends. Suggest that. Then, when the changing effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start to stop, as shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (b), the escort character C2 performs the exit guidance operation for the changing icon A11. Then, the handshake character C1 performs an operation of saying goodbye to the changing icon A11 (bye-bye), and the changing icon A11 is reduced as if leaving. Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed, the changing icon A11 is completely deleted, and the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 return to the standby state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the hold icon A13 to be notified of the handshake event is shifted from the first display unit 141a to the changing icon display area 142, and the changing icon of the fourth special mode 11 is changed. As soon as A13 is reached, the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A13 and the handshake character C1 shake hands.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when a game ball enters the first starting port 6 while the handshake event notice is being executed, the hold icon A15 corresponding to the entry is displayed in a normal mode. Is done. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake event notice is to be executed, this occurs because the ball has entered the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 before the handshake event notice ends. This is because the execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold. However, the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold caused by entering the first starting port 6 or the like before the end of the handshake meeting notice is permitted, and the determined icon display mode The hold icon A14 may be displayed in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

  When the handshake between the changing icon A13 of the fourth special mode 11 and the handshake character C1 is performed, the first dialogue appears from the handshake character C1 as shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, a changing icon color change effect in which the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from below (here, from white to green) is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), when the color of the changing icon A13 completely changes and the color change succeeds, the changing icon A13 makes a guts pose and the change (promotion) of the color succeeds. And the translucent effect EF2 indicating the success of the color change is displayed on the changing icon A13 so as to be visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), when the changing icon A13 continues shaking hands with the handshake character C1 in the color (here, green) after being changed by the first changing icon color change inducing effect. 93B, the second dialogue appears from the handshake character C1, and the color of the fluctuating icon A13 gradually changes from below (here, from green to red), and the fluctuating icon color changes. A fantastic production is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), when the color of the changing icon A13 completely changes and the color change succeeds, the changing icon A13 makes a guts pose again, and the change (promotion) of the color changes. Perform an action that indicates success.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), while the reach state is established, the escort character C2 performs the exit guidance operation for the changing icon A13, and the handshake character C1 separates from the changing icon A13. Is performed (bye-bye), and the end of the handshake announcement is notified, a predetermined reach effect (for example, normal reach) is started, and as shown in FIGS. 94 (b) to 94 (c). In addition, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are erased with the execution of the development effect that evolves into SP reach, and the display mode of the changing icon A13 displayed in the fourth special mode 13 is red, which is the color at that time. The state changes to the second common mode 13 in common, and the handshake event notice ends, and SP reach is started.

  As described above, the color of the changing icon (display mode in a broad sense) is gradually changed by the handshake announcement, and a changing icon color stimulating effect of whether or not the color changes is performed. In this way, by displaying the color change process, the player can be made to pay attention to the change of the changing icon, and can easily recognize the change of the color of the changing icon.

  In the present embodiment, it is the color that changes as an object of the handshake announcement, but the change object is not limited to the color, and may be the size or shape of the changing icon. Further, the changing process can be displayed by appropriately combining a plurality of elements constituting the display mode of the changing icon such as the color, size, and shape. When a plurality of elements are appropriately combined, for example, the appearance of the dialogue changes such that the color changes at the first appearance of the dialogue, the size changes at the second appearance of the dialogue, and the shape changes at the third appearance of the dialogue. The elements that change according to the order of can be changed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the handshake announcement is made based on the result of the preliminary determination, but the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, or the special figure change The determination can be performed based on the pattern determination result.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake event notice is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols, but the execution timing of the handshake event notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the content of the effect of the variable effect. can do. Other execution timings of the handshake announcement include a temporary stop or re-fluctuation of the pseudo-run, a step-up announcement, a step-up announcement, a predetermined cut-in announcement, a speech announcement, the appearance of a character, or a super reach. It can be set as appropriate, such as when an extended effect is executed, when a reach state is established, when a predetermined action effect is executed by the effect accessory device 17, and the like.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the handshake meeting notice is given to the icon during the change, but it can also be given to the holding icon. In this case, for example, the handshake meeting place appears near any of the first display unit 141a to the fourth display unit 141d, and is displayed on the first display unit 141a to the fourth display unit 141d where the handshake meeting place has appeared. A handshake event notice may be given to the hold icon, and the process of color change (change of display mode) may be displayed. In this case, in this embodiment, a method of determining the effect contents of the handshake announcement in the icon display mode scenario determination for the handshake announcement in this embodiment (steps S1307-4-7 to S1305-4-12, FIG. 55 to FIG. 55) A handshake event notice can be made in the same manner as in FIG. 58).

  Further, as another embodiment for giving a handshake meeting notice, for example, during the fluctuation display of the effect symbols, the handshake character sequentially shakes all or some of the icons displayed at that time. By doing so, a handshake event notice can be given and the process of color change (change of display mode) can be displayed. In this case, for example, when the fluctuation effect is started, it can be performed by determining whether or not to execute the handshake event notice for any of the icons, the display mode after the change in the execution. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the process of changing the color of the icon (change of the display mode) is displayed, the icon and the handshake character are shaking hands, in other words, the target icon of the color change is displayed. An action is performed for the target icon, but some action is performed once or plural times before the target icon of the color change changes color, and the color changes after the action is completed (for example, a predetermined character is After the kiss, the color of the target icon changes after the kiss, and the color change can be performed more easily as the number of actions increases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one to four dialogues appear in response to one handshake announcement, and a one-time changing icon color change inducing effect is executed with one appearance of the dialogue. You. Therefore, the greater the number of dialogues that appear in one handshake announcement, the greater the possibility of success in color change, in other words, the greater the chance of winning jackpot winning expectations (chance up). By paying attention to the appearance of dialogue, the interest of the game can be improved. Also, in the one handshake event notice, even if the color change fails due to a certain icon color change promotion effect during a change, or even if the desired change is not achieved, if the next dialogue appears, the player's color will change It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for a change (increase in jackpot winning expectation).

  In the present embodiment, one handshake meeting notice is executed in one fluctuating effect (floating display of effect symbols), but a plurality of handshake meeting notices are fluctuated in one fluctuating effect (variable display of effect symbols). May be executed. The number of dialogues in each of the plurality of handshake announcements is determined by a scenario or by independent lottery.The greater the number of dialogues appearing in the plurality of handshake announcements, the greater the color change success In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that the jackpot winning expectation degree will increase (chance up).

  In addition, the higher the number of lines, the higher the possibility of success in color change.This means that the handshake is performed during the handshake announcement, in other words, the action is performed on the icon that is the target of the handshake announcement. The longer the playing time is, the higher the possibility of success of the color change becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation and to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the handshake announcement has the effect that one or more dialogues appear during one handshake, so the number of dialogues is caused by the shaking time. However, for example, it is also possible to make the presentation content in which one or more words are uttered in one dialog, so that the time of shaking hands changes with the length of the words in one dialog.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one to four dialogues appear in response to one handshake announcement, and a one-time changing icon color change inducing effect is executed with one appearance of the dialogue. You. Therefore, the greater the number of dialogues that appear in one handshake announcement, the higher the possibility of success in color change, in other words, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot win (chance up).

  In this embodiment, the number of appearances of the handshake meeting place AK, the handshake character C1, and the escort character C2 are set to one type, but a plurality of types are set, and the number of lines ( The number of steps for the handshake announcement, the time for shaking (the production time for the handshake announcement), and the degree of expectation of a successful color change can also be different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first speech content, the second speech content, the third speech content, and the fourth speech content in the handshake announcement are set to be different from each other. Are set to one type. Here, a plurality of types of dialog content are set for each time, and the degree of expectation of a successful color change may be varied depending on the dialog content. Further, it is also possible to set the dialog content according to the type of the handshake character. Further, the handshake character can be made to be selected by the player by operating the selection button 19A and the effect button 18A during a preset period such as a customer waiting state.

(Notice of throwing kiss)
Next, the throwing kiss notice will be described. The throwing kiss notice is constituted by a pending icon change notice and / or a changing icon change notice. The display mode of the icon is changed by a throwing kiss (moving a heart) by a predetermined character, and a big hit corresponding to the changing icon is made. This is an announcement effect of whether to improve the jackpot winning expectation of the judgment (special symbol lottery) (so-called, whether or not to increase the chance), and is a kind of pre-reading notice performed based on the result of the advance judgment (hold icon) When executed by the change notice and the icon change notice during the change, it can also be called a continuous notice effect). First, the effect flow of throwing kiss notice will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the throwing kiss notice is started, first, a predetermined character appears at a predetermined position on the display unit 140. In the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed with the start of the variable display of the effect symbols (variable effect).

  The appearing character performs a throwing kiss to fly a heart toward any of the already displayed icons (holding icon or changing icon), or goes away without performing the throwing kiss and disappears from the display unit 140. When the character leaves and disappears from the display unit 140, the throwing kiss notice ends.

  When a throwing kiss is performed by the character, a heart hits the icon targeted for the throwing kiss, and a predetermined effect occurs on the changing icon. Then, if the display mode of the icon has changed after the effect has disappeared, the character performs an operation according to the successful change of the display mode, and then disappears.

  On the other hand, if the display mode of the icon has not changed after the effect disappears, the character performs an operation corresponding to the failure in changing the display mode and then disappears.

  Next, how the throwing kiss notice is executed after the hold icon to be thrown kiss notice is changed to the special mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. For example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), a normal mode hold icon A21 is displayed in the first display section 141a of the first hold icon display area 141, and a normal mode hold icon A20 is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. When it is displayed, it is assumed that the variation display of the effect symbol (variable effect) is being performed.

  Then, a game ball enters the first starting port 6 and a first special figure reservation is newly generated. In response to the generation of the first special figure reservation, a first starting port winning designation command is issued to the effect control board 102. It is determined that the throwing kiss notice is to be executed in the starting mouth winning process, and the throwing kiss notice is determined to be the scenario 93.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the hold icon A22 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in a normal mode, and thereafter, the stop effect of the effect symbol indicating the loss is displayed. At the same time, the changing icon A20 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), when the variation display of the effect symbols is started, the holding icons A21 to A22 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, the suspension icon A21 is shifted from the suspension icon A21 to the changing icon A21 because the icon is shifted to the changing icon display area 142. The display mode of the hold icon A22 changes to the second special mode 13 (red) with the shift to the first display section 141a.

  Then, a game ball enters the first starting port 6 and a first special figure reservation is newly generated. In response to the generation of the first special figure reservation, a first starting port winning designation command is issued to the effect control board 102. It is assumed that it is determined that the throwing kiss notice is not executed in the start-up opening winning process.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), the holding icon A23 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure holding is displayed in a normal mode, and thereafter, the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is displayed. At the same time, the changing icon A21 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), when the variation display of the effect symbols is started, the holding icons A22 to A23 are shifted to the varying icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively, and the throwing kiss is notified. Such a character C3 appears and the changing icon change notice is started. Here, since the hold icon A22 shifts to the changing icon display area, it changes from the holding icon A22 to the changing icon A22, and the display mode is changed from the second special mode 13 (red) to the second special mode with the shift. It changes to 14 (zebra pattern).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. The icon for which the heart HT is skipped is determined by the normal icon display mode scenario indicated by the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is assumed that the heart HT has been skipped.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the heart HT hits the fluctuating icon A20, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the fluctuating icon A20, and the fluctuating icon A20 becomes difficult or invisible. (Not shown).

  Thereafter, when the predetermined effect is deleted, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), the display mode of the fluctuating icon A22 changes from the second special mode 14 to the second special mode 15 (rainbow), and the “power” is changed. "Up 20%", a change notification image B notifying that the display mode of the icon has changed is displayed near the changing icon A22 which is the target of the throwing kiss notice, and the sound output device 15 displays the changing icon. A sound notifying of the change in the mode is output (for example, “power up” is issued by the voice of the character C3), and the lighting device 16 for lighting effects lighting in a mode dedicated to the change. In the present embodiment, the change notification image HG is configured by an image including the text “power up”, but the display mode is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

  Then, the character C3 performs an operation according to the success of the change of the display mode (in FIG. 97B, an operation of spreading both hands with a smile), and then is erased as shown in FIG. 97C. .

  Next, the throwing kiss notice will be described using another specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 98A, when the hold icons A30 and A31 in the normal mode (white) are displayed on the first display section 141a and the second display section 141b of the first hold icon display area 141. Suppose that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 98B, the hold icons A30 and A31 displayed on the first display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. At the same time, when the variation display of the effect symbols is started, the character C3 related to the throwing kiss notice appears. In addition, since the hold icon A30 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the holding icon A30 changes to the changing icon A30.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss and flies the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. Here, it is assumed that the heart HT has been skipped toward the changing icon A30.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the heart HT hits the fluctuating icon A30, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the fluctuating icon A30, and the fluctuating icon A30 becomes difficult or invisible. (Not shown).

  After that, when the predetermined effect is deleted, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A30 has changed to the second special mode 11 (white), and the sound output device 15 has changed the display mode. A sound notifying the change is output (for example, “power up” is emitted by the voice of the character C3), and the lighting effect is performed by the staging lighting device 16 in a mode dedicated to the change.

  Then, the character C3 performs an operation according to the success of the change of the display mode, and then is erased as shown in FIG. 99 (c).

  As described above, when the fluctuating icon changes due to the throwing kiss notice, the display of the change notification image B by the image display device 14, the occurrence of “power up” by the audio output device 15, and the production lighting device 16 Since the change of the icon during the change is notified by the lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change, the player can easily recognize that the icon during the change has changed.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the change notification image B, the character C3 is notified that the changing icon has changed by performing a successful operation according to the change of the changing icon. As described above, it is notified that the changing icon has changed in the shape and the character, so that the player can easily understand that the changing icon has changed.

  In the present embodiment, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the lighting device 16 for production notify that the icon during the change has changed, but the notification is part of these various production devices ( For example, any one of the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16 or any two of them may be used.

  Further, in FIGS. 95 to 99, a specific example in which the throwing kiss notice is given to the changing icon is described, but the throwing kiss notice and the change of the display mode of the icon are also similarly applied to the hold icon. Is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is performed only when the icon shape does not change but the color of the icon changes. May be notified. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the change in the icon display mode, and to suppress a decrease in the effect due to the change in the icon display mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “power up 20%” is displayed in change notification image B, but the “20%” portion is based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change. You can make it selectable. Further, the color and size of the change notification image B can be changed instead of the “20%” portion based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change.

  The notification of the change in the display mode of the icons is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be set as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is performed in response to the change in the display mode of the icon performed through the action of the character C3 called a throwing kiss. For example, a change in the display mode of the icon suddenly performed at the time of the shift of the icon can be performed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is performed based on the preliminary determination result, but the big hit determination result, the special symbol determination result, or the special figure variation of the special figure determination information which is the target of the throwing kiss notification. The determination can be performed based on the pattern determination result.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed at the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, but the execution timing of the throwing kiss notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the content of the effect of the fluctuation effect. can do. Other execution timings of the throwing kiss notice include a temporary stop or re-fluctuation of the pseudo-run, a step-up notice, a step-up notice, a predetermined cut-in notice, a speech notice, the appearance of a character, or a super reach. When the extended effect is executed, when the reach state is established, a predetermined action effect by the effect accessory device 17 can be appropriately set.

  Also, in the present embodiment, one heart is blown toward one icon by one throwing kiss notice, and a notice is made as to whether the display mode changes once for one icon. However, a plurality of hearts are blown toward one icon at the same time or at predetermined time intervals in one throwing kiss notice, and a notice is given as to whether or not the display mode changes multiple times for one icon. May be performed. In this case, it is also possible to execute the notification of the change of the display mode of the icon every time the display mode of the icon changes, and it is also possible to notify one throw kiss notice (after the last heart has been blown). It is also possible to collectively report the change in the display mode of the icon once.

  Furthermore, a heart may be blown toward a plurality of icons in one throwing kiss notice, and a notice as to whether or not the display mode changes for the plurality of icons may be made. In this case, it is also possible to execute notification of the change in the display mode of the icons for all the icons whose display modes have changed, and to display the icon display mode for some of the icons whose display modes have changed. It is also possible to notify of the change of.

(Read-ahead zone production, zone-inducing production, and zone precursor production)
Next, a look-ahead zone effect, a zone-inducing effect, and a zone precursor effect will be described. The look-ahead zone effect is a notice effect that suggests a jackpot winning expectation over one or a plurality of variable effects, and the zone fueling effect is a warning effect that fuels whether or not a look-ahead zone effect is performed, It is performed using a special symbol in the change display and the stop display of the effect symbol. The zone indication effect is a notice effect for suggesting or notifying the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in a look-ahead zone effect notification mode or a look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect, the zone propelling effect, and the zone predictive effect are executed in the variable effect in the effect mode A, and are performed based on the advance determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command (continuous notice). Notice production). First, the outline of the look-ahead zone effect, the zone provoking effect, and the zone precursor effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-1), in the variation display of the effect symbol (variable effect), when the zone-pushing successful effect is executed, the start of the variation display of the next effect symbol is started. , The look-ahead zone effect starts. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-2), in the variation display of the effect symbol (variable effect), when the zone-faulting failure effect is executed, the look-ahead zone is displayed from the start of the variation display of the next effect symbol. No staging is performed.

  Here, in the case where the zone succesful effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 87 (b-1), when the effect symbols are displayed fluctuating, the left symbol of the left area of the display unit 140 is first used as the left symbol. The "look-ahead" symbol stops, and then the "zone" symbol stops as the right symbol in the right area of the display unit 140, suggesting the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, and finally the middle symbol in the central area of the display unit 140. The "rush" symbol stops. In this way, by stopping all the preset special symbols (“look-ahead” symbol, “zone” symbol and “stop” symbol), “special symbol alignment” is achieved, and the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Be informed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the zone fueling failure effect 1 is executed as the zone fueling failure effect, as shown in FIG. 87 (b-2), when the effect symbol variation display is being performed, the left symbol is first displayed as “left symbol”. The "look-ahead" symbol stops, then the "zone" symbol stops as the right symbol, and finally the "rush" symbol attempts to stop as the middle symbol, suggesting the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, but does not stop Then, the normal effect symbol determined by the normal effect symbol stop display pattern determination in step S1309-3 stops as the middle symbol. In this way, when only a part of the special symbols set in advance is stopped, "special symbols are not aligned", and it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

  When a special symbol appears as a zone-inducing effect, the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that have been displayed up to that point may be displayed in a reduced state, for example, in the upper right part of the display unit 140. For example, when a special symbol appears while the normal effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the reduced normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are variably displayed in the upper right portion of the display unit 140 with the appearance. Then, when the variable display ends and the special symbols are aligned or the special symbols are not aligned, the same stop time as in the normal case (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) is provided in the upper right portion of the display unit 140; Stop display of the reduced normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (effect symbols indicating loss) is performed. Furthermore, when the special symbol alignment or special symbol irregularity ends and a new variable display is started, the special symbol is erased and the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed while returning to the original size. It moves to the normal position in the section 140, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is performed as usual.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87 (c-1) and FIG. 87 (c-2), a description will be given of a change in the size of the changing icon that is performed in accordance with the zone sway effect. In the present embodiment, the size of the fluctuating icon increases in accordance with the stop of the special symbol performed as the zone-flicking effect.

  In the zone-booming success effect, the size of the changing icon increases by one step in response to the stop of the "look-ahead" symbol, and the size of the changing icon increases by one step in response to the stop of the "zone" symbol, the second stage In response to the stop of the “rush” symbol, the size of the changing icon is further increased by one step to the third step. In addition, when the pre-zone effect is executed after the successful zone-pumping effect, the changing icon is maintained at the third stage size.

  On the other hand, in the zone fanning failure effect 1, the size of the changing icon increases by one step in response to the stop of the "look-ahead" symbol, and the size of the changing icon increases by one step in response to the stop of the "zone" symbol. In the second stage, the size of the changing icon returns to the original normal size due to the sliding of the “rush” symbol.

  In this way, by gradually increasing the size of the changing icon that is easy for the player to pay attention to, it is possible to have a stronger sense of expectation for the look-ahead zone effect.

  Next, specific examples of the look-ahead zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone propulsion effect will be described. Here, when the first special figure reservation number is “2”, a game ball enters the first starting port 6, a new first special figure reservation is generated, and the first special figure reservation is generated. In response to this, the first start-up winning designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and in the start-up winning process, finally, the look-ahead zone effect scenario No. “6” shown in FIG. 50 and the precursor effect scenario “14” shown in FIG. A specific example in the case where “−3” and the icon display mode scenario “8” illustrated in FIG. 53 are selected will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (a), when the hold icons A40 to A42 in the normal mode are displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141b of the first hold icon display area 141, an effect indicating a loss is performed. When the symbol stop display is performed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), at the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A40, the hold icons A40 to A42 are displayed in the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, The display is shifted to the second display section 141b, and the variation display of the effect symbols is started. In addition, since the hold icon A40 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the holding icon A40 changes to the changing icon A40.

  Then, when a variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is being executed, a game ball enters the first starting port 6 and a first special figure hold is newly generated, and the first special figure hold is performed. In response to the occurrence of the event, the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and in the start opening winning process, the look-ahead zone effect scenario No. “6” shown in FIG. 50 and the precursor effect scenario “14” shown in FIG. It is assumed that "-3" has been selected.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the hold icon A43 corresponding to the above-mentioned newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the third special mode 41, and is also shown in FIG. 100 (d). As described above, the holding icons A41 and A42 and the changing icon A40 corresponding to the preceding holding for the newly generated first special figure holding change to the third special mode 41 (corresponding to the holding icon change notice).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the variation display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 100 (b) is stopped and displayed with an effect symbol indicating a loss, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), The changing icon A40 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A41 is started, each of the hold icons A41 to A43 is changed to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit. 141a, the display is shifted to the second display section 141b, and the display mode of the icon A43, which is the execution target of the look-ahead zone effect, is changed to the third special mode 21 (the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2). Are changed to the third special mode 51 (prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2). Note that, since the suspension icon A41 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the icon is changed from the holding icon A41 to the changing icon A41.

  Here, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6, since the icon is already displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the holding icon ( The zone effect non-target icon) A44 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the changing icon A41 is the change of the effect symbol immediately before the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon A43 which is the zone effect target icon. Since it is a variable display, a zone-pumping effect is executed during the variable display of the effect symbol.

  Here, since the zone fanning effect is determined to be a zone fanning successful effect, as shown in FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (c), the zone fanning effect is a “look-ahead” symbol, a “zone” symbol, And, it is notified that the "rush-in" symbols are temporarily stopped in order and the pre-reading zone effect is executed. Here, the size of the changing icon A42 gradually increases in accordance with the stop of the “look-ahead” symbol, the stop of the “zone” symbol, and the stop of the “rush” symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the variation display of the effect symbols started in FIG. 101 (c) is completely stopped and displayed with the special symbols aligned, the changing icon A41 is deleted. You. In addition, the normal effect design may be sequentially stopped and displayed in a state where the normal effect design is reduced to the upper right position of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 corresponding to the stop display of each of the three special symbols. Is a combination of staging patterns.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103B, when the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A42 is started, the look-ahead zone background image HK indicating the look-ahead zone is displayed, and the BGM and the lighting mode are displayed. Is switched from the effect mode A to the one for exclusive use of the look-ahead zone effect, so that the look-ahead zone effect (corresponding to the continuous notice effect) is started. In other words, although the start time of the suspension icon change notice and the continuous notice effect are different from each other, the execution times are overlapped.

  Further, each of the suspension icons A42 to A44 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b. Here, the holding icon A42 has shifted to the changing icon display area 142, and thus changes from the holding icon A42 to the changing icon A42.

  Further, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is the execution target of the look-ahead zone effect, changes to the third special mode 31 (the look-ahead zone effect notification mode), and the changing icon A42 and the hold icon A44, which are not the target of the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. Changes to the third special mode 61 (prefetch zone effect presentation mode). The size of the changing icon A42 is the size of the third stage.

  Here, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6, the icon has already been displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The effect non-target icon) A45 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same look-ahead zone effect notification mode 6.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), when the change display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 103 (b) is stopped and displayed with the effect symbol indicating a loss, the icon is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon A42 of the third special mode 31 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A43 related to the start opening winning designation command that generated the look-ahead zone effect is started, the hold icon is displayed. Each of A43 to A45 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, and the look-ahead zone effect continues. Note that, since the suspension icon A43 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the holding icon A43 changes to the changing icon A43.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped and the reach state is established in the effect symbol change display, the display mode of the changing icon A43 changes to the third special mode 33. Then, the color of the main silhouette portion turns red, and the look-ahead zone effect continues.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105A, when a predetermined super reach effect (for example, SP reach) is developed, the pending icons A44 and A45 that have been displayed immediately before that are hidden, and the changing icon A43 is displayed. Changes to the third special mode 34, the color of the main silhouette portion becomes a zebra pattern, and the look-ahead zone effect ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), when the stop display of the effect symbol (seven "7") indicating the jackpot winning is performed, the silhouettes of the seven people related to the changing icon A43 are notified of the jackpot winning notification. As an action, express your joy by raising both hands.

  As described above, when the look-ahead zone effect is executed, before the look-ahead zone effect is executed, by setting the display mode of the icon to the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode, a zone sign effect that suggests the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. Is performed. Here, in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode, the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 (third special mode 1, third special mode 4) and the degree of expectation for the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is higher than that of the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1. A look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2 (third special mode 2, third special mode 5) is provided. In the following, the zone indication effect according to the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 1 is referred to as “zone indication effect 1”, and the zone indication effect according to the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 2 is referred to as “zone indication effect 2”.

  The look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 is an icon display mode dedicated to the zone precursor effect 1, in which characters such as “? Zone?” Are attached as the icon display mode, and the number of people silhouettes is three. In addition, the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2 is also an icon display mode dedicated to the zone precursor effect 2, and the characters “{zone}” are added as the icon display mode, and the number of silhouettes of the person is five. I have. Therefore, the player sees the icons (holding icons and changing icons) displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2 to indicate that the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed. Since it is possible to easily recognize that the indication effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect.

  When the look-ahead zone is being executed, the display mode of the icon is set to the look-ahead zone effect notification mode (the third special mode 3, the third special mode 6), thereby notifying that the pre-read zone effect is being executed. A zone notification effect is performed.

  The look-ahead zone effect notification mode is an icon display mode dedicated to the zone notification effect. The icon display mode is provided with characters “O zone O”, and the number of people silhouettes is seven. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the zone notification effect is being executed by looking at the icons (holding icon and changing icon) displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode. The effect can be prevented from lowering.

  In addition, zone indication effects 1 and 2 and a zone notification effect are provided as effects indicating the look-ahead zone execution expectation, and the look-ahead zone execution expectation indicated by each effect is as follows: zone indication effect 1 <zone indication effect 2 <zone It is an informational production. The icon display mode according to the zone precursor effect 1, the icon display mode according to the zone precursor effect 2, and the icon display mode according to the zone notification effect are different from each other. Can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the look-ahead zone effect is one, but a plurality of types of the look-ahead zone effects having different jackpot winning expectation degrees may be provided. In this case, a first look-ahead zone effect and a second look-ahead zone effect having a higher jackpot winning expectation than the first look-ahead zone effect are provided, and the second look-ahead zone effect passes through the first look-ahead zone effect. Thus, there may be a case where the first look-ahead zone effect is executed progressively and a case where the process is executed immediately without going through the first look-ahead zone effect. Then, the type of the look-ahead zone effect to be executed may be suggested by the type of the zone precursor effect.

  The icons according to the third special mode are the same regardless of the type of the shape of the main silhouette portion, but the colors of the main silhouette portion are different depending on the type, and the jackpot winning expectation differs depending on the color. In the icon according to the third special mode, the characters (“? Zone?”, “△ Zone △”, “○ Zone ○”) attached to the number of persons in the sub-silhouette part differ depending on the type. In the icon according to the third special mode, the degree of anticipation of prefetch execution differs depending on the character attached to the number of persons in the sub-silhouette part.

  Therefore, when paying attention to the display mode of the icon when the look-ahead zone suggestion effect and the look-ahead zone notification effect are being executed, the player can recognize the jackpot winning expectation degree in addition to the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the elements constituting the third special modes 1 to 6 indicate the look-ahead execution expectation and the jackpot winning expectation, but the suggested contents are not limited thereto, and may be appropriately set. Can be. For example, the elements constituting the third special modes 1 to 6 are used to execute a specific effect such as SP reach, SPSP reach, or pseudo-run, or to execute a specific type of jackpot such as a probability change jackpot or a long jackpot. It can also indicate the degree of expectation to be made.

  Furthermore, the pre-reading execution expectation and the jackpot winning expectation are suggested or notified by the display mode of the icons, but these suggestions or notifications are not the display modes of the icons, for example, the display modes of the production symbols and the production accessories. It can also be performed by another specific effect such as the operation of the movable portion 17A of the device 17. In addition, although the zone indication effect is performed using the icon, it can be performed using another image such as a background image or an effect symbol displayed on the display unit 140. Further, the zone indication effect can also be performed by using another effect device such as the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, and the effect accessory device 17 instead of the image display device 14.

  Further, the number of suggested contents is not limited to the embodiment and can be set as appropriate depending on the elements constituting the icon display mode. In addition, as elements constituting an icon display mode indicating a predetermined item, the shape, size, operation mode, and the like of the icon can be appropriately set.

  In the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect, the zone sign effect, and the zone notification effect are performed based on the result of the preliminary determination. It can also be performed based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, or the special figure variation pattern determination result.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, and the zone precursor effect and the zone notification effect are executed at the time of a prize or a hold shift, but the execution timing of these effects is The present invention is not limited to this, and can be appropriately set according to the effect contents of the variable effect. Other execution timings of these effects include, for example, temporary stop or re-fluctuation in a pseudo-run, so-called step-up notice, step-up notice, predetermined cut-in notice, speech notice, appearance of a character, or development of super reach. It is possible to appropriately set a predetermined motion effect by the effect accessory device 17 when the extended effect is executed, when the reach state is established, or the like.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the look-ahead zone effect is started, the zone-inducing success effect is always executed before the start, but the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (pseudo-serial effect) is performed without passing through the zone-inducing success effect. (Including the re-variation display in the effect), or the pre-reading zone effect may be executed immediately from the beginning or in the middle.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-083892), when a game ball enters the starting port when a special symbol is fluctuated and displayed, the determination information is displayed. Before the special symbol determination based on the stored data is performed based on the stored stored data, the determination result of the special symbol determination performed based on the stored data indicates that the special game is executed. ("Pre-determination"), and if the result of the preliminary determination is "execute a special game", the effect mode is changed from the normal normal effect mode to the stop display of a specific special symbol. Is set to a specific production mode in which the degree of expectation that the game is performed is higher than the normal production mode, but the player may not be aware that the specific production mode may be set. There is a problem in that.

As a configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, after a game medium (game ball or the like) passes through a start area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7). Based on the start condition of the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) being established, the variable display of the symbol is performed on a predetermined display unit (special symbol display device), and the variable display of the symbol is stopped and specified. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine executes a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area, determination information (special figure determination information) ) And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) of the symbol variation display for which the game medium has passed through the starting area but the symbol variation display start condition has not yet been satisfied. Acquisition of the judgment information to the limit A holding storage unit for storing the determination information obtained by the tier as a holding storage; and a special game based on the holding storage stored in the holding storage unit when a condition for starting the symbol change display is satisfied. A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, when the determination means makes a determination, an effect control means for performing a notification effect (variable effect) for notifying the determination result, and the effect control means An effect mode setting means that can be set as a specific effect mode (look-ahead zone effect) having a higher degree of expectation of executing the special game than the normal effect mode (e.g., effect mode A) as the effect mode of the notification effect; When the specific effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means, a sign effect indicating setting of the specific effect mode before setting the specific effect mode. An indication effect execution means for executing (zone indication effect), and an indication effect execution notification indicating that the indication effect is being executed when the indication effect is being executed (display of an icon in a look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode) ) To perform a sign effect execution informing means.

  By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the indication effect is being executed, and it is possible to easily notice that there is a possibility that the specific effect mode is set.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-083892), when a variation of a special symbol is displayed and a game ball enters the starting port, the determination information is displayed. Before the special symbol determination based on the stored data is performed based on the stored stored data, the determination result of the special symbol determination performed based on the stored data indicates that the special game is executed. ("Pre-determination"), and if the result of the preliminary determination is "execute a special game", the effect mode is changed from the normal normal effect mode to the stop display of a specific special symbol. Is set to the specific production mode in which the degree of expectation that the game is performed is higher than the normal production mode, but the problem that the player cannot recognize the degree of expectation set in the specific production mode There was.

As a configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, after a game medium (game ball or the like) passes through a start area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7). Based on the start condition of the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) being established, the variable display of the symbol is performed on a predetermined display unit (special symbol display device), and the variable display of the symbol is stopped and specified. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine executes a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area, determination information (special figure determination information) ) And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) of the symbol variation display for which the game medium has passed through the starting area but the symbol variation display start condition has not yet been satisfied. Acquisition of the judgment information to the limit A holding storage unit for storing the determination information obtained by the tier as a holding storage; and a special game based on the holding storage stored in the holding storage unit when a condition for starting the symbol change display is satisfied. A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, when the determination means makes a determination, an effect control means for performing a notification effect (variable effect) for notifying the determination result, and the effect control means An effect mode setting means that can be set as a specific effect mode (look-ahead zone effect) having a higher degree of expectation of executing the special game than the normal effect mode (e.g., effect mode A) as the effect mode of the notification effect; When the specific effect mode is set by the effect mode setting means, a sign effect indicating setting of the specific effect mode before setting the specific effect mode. An indication effect execution means for executing (zone indication effect), and an indication effect execution notification indicating that the indication effect is being executed when the indication effect is being executed (display of an icon in a look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode) ) To perform the indication effect execution notification means, and there are a plurality of notification modes of the indication effect execution notification. In the notification mode of the plurality of types of indication effect execution notification, the degree of expectation that the specific effect mode is set Is a first expectation effect, a first indication effect execution notification mode (a look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1), and a second expectation level at which the specific effect mode is set is higher than the first expectation level. The second indication effect execution notification mode (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2) indicating that the above-mentioned condition is satisfied.

  By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the degree of expectation set in the specific effect mode.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-083892), when a variation of a special symbol is displayed and a game ball enters the starting port, the determination information is displayed. The data is stored as the reserved data, and when the reserved data is stored, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved data is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device. In addition, before the special symbol determination based on the held data is performed based on the stored held data, the determination result of the special symbol determination performed based on the held data is "execute a special game". It is expected that a special game will be executed by making a judgment (pre-judgment) on whether or not the display mode of the reserved image is changed to a special display mode different from the normal mode based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment. Although the degree was suggested or informed, the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination is higher than that of the normal effect mode for the fluctuation effect performed in response to the fluctuation display of the special symbol. Although it may be set to a high specific effect mode, the degree of expectation set in the specific effect mode depends on the effect mode of the specific effect indicating the degree of expectation that a special game such as display of a hold image is executed. Because 唆又 is not informed, the player has a problem that it is impossible to recognize the degree of expectation to be set to a specific effect mode by directing aspects of a particular effect.

As a configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, after a game medium (game ball or the like) passes through a start area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7). Based on the start condition of the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) being established, the variable display of the symbol is performed on a predetermined display unit (special symbol display device), and the variable display of the symbol is stopped and specified. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine executes a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area, determination information (special figure determination information) ) And a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) of the symbol variation display for which the game medium has passed through the starting area but the symbol variation display start condition has not yet been satisfied. Acquisition of the judgment information to the limit A holding storage unit for storing the determination information obtained by the tier as a holding storage; and a special game based on the holding storage stored in the holding storage unit when a condition for starting the symbol change display is satisfied. A determination means for determining whether or not to execute, when the determination means makes a determination, an effect control means for performing a notification effect (variable effect) for notifying the determination result, and the effect control means An effect mode setting means capable of setting a special effect mode (look-ahead zone effect) having a higher degree of expectation of executing the special game than a normal effect mode (for example, effect mode A) as an effect mode of the notification effect; Specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect (display of an icon) indicating a set predetermined item, wherein the specific effect is expected to execute the special game. A first specific effect showing the said specific effect mode is adapted to a second specific effect indicating the expectation of being set.

  With this configuration, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation set in the specific effect mode depending on the effect mode of the specific effect.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-195682), a special symbol is fluctuated and displayed based on a result of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player. When the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special result, a special game advantageous to the player can be executed. In such a gaming machine, a variation effect in which the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns by the image display means so as to correspond to the variation display of the special symbol is used to enhance the interest of the game. There is something. However, in the gaming machines described in the above-mentioned patent documents, there is room for improvement in the fluctuating performance, and there is a problem that the interest in gaming is poor.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determining means (Variable display means) for performing a variable display of a (special) symbol that informs the judgment result of the above. When the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special result (big hit special symbol), a special advantageous for the player is provided. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game, an effect control means (effect control board 102, lamp control board 104, image control board 105, etc.) for performing a variable effect for effecting the variable display is provided, and the effect of the variable effect is provided. In the aspect (variable production pattern), a non-specific production mode in which the specific production (SP / SPSP reach production) that expects the special result is not executed, and the specific production is executed. The specific production mode includes a transition production from a predictive effect period for performing a predictive effect that predicts that the special result will be obtained (a period of execution of a look-ahead zone effect or a story effect) to the specific effect. The first specific effect mode (variable effect patterns A013, A038, A058, etc.) in which the specific effect is executed through a transition effect period (execution period of a transition effect or a normal reach) for performing the transition effect period from the sign effect period However, there is a second specific effect mode (variable effect patterns A014, A039, A059, etc.) in which the specific effect is executed after returning to the indication effect period, and thereafter executing the specific effect after the transition effect period. The variable effect is executed in any one of the effect modes according to the determination result of the determination means. Further, the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher when the variable effect is executed by the second specific effect mode than when the variable effect is executed by the first specific effect mode. I have to.

  By doing so, the player can be surprised by the effect of a novel and unprecedented variation effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-158590), a determination unit that determines whether to execute a special game advantageous to a player, and a determination result of the determination unit A variable display means for variably displaying a symbol to be notified at any of a plurality of variable times, and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display becomes a predetermined special result. It is. In such a gaming machine, any one of a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a high-probability gaming state, etc.) in which a shorter variation time is more easily selected as a variation time of the special symbol variation display than in the normal gaming state. In some cases, the image display device executes a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (decorative symbol) during the variable display of the symbol. However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a problem that even if there is a change in the gaming state, the effect symbols displayed on the image display device do not change, and the interest in the game is poor.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determining means And a variation display means for performing a variation display of a (special) symbol at any of a plurality of variation times based on the determination result of the above, and when the result of the variation display becomes a predetermined special result (big hit special symbol), In the gaming machine capable of executing the special game, controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (high-probability game state, low-probability time-short game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A variation effect capable of displaying an effect symbol on the game state control means and the display means (image display device 14) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol during the execution of the variable display. Means of execution; The display pattern of the effect symbols includes a first display mode (first effect pattern) and a second display having a lower decorativeness than the first display mode (eg, a simple design, a small number of colors, a dark color, etc.). There is a mode (second effect symbol or third effect symbol), and during the normal game state, the transition effect of the basics of the effect symbol (during a waiting state for a customer, during a variable effect less than normal reach, and a variable effect above SP reach) The previous display mode is set to the first display mode, and the display mode of the basics of the effect symbols (during a waiting state for customers or during all variable effects) is set to the second display mode during the specific game state. Has become. Further, the gaming state control means is configured to return to the normal gaming state based on the predetermined number of times of the variable display being executed after controlling to the specific gaming state, and the variable effect performing means includes: When returning from the specific game state to the normal game state, the effect symbol displayed in the second display mode is switched to the first display mode in accordance with execution of a predetermined effect.

  By doing in this way, when there is a change in the game state, it is possible to change the effect design displayed on the image display device, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-061360), a determination unit that determines whether to execute a special game advantageous to a player, and a determination result of the determination unit include: A display effect executing means for performing an appropriate display effect on the image display device, and can be controlled to one of a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Some are common. In such a gaming machine, a detection means capable of detecting an input from a player is provided, and when an effective period occurs during execution of the effect, a prompting image for prompting the input is displayed on the image display device, and the generation of the effective period is performed. Some of them execute an operation effect that suggests the determination result of the determination means when an input is detected. However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the promotion image displayed on the image display device does not change even when the gaming state changes, and the interest of the game is poor.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determining means In a gaming machine having a variable effect execution means for performing a variable effect according to the determination result on the display means (image display device 14), a first game state (normal game state) and a first game state Game state control means capable of controlling a second game state (high-probability game state, low-probability time-short game state) advantageous to the player, and detection means capable of detecting an input from the player ( Effect button device 18, an infrared sensor, a touch panel, etc.), and a prompting display means for displaying, on the display means, a prompting image for prompting an input to the detecting means, based on the fact that an effective period occurs during the fluctuation effect. During the validity period Operating effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect suggesting the determination result of the determination means based on the detection of the input by the detection means, and the promotion image includes a first promotion image (Promoted images 1A and 1B) and second promoted images (promoted images 2A and 2B and promoted images 3A and 3B) different from the first promoted image, and the promoted display means is configured to display the promoted image during the first game state. In the fluctuation effect, the first promotion image is displayed, and in the fluctuation effect in the second game state, the second promotion image is displayed.

  By doing so, it is possible to change the promotion image displayed on the image display device when there is a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-0733377), a determination unit that determines whether to execute a special game advantageous to a player and a determination result of the determination unit include: Generally, it is provided with a variable effect executing means for performing a corresponding variable effect on the image display device. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to control either the first gaming state or the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the display device displays gaming information relating to the gaming. Is displayed. However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, even if there is a change in the gaming state, there is no change in the display mode of the game information displayed on the image display device, and the interest in the game is poor. there were.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the determining means And a variable effect execution means for performing a variable effect according to the determination result on the display means (the image display device 14). A game state control means that can be controlled to any of a high-probability game state, a low-probability time-saving game state, and a jackpot game, and predetermined game information (game number information, high-probability remaining number information, Game information display means capable of displaying the remaining number of times information, firing operation information, and the like on the display means, wherein the plurality of types of game states include a first game state (a low-probability time-saving game state, etc.) And the first game state Also includes a second game state (high-probability game state or the like) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable effect execution means includes an effect mode of the variable effect between the first game state and the second game state ( And the game information display means changes the display mode of the predetermined game information between the first game state and the second game state.

  By doing so, it is possible to change the display mode of predetermined game information displayed on the image display device when there is a change in the game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

(2nd Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the portion related to the setting of the effect mode. Therefore, the description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and the description will be focused on the parts related to the setting of the effect mode.

(Direction mode judgment table)
FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode determination table that is referred to when setting an effect mode. As shown in FIG. 106, in the effect mode determination table, the game state, the remaining high probability number of times, the number of remaining working hours, the effect mode before the transition, the effect mode after the transition, and the effect mode flag are associated. ing. For reference, the number of times of stay change in the set effect mode (the number of times of change effect) is described.

  In the normal game state, four types of effect modes (effect modes A0 to A3) are set, and in the probable change game state, one effect mode (effect mode B1) is set. In the low-probability time-saving gaming state, two types of effect modes (effect modes B1 and B2) are set.

  The production mode A0 is a special production mode that is set only when the game mode shifts from the low-probability time-saving gaming state (production mode B2) to the normal gaming state. The process shifts to A1.

  The effect mode A1 is an effect mode that is set after the effect mode A0 or the effect mode A3. The effect mode A1 stays until at least 15 fluctuation effects are executed, and thereafter, the transition condition of the effect mode (transition of the effect mode). When the lottery is won and the loss SP reach effect or the loss SPSP reach effect) is established, the mode shifts to the effect mode A2.

  The effect mode A2 is an effect mode set after the effect mode A1. The effect mode A2 stays until at least 15 variable effects are executed, and thereafter, when the above-described effect mode transition condition is satisfied, the effect mode A3. It is supposed to shift to.

  The effect mode A3 is an effect mode that is set after the effect mode A2. The effect mode A3 stays until at least 15 times of the variable effect are executed, and thereafter, when the transition condition of the effect mode described above is satisfied, the effect mode A1. It is supposed to shift to.

  The effect mode B1 is an effect mode that is set in the probable change game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, and stays until the remaining number of time savings becomes six after the probable change game state is started, and thereafter, the effect mode B2. It is supposed to shift to.

  The effect mode B2 is an effect mode that is set after the effect mode B1. After staying until the number of time saving remaining times becomes zero, when shifting to the normal gaming state, the effect mode shifts to the effect mode A0. I have.

  In addition, when the power supply to the gaming machine Y is in the normal gaming state, the effect mode A1 is set, and when the power supply to the gaming machine Y is in the certain-variable gaming state, When the power supply to the gaming machine Y is in the low-precision time-saving gaming state, the effect mode B1 is set if the number of remaining time savings is six or more. If the number of remaining hours saved is 5 or less, the effect mode B2 is set.

  Here, as the first feature of the effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 106, a plurality of effect modes can be set in the normal game state, and more effect modes than the probability change game state and the low-probability time-saving game state are set. There is a point that has been set. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired in the normal game state in which the stay period is likely to be long, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The second feature of the effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 106 is that the effect mode does not change even when the game mode shifts from the probable change game state to the low-probability game mode. By doing in this way, even in the case of shifting from the probable change game state to the low-probability time reduction game state, it is possible to reduce the sense of loss of the player and improve the interest of the game.

  The third feature of the effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 106 is that a special effect mode (effect mode A0) is set when the game mode shifts from the low-probability time-saving game state to the normal game state. . By doing so, the player can be motivated to continue the game even after the transition to the normal gaming state, and the operation of the gaming machine Y can be improved.

(Display example of image display device)
Next, a display example of the image display device 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a display example of the image display device 14 for each effect mode in the normal game state, and FIG. 108 is a display example of the image display device 14 for each effect mode in the specific game state (probable game state, low-probability time-short game state). It is a display example.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a) to FIG. 107 (d), in the customer waiting state of the normal game state, one of the effect modes A0 to A3 is displayed on the upper left of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. The effect mode image MD shown is displayed, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side in the center of the display unit 140, and three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side on the lower left side of the display unit 140. .

  Each of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is a vertically long rectangular symbol base image ZBG, a character image CYG indicating any of the nine types of characters, and one of 1 to 9 corresponding to the nine types of characters on a one-to-one basis. This is a composite image in which the identification image SG indicating a number is superimposed, and the display mode is set for each effect mode.

  In the effect mode A1, as shown in FIG. 107A, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the first display mode having a predetermined decorativeness, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same size. It has become. The effect symbols "1", "3", and "5" displayed here are initial effect symbols displayed when the gaming state immediately after the power is turned on is the normal gaming state (effect mode A).

  In the effect mode A2, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a second display mode having a decorative property different from the first display mode, and the left and right effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are displayed. The effect symbol TZ2 at the center is displayed in a smaller size.

  In the effect mode A3, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a third display mode having a decorative property different from the first and second display modes, and right and left effect symbols TZ1. The effect symbol TZ2 at the center is displayed in a larger size than that of the symbol TZ3.

  In the effect mode A0, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same first display mode as in the first effect mode, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same size. It has become.

  That is, the first display mode to the third display mode, which are the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal game state, are set so as to have different decorative properties, and the first display mode <the third display mode < The decorativeness (design, color, size, etc.) increases in the order of the two display modes.

  In addition, the level of the decorativeness in the first display mode to the third display mode is not limited to the order described above. For example, the decorativeness of the first display mode may be set to be the highest. In this way, the effect image displayed on the image display device 14 immediately after the power is turned on (in the case of the normal gaming state) becomes gorgeous, and it is possible to give the gaming machine Y a good impression.

  The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the first to third display modes may be stored in the CGROM 105Bb as a single symbol data. May be combined when the image is displayed on the image display device 14. In addition, the base image and the numeral image constituting the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105Bb, and may be combined when displayed on the image display device 14.

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the specific game state (probable change game state, low probability time reduction game state), an effect mode image MD indicating that the effect mode is B1 or B2 is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Is displayed, and near the upper center of the display unit, an image of the number of consecutive games played, which is the number of jackpot games executed while the specific game state is continuously executed, is displayed. On the upper right side of the display unit, A right-hit image MU that prompts the user to shoot a game ball toward the right area of the game area 2A is displayed, and a remaining number image NK indicating the remaining number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state is displayed on the lower left of the display unit. Is displayed, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side in the center of the display unit 140, and three special effect symbols are displayed side by side on the lower left side of the display unit 140.

  The right-handed image MU is a composite image in which right-handed information indicating right-handed and a decoration image for decorating the right-handed information are combined. Regardless of the effect mode B1 or the effect mode B2, a common display mode is set for the specific game state.

  The remaining number image NK is a composite image in which remaining number information indicating the remaining number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state and a decoration image decorating the remaining number information are combined images. Regardless of whether the game mode is the low-probability time-saving game mode, or the effect mode B1 or the effect mode B2, a common display mode is set for the specific game state.

  Each of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is a single image of only an identification image (identifier) indicating any one of numbers 1 to 9, and indicates whether the game is in the probable change game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, and Regardless of the mode B1 or the effect mode B2, a common display mode is set for the specific game state.

  In the effect mode B1, as shown in FIG. 108A, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the fourth display mode having lower decorativeness (design, color, size, etc.) than the first to third display modes. , Effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same size.

  In the effect mode B2, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same fourth display mode as the effect mode B1, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the same size. Has become. That is, in the effect mode B1 and the effect mode B2, the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 does not change.

  Note that the fourth display mode may be a composite image combining the above-described symbol base image and / or the character image. However, even in such a case, the display mode has a lower decorativeness than the first to third display modes. It is good to set.

  Here, in the effect symbols “1”, “3”, and “5” displayed in FIGS. 108A and 108B, the gaming state immediately after the power is turned on is the specific gaming state (effect mode B1 to B2). This is an initial effect symbol displayed in a certain case, and the game state immediately after power-on is the same (common) identification information as in the normal game state (effect mode A1).

  As shown in FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, the special effect symbol TZ4 is a composite image in which a hexagonal base image and any one of numerical images (identifiers) 1 to 9 are superimposed. In addition, a common display mode is set regardless of the effect mode.

  The special effect design TZ4 has lower decorativeness than the first to third display modes (simple design, less colors, etc.) and higher decorativeness than the fourth display mode (complex design, many colors, etc.) ) The display is performed in the fifth display mode, and three special effect symbols are displayed in the same size.

  Although the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the specific game state are set to the fourth display mode and the display mode of the special effect symbol TZ4 is set to the fifth display mode, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the specific game state are specially displayed. The same effect design TZ4 as the fifth display mode may be set, or the special effect symbol TZ4 may be set as the fourth display mode.

  The special effect symbol ZT4 is stored as single symbol data in the CGROM 105Bb, but has the same shape (form) as the identification image SG in the effect symbols of the first to third display modes. When the SGs are independently stored in the CGROM 105Bb, the image data may be displayed on the image display device 14 using the same image data. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb from being compressed.

  Also, the special effect symbol TZ4 is not displayed on the image display device 14 (variable display and stop display), but is displayed on a dedicated display unit (eg, an LED display) (variable display and stop display). Alternatively, the special effect symbols TZ4 may be eliminated and only the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be used.

(Types of staging patterns)
Here, the types of effect symbols that are stopped and displayed during the variable effect in each game state (normal game state, specific game state) will be described.

  In the normal game state (effect modes A0 to A3), twelve types of effect symbols to be stopped and displayed (including a temporary stop) during the variable effect are set, and nine types indicating any number of 1 to 9 are provided. In addition to the normal effect design, two types of change designs that indicate (notify) the occurrence of an icon change notice by being stopped are displayed (the first change that indicates that the icon changes to a display mode with a high degree of one-step expectation). There is a change symbol (a second change symbol indicating that the display mode changes to a display mode with a high two-step expectation), and one type of a pseudo-continuous symbol that suggests (notifies) the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous effect by temporarily stopping.

  In the specific game state (effect modes B1 and B2), the number of effect symbols to be stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop) during the variable effect is set to nine, which is smaller than that in the normal game state. There are only nine types of normal effect symbols showing the numbers.

  As described above, in the normal game state, the effect symbols that are not stopped and displayed in the specific game state are stopped and displayed, so that it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the normal game state in which the stay period is likely to be longer than in the specific game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the specific game state in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal game state, the effect symbols (change symbols, pseudo-continuous symbols) different from the normal effect symbols are not stopped and displayed, so that the player feels troublesome. The inconvenience can be avoided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, about the display mode of a change symbol and a pseudo continuous symbol, it is displayed in the display mode (one of the first to third display modes) corresponding to each of the effect modes in the normal game state. A common display mode may be used regardless of the mode. In this way, even if the effect mode is changed, it is easy to recognize that the pattern is a changed symbol or a pseudo continuous symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the changing symbol and the pseudo consecutive symbol are stopped and displayed as the middle symbol in the central area of the display unit 140, but are stopped and displayed as the left symbol in the left area and the right symbol in the right area. Is also good. In this way, the timing at which the changing symbol or the pseudo consecutive symbol may be stopped and displayed is diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the changing symbol and the pseudo continuous symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed in a specific effect mode among the effect modes A0 to A3, but may not be temporarily stopped and displayed in other effect modes. For example, the temporary stop display is performed in the effect modes A1 to A3, but the temporary stop display may not be performed in the effect mode A0.

(Example of display of the fluctuation effect in effect mode A1)
Next, a display example of the variable effect in the effect mode A1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), on the image display device 14, an effect image of the effect mode A1 such as an effect mode image MD or a background image indicating the effect mode A1 is displayed. The effect symbols "4", "2" and "1" in the first display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "4", "2" and "1" are stopped and displayed. Also, one first holding icon of the normal mode is displayed.

  Next, when the change display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the first hold icon shifts to change to the changing icon, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ1 in the first display mode are displayed. The TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 in the fifth display mode start the variable display, and the variable effect (first variable effect) is executed. Immediately thereafter, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7, the second special figure reservation number becomes “1” and one second reservation icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed, the effect symbols "1", "2" and "4" in the first display mode are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 109 (c). At the same time, the special effect symbols "1", "2", and "4" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (first variable effect) ends.

  Next, when the change display of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), the second holding icon shifts to change to the changing icon, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ1 in the first display mode are changed. TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 in the fifth display mode start the variable display, and the variable effect (second variable effect) is executed.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined period has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect symbols "1", "4" and "2" in the first display mode are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 109 (e). The variable effect (second variable effect) ends.

  As described above, in the effect mode A1, regardless of whether it is the first variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the same display mode (first display mode) are variably displayed. Therefore, an effect with a sense of unity can be performed during one effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, during the effect mode A1, regardless of whether it is the first variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the same is performed. The special effect symbol TZ4 in the display mode (fifth display mode) is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, an effect with a sense of unity can be performed during one effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is the same in other effect modes (effect mode A2, effect mode A3, effect mode A0, effect mode B1, effect mode B2), and the variation of the first special symbol. Regardless of whether it is the first variable effect corresponding to the display or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 having the same display mode corresponding to the effect mode at that time. Is fluctuated.

  Also, the display mode of the special effect symbol TZ4 is the same in other effect modes (effect mode A2, effect mode A3, effect mode A0, effect mode B1, effect mode B2), and the variable display of the first special symbol TZ4. Regardless of whether it is the first variable effect corresponding to the variable display or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the special effect symbol TZ4 of the same display mode (fifth display mode) is variable display. Will be done.

(Display example when the production mode changes during the normal game state)
Next, a display example when the effect mode changes during the normal game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

  First, a case where the effect mode shifts from effect mode A1 to effect mode A2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), during the variable display of the first special symbol, the image display device 14 displays the effect mode A1 such as the effect mode image MD indicating the effect mode A1 or the background image. The effect image is displayed, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the first display mode and the special effect symbol TZ4 in the fifth display mode are variably displayed to perform a variable effect (first variable effect).

  Next, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, the effect symbols "4", "2" and "1" in the first display mode are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 110 (b). At the same time, the special effect symbols "4", "2", and "1" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, the changing icon is deleted, and the variable effect (first variable effect) ends. At this time, it is assumed that the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied.

  Next, when the change display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), the first hold icon shifts to change to a changing icon, and the special effect symbol TZ4 in the fifth display mode is displayed. Starts a fluctuation display, and a fluctuation effect (first fluctuation effect) is started.

  Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 110 (d) and 110 (e), the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting the effect mode (attracting the player's attention). . Specifically, a darkening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 so as to restrict the visual recognition of the effect images in the effect mode A1 (the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the background image, and the like). ). After the display of closing the fusuma image behind the special effect design TZ4, the display of opening the fusuma image is performed. At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen.

  Then, when the fusuma image is completely opened and the transition effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 110 (f) and 110 (g), an effect mode image MD indicating the effect mode A2, an effect mode such as a background image, and the like. The effect image of A2 is displayed, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the second display mode switched from the first display mode start changing display.

  Thereafter, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, the effect symbols "5", "2", and "7" in the second display mode are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 110 (h). At the same time, the special effect symbols "5", "2", and "7" are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (first variable effect) ends.

  Next, a case where the effect mode shifts from effect mode A2 to effect mode A3 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 111A, the effect image of the effect mode A2 such as the effect mode image MD or the background image indicating the effect mode A2 is displayed on the image display device 14. The effect symbols "5", "2" and "7" in the display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "5", "2" and "7" are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (first variable effect) ends. At this time, the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied.

  Next, when the change display of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the second hold icon shifts to change to the changing icon, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ1 in the second display mode are displayed. TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 in the fifth display mode start the variable display, and the variable effect (second variable effect) is executed.

  Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 111 (c) and 111 (d), the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting the effect mode (attracting the player's attention). . Specifically, a darkening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 and blacked out (blacked out) so that the visual recognition of the effect images in the effect mode A2 (the effect mode images, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and the background image) is restricted. . After the display of closing the fusuma image behind the special effect design TZ4, the display of opening the fusuma image is performed. At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen.

  Then, when the sliding image is completely opened and the transition effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 111 (e) and 111 (f), the effect mode image MD indicating the effect mode A3, the effect of the third display mode. The effect images of the effect mode A3 such as the symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the background image are displayed, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the third display mode switched from the second display mode start the variable display.

  Thereafter, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 111 (g), the effect symbols "4", "7" and "2" in the third display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols "4", "7", and "2" are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (second variable effect) ends.

  In addition, in the case of shifting from the effect mode A3 to the effect mode A1, and also in the case of shifting from the effect mode A0 to the effect mode A1, the effect of the above-described transition effect is performed, and the effect of the effect mode after shifting to the image display device 14. An image is displayed, and the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched.

  In this manner, regardless of whether the special symbol change display held before the effect mode shifts is the first special symbol change display or the second special symbol change display, after the effect mode shifts, When executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the display mode corresponding to the effect mode are displayed in a variable manner in the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol. Therefore, the display mode of the effect symbols can be separated for each effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when the effect mode shifts in the normal game state, a shift effect (predetermined effect) for shifting the effect mode (attracting the player's attention) on the image display device 14 is executed to change the display mode of the effect symbol. Since the switching is performed, the player's attention can be attracted to the transition effect, and it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and unnaturalness in which the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the progress of the game.

  Furthermore, since the transition effect executed when the effect mode shifts in the normal game state is the same effect mode regardless of the effect mode before the shift and the effect mode after the shift, the effect mode shifts. This makes it easier for the player to detect this, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that a part of the transition effect may be made different depending on the type of the effect mode before the transition and the effect mode after the transition, so as to have a similar effect mode.

  In addition, as a transition effect (predetermined effect), the display unit 140 is darkened (blacked out) to open and close the sliding image, but only the darkening of the display unit 140 is performed without closing and opening the sliding image. This may be performed, or only the sliding and closing of the sliding door image may be performed without darkening the display unit 140. Further, instead of darkening the display unit 140, a whitening effect (lightening effect) may be displayed on the display unit 140 to cause whitening (whiteout: lightening).

  In addition, during the execution of the transition effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the display unit 140, but may not be displayed on the display unit 140.

  When a sub image display device is provided in addition to the image display device 14, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the sub image display device during the execution of the transition effect, and the image is displayed after the end of the transition effect. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed on the display device 14.

  Furthermore, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed during the execution of the transition effect may be a display mode corresponding to the effect mode before the transition, a display mode corresponding to the effect mode after the transition, or may be specified. The fourth display mode corresponding to the game state may be used, or the fifth display mode same as the special effect symbol TZ4 may be used.

  In addition, since the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied at the end of the variable effect, the transition effect is executed at the start of the first variable effect after the transition condition is satisfied, but the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied. The transition effect may be executed at the end of the variable effect.

  Also, the movable portion 17A of the special effect device 17 is not operated during the execution of the transition effect, but a predetermined operation is performed on the movable portion 17A of the special effect device 17 during the execution of the transition effect. You may make it do. By doing so, it becomes easier to attract the player's attention, and it becomes possible to effectively reduce the unnaturalness and unnaturalness in which the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the progress of the game.

(Display example of the fluctuating effect in the normal game state)
Next, a display example of a variable effect in which a specific effect (SP reach effect) is executed in the normal game state (effect mode A1) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), during the variable display of the first special symbol, the image display device 14 displays a changing icon in a special mode (green) and the first display mode. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 in the fifth display mode are displayed in a variable manner, and a variable effect (first variable effect) is executed.

  Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), the effect symbol "1" in the first display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3, thereby forming a reach state. Is executed. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 continues to fluctuate without being temporarily stopped.

  After that, when developing into an SP reach effect (specific effect), an advanced effect (predetermined effect) for developing into an SP reach effect (attracting the player's attention) is executed. The development effects include a first development effect and a second development effect. When the jackpot game is not executed, the first expansion effect is easily executed (the execution ratio is high), and the jackpot game is executed. In this case, the second advanced effect is easily executed (the execution ratio is high). In other words, the second development effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the first development effect.

  When the first development effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 112 (c-1), visual effects of the effect image in the effect mode A1 (effect mode image MD, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background image, etc.) are recognized. The whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 and whitened (whiteout) is performed so as to be regulated. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed on the front side of the whitening effect.

  When the second advanced effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 112 (c-2), the visual recognition of the effect images in the effect mode A1 (effect mode images, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background images, etc.) is restricted. As a result, the darkening effect and the lightning effect are displayed on the display unit 140, and the movable part 17A of the special effect device 17 is moved to a position serving as the starting point of the lightning effect to emit light. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed on the near side of the blackout effect.

  Thereafter, when the development effect ends, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), an effect image EG and a background image in which the ally character and the enemy character battle are displayed, and the SP reach effect (specific effect) is started, and the first effect is started. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the fourth display mode switched from the display mode are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen while forming the reach state.

  Then, when the result of the fluctuation effect is “losing”, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), the image display device 14 displays character information of “YOU LOSE” notifying that it is a loss. At the same time, the effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" in the fourth display mode, which are combinations of loss, are temporarily stopped.

  After that, when the SP reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the image display device 14 returns from the SP reach effect (specific effect) to a return effect (attracts the player's attention) (predetermined effect). ) Is executed. Specifically, the whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 to cause whitening (whiteout) so that the visual recognition of the SP reach effect images (effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background images, and the like) is restricted.

  Then, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), the effect image of the effect mode A1 such as the effect mode image MD and the background image is displayed (visual recognition is permitted), and the fourth effect is switched from the fourth display mode. The effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" in the one display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (first variation) Production) ends.

  On the other hand, when the result of the fluctuation effect is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the character information of "YOU WIN" indicating that it is a big hit is displayed on the image display device 14. At the same time, the effect symbols “1”, “1”, and “1” in the fourth display mode, which are combinations of jackpots, are temporarily stopped.

  After that, when the re-lottery effect is started, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the temporarily stopped effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 change again while maintaining the jackpot combination, and when the re-change period elapses, As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the fourth display mode, which are combinations of jackpots, are temporarily stopped.

  Then, when the re-lottery effect ends, as shown in FIG. 113 (d), in the image display device 14, a return effect (predetermined effect) for returning from the re-lottery effect (specific effect) (attracting the player's attention). ) Is executed. Specifically, the whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 so as to cause whitening (whiteout) so that the visual recognition of the rendition effect image (effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background image, and the like) is restricted.

  Thereafter, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 114 (e), the effect images of the effect mode A1 such as the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and the background image are displayed (visual recognition is permitted), and the fourth effect is displayed. The effect symbols "1", "1" and "1" of the first display mode switched from the display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "1" and "1" of the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed. The variable effect (first variable effect) ends, and the opening effect of the big hit game is executed.

  If the re-lottery effect is not executed, the process shifts from FIG. 114 (a) to FIG. 114 (d), and the return effect is an effect for returning from the SP reach effect.

  As described above, when the specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is started in the variable effect during the normal game state, the image display device 14 develops the specific effect (attracts the player's attention). Since the development effect (predetermined effect) is executed and the display mode of the effect symbols is switched, the attention of the player can be attracted to the advanced effect, and the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the variable effect, causing unnaturalness and unnaturalness. Can be reduced.

  Also, when the specific effect (re-lottery effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) ends in the variable effect in the normal gaming state, the image display device 14 returns from the specific effect (attracts the player's attention). , The display mode of the effect symbols is switched by executing the return effect (predetermined effect), so that the attention of the player can be attracted to the shift effect, and the unnaturalness in which the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are switched during the variable effect. Discomfort can be reduced.

  Further, since there are a plurality of types of development effects for shifting to a specific effect and the jackpot expectation degrees are set to be different from each other, the player's expectation of which development effect is to be performed is improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, since one of the development effects for shifting to the specific effect and the return effect for returning from the specific effect are in the same effect mode, the start and end of the specific effect can be clearly understood. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  During the execution of the development effect and the return effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are not displayed on the display unit 140, but may be displayed on the display unit 140. In such a case, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be reduced and displayed near the edge of the screen (for example, at the upper left or upper right) in a state of being superimposed on the whitening effect or the darkening effect.

  Further, when a sub image display device is provided in addition to the image display device 14, during the execution of the development effect and the return effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the sub image display device, and the development effect and After completion of the return effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed on the image display device 14.

  Further, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed during the execution of the development effect and the return effect, the display mode corresponding to the effect mode at that time or the fourth display mode corresponding to the specific game state may be employed. The fifth display mode may be the same as the special effect symbol TZ4.

(Display example when shifting to the specific game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a display example in the case of transition from a jackpot game (low-probability non-time saving game state) to a specific game state (probable change game state) will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), during the final round game (16 rounds) of the jackpot game, the image display device 14 performs a jackpot effect display corresponding to the final round, and the right area of the game area 2A. A strong right-hitting image MU that prompts the player to fire a game ball toward the game, a total prize ball number information SK indicating a total value of the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player during the big hit game, A reduced effect symbol SZ indicating the effect symbol stopped and displayed in the fluctuating effect triggered by the execution is displayed.

  Next, when the last round game ends, an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game is executed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 115 (b). More specifically, a probable change image KI indicating transition to the probable change game state (production mode B1) is displayed, and a weak right-hit image MU having a lower appeal to the player than the strong right-hand image MU is displayed. I do.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 115 (c), the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting to the certainty-variable game state (effect mode B1) (attracting the player's attention). More specifically, a warning image TK for preventing a storage medium (a card, a coin, or the like) storing the remaining amount of the money inserted in the gaming medium lending device provided in conjunction with the gaming machine Y from being forgotten is displayed.

  Then, when the transition effect is completed, the game shifts to the probable change game state (effect mode B1), and as shown in FIG. 115 (d), an effect mode image MD indicating that the effect mode is B1, and an effect symbol TZ1 in the fourth display mode. TZ3, the special effect symbol TZ4 in the fifth display mode, the background image, the number-of-plays image OKG, the strong right-handed image MU, and the remaining number-of-times image NK (100 remaining).

  Then, when the change display of the first special symbol held during the normal game state is started, as shown in FIG. 115 (e), the first hold icon shifts to change to the changing icon, and the fourth icon changes. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the display mode and the special effect symbol TZ4 in the fifth display mode start variable display, a variable effect (first variable effect) is started, and the remaining number of times of the specific game state is decremented by one. Immediately thereafter, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7, the second special figure reservation number becomes “1” and one second reservation icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 115 (f), the effect symbols "8", "3", and "5" in the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols "8", "3", and "5" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (first variable effect) ends.

  Next, when the change display of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 115 (g), the second holding icon shifts to change to the changing icon, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ1 in the fourth display mode are displayed. TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode start the variable display, and the variable effect (the second variable effect) is executed, and the remaining number of times of the specific game state is decremented by one.

  Thereafter, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 115 (h), the effect symbols "6", "3" and "9" in the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols “6”, “3”, and “9” in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (second variable effect) ends.

  As described above, regardless of whether the variable display of the special symbol held before shifting to the certain-variable gaming state (production mode B1) is the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol, When executed after shifting to the certain variation game state (production mode B1), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the display mode corresponding to the certain variation game state (production mode B1) change in the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the symbol. Will be displayed. Therefore, the display mode of the effect symbols can be separated for each game state (effect mode), and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when shifting to the certainty-variable game state (effect mode B1), the image display device 14 executes a shift effect (predetermined effect) for shifting to the certainty-changeable game state (effect mode B1) (attracting the player's attention). Then, since the effect design of the display mode corresponding to the probable change game state (effect mode B1) is displayed, the attention of the player can be attracted to the transition effect, and the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 during the progress of the game. It is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and uncomfortable feeling of switching.

  Note that the alerting image TK is displayed as the transition effect (predetermined effect). However, the transition effect from the ending effect of the jackpot game to the end of the display of the alerting image TK may be the shift effect, or the jackpot game. The transition effect may be from the opening effect to the end of the display of the alert image TK.

  Further, in the effect mode B1 and the effect mode B2, it is determined whether the first variable effect corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Instead, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the same display mode (fourth display mode) are variably displayed. Therefore, an effect with a sense of unity can be performed during one effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the effect mode B1 and the effect mode B2, it is determined whether the first variable effect corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Instead, the special effect symbol TZ4 of the same display mode (fifth display mode) is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, an effect with a sense of unity can be performed during one effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Display example of fluctuating effects in a specific game state)
Next, a display example of a variable effect in which a specific effect (SP-reach effect) is executed in the probable change game state (effect mode B1) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), during the variable display of the second special symbol, the image display device 14 displays the changing icon in the special mode (red) and the fourth display mode. Of the special effects symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbols TZ4 in the fifth display mode are displayed in a variable manner, and a variable effect (second variable effect) is executed.

  Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the effect symbol “3” in the fourth display mode is temporarily stopped as the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol TZ3, thereby forming a reach state. Normal reach is executed. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 continues to fluctuate without being temporarily stopped.

  After that, when developing into a specific effect (SP reach effect), an advanced effect (predetermined effect) for developing into a specific effect (attracting the player's attention) is executed. The development effects include a first development effect and a second development effect. When the jackpot game is not executed, the first expansion effect is easily executed (the execution ratio is high), and the jackpot game is executed. In this case, the second advanced effect is easily executed (the execution ratio is high). In other words, the second development effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the first development effect.

  When the first advanced effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 116 (c-1), an effect image of the effect mode B1 (effect mode image MD, effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background image, number of consecutive holidays image) The whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 to cause whitening (whiteout) so that the visibility of the OKG, the remaining number of images NK, and the like is restricted. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 and the right-hit image MU are displayed on the front side of the whitening effect.

  When the second development effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 116 (c-2), the effect image of the effect mode B1 (the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the background image, the image of the number of consecutive holidays) A darkening effect and a lightning effect are displayed on the display unit 140 so that the visual recognition of the OKG, the remaining number of images NK, and the like is restricted, and the movable unit 17A of the production accessory device 17 is moved to a position where the lightning effect starts. Move to emit light. At this time, the special effect symbol TZ4 and the right-hit image MU are displayed on the front side of the whitening effect.

  After that, when the development effect ends, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the effect image EG and the background image in which the ally character and the enemy character battle are displayed, and the SP reach effect (specific effect) is started, and the development effect is started. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the same fourth display mode as before are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen while forming the reach state.

  Then, when the result of the fluctuation effect is “losing”, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), a character image of “YOU LOSE” notifying that it is a loss is displayed on the image display device 14. At the same time, the effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" in the fourth display mode, which are combinations of loss, are temporarily stopped.

  After that, when the SP reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the image display device 14 returns from the SP reach effect (specific effect) to a return effect (attracts a player's attention) (predetermined effect). ) Is executed. Specifically, the whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 to cause whitening (whiteout) so that the visual recognition of the SP reach effect images (effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background images, and the like) is restricted.

  Then, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the effect images in the effect mode B1 such as the effect mode image MD, the background image, the number-of-contemporaries-image OKG, and the remaining-times image NK are displayed (visual recognition is not performed). The effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" in the same fourth display mode as before the return effect are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "2", and "1" in the fifth display mode are displayed. The display is stopped and the variable effect (the second variable effect) ends.

  On the other hand, when the result of the fluctuation effect is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), a character image of “YOU WIN” is displayed on the image display device 14 to notify that it is a big hit. At the same time, the effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the fourth display mode, which are combinations of jackpots, are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the image display device 14 executes a return effect (predetermined effect) for returning from the SP reach effect (specific effect) (attracting the player's attention). Specifically, the whitening effect is displayed on the display unit 140 to cause whitening (whiteout) so that the visual recognition of the SP reach effect images (effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, background images, and the like) is restricted.
After that, when the return effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), the effect images of the effect mode B1 such as the effect mode image MD, the background image, the number-of-contemporaries image OKG, and the remaining number-of-times image NK are displayed (visual confirmation). The effect symbols "1", "1" and "1" in the same fourth display mode as before the return effect are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "1" and "1" in the fifth display mode are displayed. The stop effect is displayed and the variable effect (the second variable effect) ends, and the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed.

  When a re-lottery effect is executed, the same effect as in FIG. 114 (b) is executed between FIG. 118 (a) and FIG. 118 (b).

  As described above, when the specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is started in the variable effect during the specific game state, the image display device 14 develops the specific effect (attracts the player's attention). Although the advanced effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the display mode of the effect symbols is not switched unlike during the normal gaming state, so that the unnaturalness and unnaturalness in which the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are switched during the variable effect are reduced. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when the specific effect (re-lottery effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) ends in the variable effect during the specific game state, the image display device 14 returns from the specific effect (to attract the player's attention). Is performed, but the display mode of the effect symbols is not switched, unlike the normal game state and the middle, so that the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the variable effect. It becomes possible to reduce.

  Further, since there are a plurality of types of development effects for shifting to a specific effect and the jackpot expectation degrees are set to be different from each other, the player's expectation of which development effect is to be performed is improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, since one of the development effects for shifting to the specific effect and the return effect for returning from the specific effect are in the same effect mode, the start and end of the specific effect can be clearly understood. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  During the execution of the development effect and the return effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are not displayed on the display unit 140, but may be displayed on the display unit 140. In such a case, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be reduced and displayed near the edge of the screen (for example, upper left or upper right) in a state of being superimposed on the whitening effect or the darkening effect.

  Further, when a sub image display device is provided in addition to the image display device 14, during the execution of the development effect and the return effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the sub image display device, and the development effect and After completion of the return effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed on the image display device 14.

  Further, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed during the execution of the development effect and the return effect, the display mode corresponding to the effect mode at that time or the fourth display mode corresponding to the specific game state may be employed. The fifth display mode may be the same as the special effect symbol TZ4.

  Further, the right-handed image MU is displayed during the period from the start of the development effect to the end of the return effect, but the right-handed image MU may not be displayed. Although the hit image MU is not displayed, the right-hit image MU may be displayed during execution of the specific effect.

(Display example when the production mode changes during the specific game state)
Next, a display example when the effect mode changes during the specific game state will be described with reference to FIG. 119.

  First, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect symbols "5", "2" and "3" in the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 119 (a), and the fifth display mode is displayed. Are stopped and displayed, and the fluctuating icon is deleted, and the fluctuating effect (the second fluctuating effect) ends. At this time, it is assumed that the remaining number of times of the specific game state is five and the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied.

  Next, when the change display of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the second holding icon shifts to change to the changing icon, and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode is displayed. Starts a fluctuation display, and a fluctuation effect (second fluctuation effect) is started.

  Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c) and 119 (d), the image display device 14 executes a transition effect (predetermined effect) for shifting the effect mode (attracting the player's attention). . Specifically, the display unit 140 is controlled so that the visual recognition of the effect images in the effect mode B1 (the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the number of consecutive times image OKG, the remaining times image NK, the background image, and the like) is restricted. To display a blackout effect to blackout. After the display of closing the sliding image is performed behind the special effect design TZ4 and the right-handed image MU, the display of opening the sliding image is performed. At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen.

  When the sliding image is completely opened and the transition effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 119 (e) and 119 (f), the effect mode image MD indicating the effect mode B2, the number-of-condominium-times image OKG, The effect images of the effect mode B2 such as the remaining number of images NK and the background image are displayed (visual recognition is permitted), and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the same fourth display mode as before the transition effect start changing display, and the specific game state is changed. A countdown image CD indicating that the remaining number of times until the end is four is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 119 (g), the effect symbols "4", "7" and "9" in the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the special effect symbols "4", "7", and "9" are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (second variable effect) ends. The countdown image is displayed for each variable effect until the remaining number of times until the specific game state ends is 0.

  In this way, when the effect mode shifts, a shift effect (predetermined effect) for shifting the effect mode (attracting the player's attention) on the image display device 14 is executed, but unlike the normal game state. Since the display mode of the effect symbols is not switched, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and uncomfortable feeling that the display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are switched during the progress of the game.

  In addition, the transition effect executed when the effect mode is shifted in the specific game state is the same as the shift effect executed when the effect mode is shifted in the normal game state. This makes it easier for the player to perceive that the game is to be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as a transition effect (predetermined effect), the display unit 140 is darkened (blacked out) to open and close the sliding image, but only the darkening of the display unit 140 is performed without closing and opening the sliding image. This may be performed, or only the sliding and closing of the sliding door image may be performed without darkening the display unit 140. Further, instead of darkening the display unit 140, a whitening effect may be displayed on the display unit 140 to cause whitening (whiteout).

  In addition, during the execution of the transition effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the display unit 140, but may not be displayed on the display unit 140.

  When a sub image display device is provided in addition to the image display device 14, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed on the sub image display device during the execution of the transition effect, and the image is displayed after the end of the transition effect. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed on the display device 14.

  Furthermore, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed during the execution of the transition effect may be a display mode corresponding to the effect mode before the transition, a display mode corresponding to the effect mode after the transition, or may be specified. The fourth display mode corresponding to the game state may be used, or the fifth display mode same as the special effect symbol TZ4 may be used.

  In addition, since the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied at the end of the variable effect, the transition effect is executed at the start of the first variable effect after the transition condition is satisfied, but the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied. The transition effect may be executed at the end of the variable effect.

  Further, in the specific game state, when the transition from the probability change game state to the low probability time saving game state, the effect mode is not shifted, but the effect mode may be shifted, even in that case, The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be kept in the fourth display mode.

(Display example of the last fluctuation effect in the specific game state)
Next, a display example of the last variable effect in the specific game state (effect mode B2) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 120, a display example in a case where the last variable effect in the specific game state (effect mode B2) is lost and the game mode shifts to the normal game state (effect mode A0) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), during the variable display of the second special symbol, the image display device 14 variably displays the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the fourth display mode and the special effect symbol TZ4 of the fifth display mode. Thus, a countdown image CD indicating that the fluctuation effect (second fluctuation effect) is being executed and the remaining number of times until the specific game state ends is 0 (last).

  Thereafter, if the last chance effect (suggested effect) that expects the execution of the jackpot game (whether or not to shift to the normal game state) is not executed, the fourth display is performed as shown in FIG. 120 (b-1). The variation display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 of the mode continues.

  On the other hand, when the last chance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 120 (b-2), the image display device 14 prompts the user to operate the character image indicating the last chance and the operation of the effect button 18A. A promotion image (button image BG) is displayed, and a valid period is generated, and the movable portion 17A of the special effect device 17 swings up and down. At this time, the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device 16 provided on the glass door Y2 have a light effect mode (all LEDs or some LEDs) with a lower effect (appealing power) than the normal light mode. , And all or some of the LEDs are turned off).

  Then, when the last chance effect is not executed, when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period, and when the effect button 18A is not operated during the valid period, as shown in FIG. In the image display device 14, the effect mode is shifted, and the result showing the game result in the advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) generated from the big hit game (initial hit) generated in the normal game state. The notification effect (predetermined effect) is executed, and the operation of the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 stops.

  Specifically, the display unit 140 is controlled so that the visual recognition of the effect images in the effect mode B1 (the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the number of consecutive times image OKG, the remaining times image NK, the background image, and the like) is restricted. Display a darkening effect with poor color (hue, tint, color) to darken (black out). Then, a result notification image (an end image, an extended number of times image OKG, and the like) indicating a result of a game in an advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) generated from the big hit game (initial hit) generated in the normal game state. Total prize ball number information SK, a background image, etc.) are displayed. In the result notification image, a background image with a lower color than the normal background image is displayed. However, in order to reduce the color of the result notification image, in addition to the background image or in place of the background image. To display a dark color effect or the like.

  In addition, the effect images TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device 16 provided on the glass door Y2 are more effective than the normal light emitting mode. A loss light emission mode (lower luminance of all or some LEDs, extinguishment of all or some LEDs, etc.) with low (appealing power) is achieved.

  Then, when the result notification effect is completed and the transition condition of the effect mode is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), the effect of the effect mode A0 such as the effect mode image MD indicating the effect mode A0 and the background image. The image is displayed (visual recognition is permitted), and the effect symbols "5", "3", and "4" in the first display mode switched from the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "5", "3", and "3" are displayed. "4" is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (second variable effect) ends. Further, a left-hit image HU for urging the player to shoot game balls toward the left area of the game area 2A is displayed on the upper left of the screen.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a display example in the case where the last variable effect in the specific game state (effect mode B2) is a big hit will be described. Here, a description will be given from the scene where the last chance effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a), the image display device 14 displays a character image indicating the last chance and a promotion image (button image BG) for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, and is valid for a period of time. Is generated, and the movable portion 17A of the special effect device 17 swings up and down. At this time, the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device provided on the glass door Y2 have a light effect in which the effect (appealing power) is lower than the normal light emitting condition (all LEDs or some LEDs). Brightness decrease, turning off all or some LEDs, etc.).

  Then, when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period, and when the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the image display device 14 displays the effect image (effect effect) in the effect mode B2. A darkening effect and a lightning effect are displayed on the display unit 140 so that the visual recognition of the mode image, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the background image, and the like is restricted, and the movable unit 17A of the effect device 17 is set to the lightning effect. It is moved to the starting position to emit light.

  At this time, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the special effect symbol TZ4, and the right-hit image MU are displayed on the near side of the darkening effect. In addition, the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device provided on the glass door Y2 have a jackpot light emitting mode (improving the brightness of all the LEDs, which has a higher effect (appealing power) than a normal light emitting mode. LED lighting, LED rainbow emission, etc.).

  Thereafter, when the last chance effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 121 (c), the effect images of the effect mode B2 such as the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and the background image are displayed (visual recognition is permitted), and the big hit is achieved. The effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the fourth display mode, which are combinations, are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols "1", "1", and "1" in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is performed. The (first fluctuation effect) ends, and the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a display example in a case where the last variable effect in the specific game state (effect mode B2) is a big hit in the resurrection pattern will be described. Here, a description will be given from the scene where the last chance effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the image display device 14 displays a character image indicating a last chance and a promotion image (button image BG) for prompting operation of the effect button 18 </ b> A, and is valid for a period of time. Is generated, and the movable portion 17A of the special effect device 17 swings up and down. At this time, the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device provided on the glass door Y2 have a light effect in which the effect (appealing power) is lower than the normal light emitting condition (all LEDs or some LEDs). Brightness decrease, turning off all or some LEDs, etc.).

  Then, when the effect button 18A is operated during the valid period, and when the effect button 18A is not operated during the valid period, the image display device 14 sets the effect mode as shown in FIG. 122 (b). At the same time, the result notification effect (predetermined effect) indicating the result of the game in the advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) generated from the big hit game (initial hit) generated in the normal game state and the specific game state is continuously executed, The operation of the movable portion 17A of the special effect device 17 stops.

  Specifically, the display unit 140 is controlled so that the visual recognition of the effect images in the effect mode B1 (the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the number of consecutive times image OKG, the remaining times image NK, the background image, and the like) is restricted. To display a blackout effect to blackout. Then, a result notification image (an end image, an extended number of times image OKG, and the like) indicating a result of a game in an advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) generated from the big hit game (initial hit) generated in the normal game state. The total prize ball number information SK) is displayed.

  In addition, the effect images TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device 16 provided on the glass door Y2 are more effective than the normal light emitting mode. A loss light emission mode (lower luminance of all or some LEDs, extinguishment of all or some LEDs, etc.) with low (appealing power) is achieved.

  Then, when the result notification effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 122 (c), the effect mode image MD indicating that the effect mode is the effect mode A0 despite the condition for shifting to the effect mode A0 is not satisfied, and the background. The effect image of the effect mode A0 such as an image is displayed, and the effect symbols "5", "3", and "4" of the first display mode switched from the fourth display mode are stopped and displayed, but the variation display of the special effect symbol TZ4. Continue.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), the image display device 14 controls the display unit so that the visual recognition of the effect images in the effect mode A0 (effect mode images, effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3, background images, etc.) is restricted. At 140, the darkening effect and the lightning effect are displayed, and the movable part 17A of the special effect device 17 is moved to a position serving as the starting point of the lightning effect to emit light.

  At this time, the effect images TZ1 to TZ3 fluctuate again while being reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the special effect symbol TZ4, and the right-hit image MU are displayed in front of the darkening effect. Become. In addition, the effect lighting device 16 provided on the game board 2 and the effect lighting device provided on the glass door Y2 have a jackpot light emitting mode (improving the brightness of all the LEDs, which has a higher effect (appealing power) than a normal light emitting mode. LED lighting, LED rainbow emission, etc.).

  Thereafter, when the last chance effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 122 (e), the effect images of the effect mode B2 such as the effect mode image MD, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and the background image are displayed. The effect symbols “1”, “1” and “1” in the display mode are stopped and displayed, and the special effect symbols “1”, “1” and “1” in the fifth display mode are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (first variable effect) ) Ends.

  Then, when the opening effect of the jackpot game is started, a right-hit image MU for opening is displayed on the upper right of the display unit 140 as shown in FIG. 122 (f), and the jackpot game is displayed on the remaining portion of the display unit 140. Opening image OPG is displayed, indicating that the opening is an opening.

  Thereafter, when the first round game is started, a round effect is executed as shown in FIG. 122 (g). Specifically, the round information indicating the first round game, the right-handed image MU, the total prize ball number information SK obtained by inheriting the total value of the prize balls displayed during the result notification effect, the big hit game The effect symbol TZ which is the execution trigger is displayed.

  As described above, when shifting to the normal game state (effect mode A0), the image display device 14 shifts to the normal game state (effect mode A0), and also specifies from the big hit game (initial hit) generated in the normal game state. A result notification effect (predetermined effect) indicating the result of the game in the advantageous period in which the game state is continuously (continuously) generated is executed, and the effect symbol of the display mode corresponding to the normal game state (effect mode A0) is displayed. Since the display is performed, the player's attention can be attracted to the transition effect, and it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and unnaturalness in which the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the progress of the game.

  In addition, when shifting to the normal game state (production mode A0), after the movable part 17A of the production accessory device 17 is operated, an effect pattern in a display mode corresponding to the normal game state (production mode A0) is displayed. Therefore, the attention of the player can be attracted to the operation of the movable unit 17A, and the unnaturalness and unnaturalness in which the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the progress of the game can be reduced.

  In addition, when the last variable effect in the specific game state (effect mode B2) is a big hit in the resurrection pattern, after displaying the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the display mode corresponding to the effect mode A0, the effect character device for effect. Since the 17 movable portions 17A are operated to display the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the display mode corresponding to the specific game state (the effect mode B2), it is possible to draw the player's attention to the operation of the movable portion 17A. It is possible to reduce the unnaturalness and unnaturalness in which the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is switched during the execution of the variable effect.

  Although the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the display unit 140 during the execution of the result notification effect, they may not be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the effect mode A0, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the first display mode in the same manner as in the effect mode A1, but in the effect mode A0, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the same manner as in the effect mode B2. May be displayed in the fourth display mode. In this way, the player's willingness to play after the end of the specific gaming state can be increased, and the operation of the gaming machine Y can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 temporarily stop in the normal game state, the character images CYG of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 do not execute the stop action effect effect, but temporarily stop. At the time, the action effect at the time of stopping the character images CYG of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be executed, or when the fluctuation of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is started, the character image CYG of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be predetermined. An action effect at the start of performing an action may be executed. In that case, the production mode of the start action production and the stop action production may be the same or different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the transition effect for shifting the effect mode, the sliding display image displayed on the image display device 14 has the same display mode in any case. In the case of executing a notice effect that expects the execution of the jackpot game, the display mode of the fusuma image may be set to a special display mode different from the normal display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the result notification effect is always executed when the transition from the specific game state (effect mode B2) to the normal game state (effect mode A0) is performed. Instead, a transition effect of displaying a whitening effect on the display unit 140 and causing whitening (whiteout) may be executed, or a transition of displaying a blackout effect on the display unit 140 and performing blackout (blackout). An effect may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the size of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is not changed between the probability-variable game state (production mode B1) and the low-probability time-saving game state (production mode B2). The size of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be different between the mode B1) and the low-probability time-saving gaming state (effect mode B2). For example, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be displayed larger in the low-probability time-saving game state (effect mode B2) than in the probable change game state (effect mode B1).

  Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state or the specific game state, when the specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are in the first position. Although it was designed to be displayed in four display modes, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in one of the normal game state and the specific game state, but the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the other of the normal game state and the specific game state. It may not be displayed.

  By the way, a conventional gaming machine is generally capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to a player, when a change display of a symbol executed based on establishment of a starting condition has a predetermined special result. In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which an effect symbol is displayed on a display means, and a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol is executed during the variable display of the symbol (for example, JP-A-2014-073377). Reference). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for improvement in the display content of the display means, and there is a problem that the interest in the game is low.

As a configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the symbols executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (entering the game ball into the starting port) ( When the variable display of the special symbol has a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A game state control means (main control board 101) capable of controlling a specific game state and a display means (image display device 14) display an effect symbol, and the effect symbol is displayed during the fluctuation display of the symbol. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display, wherein the variable effect executing means includes a specific effect (SP reach) during the variable effect. Direction, SP P reach effect) can be executed, the effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the normal game state, and the effect symbols are displayed in the predetermined display mode in the specific game state. Display in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) with a lower decorativeness (simplicity of design, less color, dark color, etc.), and when the transition from the specific game state to the normal game state is performed, the display is performed. Means for executing a predetermined effect (result notification effect) to switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode, and performing the specific effect during the variable effect in the normal game state, The effect symbol is switched from a predetermined display mode to a specific display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal game state and the player The game state control means (main control board 101) capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state which is advantageous to the game, and the effect symbol are displayed on the display means (image display device 14). A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of symbols, wherein the variable effect executing means includes a specific effect ( SP reach production SPSP reach effect) can be executed, the effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the normal game state, and the effect symbols are displayed in the predetermined display mode in the specific game state. Display in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) with a lower decorativeness (simplicity of design, less color, dark color, etc.), and when the transition from the specific game state to the normal game state is performed, the display is performed. Means for executing a predetermined effect (result notification effect) to switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode, and performing the specific effect during the variable effect in the normal game state, The effect symbol is switched from a predetermined display mode to a specific display mode. When the specific effect is performed during the variable effect in the specific game state, the effect symbol is displayed in a specific display mode. It is adapted to remain. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal game state and the player The game state control means (main control board 101) capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state which is advantageous to the game, and the effect symbol are displayed on the display means (image display device 14). Variation effect execution means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variation effect with symbol variation display, and effect mode control means (effect control) for changing an effect mode for executing the variation effect. Board 102, an image control board 105), and the variable effect execution means displays the effect symbols in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the normal game mode, and the specific game mode. In the above, the effect symbol is displayed in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) having a lower decorativeness than the predetermined display mode (simplified design, few colors, dark colors, etc.), and from the specific game state to the normal mode. When shifting to the gaming state, the display means performs a predetermined effect (result notification effect) to switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode, and the effect mode changes during the specific game state. In this case, the effect design is maintained in a specific display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal game state and the player The game state control means (main control board 101) capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state which is advantageous to the game, and the effect symbol are displayed on the display means (image display device 14). A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a symbol variable display, and a special symbol (special effect symbol) corresponding to the execution of the symbol variable display. Change display Special fluctuation display means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) that can be executed, and the fluctuation effect execution means displays the effect symbols in a predetermined display mode (first to first) in the normal game state. (3rd display mode), and in the specific game state, the effect design has a lower decorativeness than the predetermined display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) in a specific display mode (fourth display mode). In the case where the display is performed in the above mode and the transition from the specific game state to the normal game state is performed, a predetermined effect (result notification effect) is executed on the display unit to change the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode. Switching, the special variation display means displays the special symbol in a common display mode (fifth display mode) regardless of the normal game state or the specific game state. That. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal game state and the player The game state control means (main control board 101) capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state which is advantageous to the game, and the effect symbol are displayed on the display means (image display device 14). A variable effect execution means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a symbol change display, wherein the variable effect execution means includes the effect symbol in the normal gaming state. Where In the display mode (first to third display modes), and in the specific game state, specify the effect symbol with a lower decorativeness than the predetermined display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) When the display is performed in the display mode (fourth display mode) and the transition from the specific game state to the normal game state is performed, the display means causes the specific game to start from a predetermined period (a big hit game (initial hit) generated in the normal game state) A notification effect (result notification effect) for notifying a result of a game in an advantageous period in which a state occurs continuously (continuously) is executed to switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode. Has become. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal game state and the player The game state control means (main control board 101) capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state which is advantageous to the game, and the effect symbol are displayed on the display means (image display device 14). A variable effect execution means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a symbol change display, wherein the variable effect execution means includes the effect symbol in the normal gaming state. Where In the display mode (first to third display modes), and in the specific game state, specify the effect symbol with a lower decorativeness than the predetermined display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) In the case where the display is performed in the display mode (fourth display mode) and the transition from the specific game state to the normal game state is performed, the display means reduces the color of the background from the normal effect display to the specific effect display ( (Result notification effect, transition effect) are executed to switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, an operation means (effect) that can be operated by the player in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player Button), a normal game state, and a game state control unit (main control board 101) capable of controlling a normal game state to a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a display unit (image display device 14). ), A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol. Equipped, said fluctuation performance The execution means displays the effect symbols in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the normal game state, and has a lower decorativeness than the predetermined display modes in the specific game state. (A simple design, few colors, dark colors, etc.) are displayed in a specific display mode (fourth display mode), and in the fluctuation effect in the specific game state, the normal game state is set based on the operation of the operation means. In the case of performing a suggestion effect (last chance effect) as to whether or not to shift, and shifting to the normal game state, after the suggestion effect, the display means displays for a predetermined period (a big hit game (initial hit) generated in the normal game state). ) To execute a notification effect (result notification effect) for notifying the result of the game in an advantageous period in which the specific game state is continuously (continuously) generated, and the effect symbol is displayed in a specific display mode. The switching to Luo preset display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal game state and the player The game state control means (main control board 101) capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state which is advantageous to the game, and the effect symbol are displayed on the display means (image display device 14). A variable effect execution means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a symbol change display, wherein the variable effect execution means includes the effect symbol in the normal gaming state. Where In the display mode (first to third display modes), and in the specific game state, specify the effect symbol with a lower decorativeness than the predetermined display mode (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) In the case of displaying in the display mode (fourth display mode) and shifting to the specific game state, a predetermined effect (transfer effect) is executed by the display means to display the effect symbol in a specific display mode. Has become. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the change display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied with the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol, and an effect for executing the variable effect The mode can be controlled to a predetermined effect mode (one of effect modes A0 to A3 and effect modes B1 to B2) and a specific effect mode (the other of effect modes A0 to A3 and effect modes B1 to B2). Effect mode control means (effect control board 102, image control board 105), wherein the variable effect execution means displays the effect symbol in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the predetermined effect mode. In the specific effect mode, the effect symbols are displayed in a specific display condition different from the predetermined display condition (the other of the first to third display conditions and the fourth display condition). When the display is performed and the display is shifted from the predetermined effect mode to the specific effect mode, a predetermined effect (shift effect, result notification effect) is executed on the display means to display the effect symbol in a specific display mode from a predetermined display mode. The mode is switched to the mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the change display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol; A specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) can be executed during the fluctuation effect, and before the execution of the specific effect in the fluctuation effect, the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third). Display mode), and during the execution of the specific effect in the variable effect, the specific design of the effect symbol is lower than that of the predetermined display mode (simplified design, less color, dark color, etc.). In the case of displaying in the mode (fourth display mode) and executing the specific effect during the fluctuation effect, a predetermined effect (development effect) is executed on the display means to change the effect symbol from a predetermined display mode. The display mode is switched. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the change display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol; A specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) can be executed during the fluctuation effect, and the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to first) while the specific effect in the fluctuation effect is not being executed. Display mode), and during the execution of the specific effect in the variable effect, the specific design of the effect symbol has a lower decorativeness than the predetermined display mode (eg, a simple design, a small number of colors, a dark color, etc.). In the case of displaying in the mode (fourth display mode) and terminating the specific effect during the fluctuation effect, the display means executes a predetermined effect (return effect) to change the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined effect. The display mode is switched. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the change display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol; A specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) can be executed during the fluctuation effect, and before the execution of the specific effect in the fluctuation effect, the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third). Display mode), and during the execution of the specific effect in the variable effect, the specific design of the effect symbol is lower than that of the predetermined display mode (simplified design, less color, dark color, etc.). In the case of displaying in the mode (fourth display mode) and starting the specific effect during the fluctuation effect, the display means executes a predetermined effect (development effect) to change the effect symbol from the predetermined display mode. When switching to a specific display mode and ending the specific effect during the fluctuation effect, the display means executes a predetermined effect (return effect) to switch the effect design from the specific display mode to the predetermined display mode. It has become. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the fluctuation display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, a movable member (a production role) capable of operating in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable effect execution that can display the effect symbol on the movable part of the object device) and the display means (image display device 14), and can execute the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol. Means (effect control board 102, image control board 105), wherein the variable effect execution means can execute a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) during the variable effect, The above features Prior to the execution of the effect, the effect symbols are displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes), and during the execution of the specific effect in the variable effect, the effect symbols are displayed more than the predetermined display mode. When displaying in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) with low decorativeness (simple design, few colors, dark colors, etc.) and operating the specific effect during the fluctuation effect, operate the movable member. Then, the effect symbol is switched from a predetermined display mode to a specific display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the change display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied with the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol, and an effect for executing the variable effect Effect mode control means (effect control board 10) capable of controlling the mode to a first effect mode (effect mode A1), a second effect mode (effect mode A2), and a third effect mode (effect mode A3). , An image control board 105), wherein the variable effect execution means displays the effect symbol in the first effect mode in a first display mode, and displays the effect symbol in the second effect mode in a second display mode. In the third effect mode, the effect symbols are displayed in a third display mode, and when the effect mode is shifted, a predetermined effect (shift effect) is executed on the display means to display the effect symbols. The mode is switched, and a predetermined effect when shifting from the first effect mode to the second effect mode is the same as or similar to a predetermined effect when shifting from the second effect mode to the third effect mode. It can be executed in an effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the fluctuation display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, a movable member (a production role) capable of operating in a predetermined mode in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The variable effect execution that can display the effect symbol on the movable part of the object device) and the display means (image display device 14), and can execute the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol. Means (effect control board 102, image control board 105), an effect mode for performing the variable effect, a first effect mode (one of effect modes A0 to A3 and effect modes B1 to B2), and a second effect Mode (production mode A A3 and an effect mode control means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) which can be controlled to the other one of the effect modes B1 and B2. In the effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in a first display mode, and in the second effect mode, the effect symbol is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode, and the first effect mode is provided. When the mode shifts to the second effect mode, the movable symbol is operated to switch the effect symbol from the first display mode to the second display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the fluctuation display of the symbol (special symbol) has a predetermined special result, the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and the first gaming state (normal gaming state) are executed in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A game state control means (main control board 101) capable of controlling a first game state to a second game state (probable change game state, low-probability time-saving game state) having a different degree of advantage for the player; (Image display device 14) to display effect symbols, and a variable effect execution means (effect control board 102, image control board) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbols during the variable display of the symbols. 105) The variable effect execution means displays the effect symbol in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes) in the first game state, and is different from the predetermined display mode in the second game state (design is different). When the display is performed in a specific display mode (fourth display mode) such as simple, low color, dark color, etc., and the transition from the second game state to the first game state is performed, a predetermined effect (transition effect) is displayed on the display means. ) To switch the effect symbol from a specific display mode to a predetermined display mode, and the number (12 types) of the effect symbols stopped and displayed during the variable effect in the first game state; The number (9 types) of the effect symbols stopped and displayed during the variable effect in the second game state is different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the gaming machine Y is executed based on establishment of a starting condition (ball entry of a game ball into a starting port). When the change display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied with the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol, and an effect for executing the variable effect An effect mode control unit capable of controlling a mode to a first effect mode (any of effect modes A0 to A3) and a second effect mode (the rest of effect modes A0 to A3). , Said fluctuation performance Is a first variation effect that is executed during the variation display of the symbol based on establishment of a first start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a first startup port) and establishment of a second start condition (second There is a second variation effect executed during the variation display of the symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port), and the variation effect execution means performs the first variation mode in the first effect mode by displaying the first effect symbol in the first effect mode. In a second display mode (first to third display modes) different from the first display mode in the second effect mode. When the display is performed in the rest of the display mode) and the display is shifted from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, a predetermined effect (transfer effect) is executed on the display means to display the effect symbol on the first display. The mode is switched from the mode to the second display mode, and during the first effect mode, Regardless of whether the second variation effect either a first variation effect, is adapted to perform said variation effect by using a performance symbol of the first display form. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the fluctuation display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the unexecuted game is executed even though the start condition is satisfied. An effect symbol is displayed on the holding storage means (main control board 101) capable of holding the variable display of the symbol up to a predetermined number and the display means (image display device 14), and the effect is displayed during the variable display of the symbol. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a symbol change display, and an effect mode for executing the variable effect are described as a first effect mode (effect mode). A0-A And effect mode control means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) that can be controlled in a second effect mode (the rest of effect modes A0 to A3). The effect executing means displays the effect symbol in the first effect mode in a first display mode (any one of first to third display modes), and displays the effect symbol in the second effect mode in the first effect mode. The display is performed in a second display mode (the rest of the first to third display modes) different from the first display mode, and when shifting from the first effect mode to the second effect mode, predetermined display is performed by the display means. An effect (transition effect) is executed to switch the effect symbol from the first display mode to the second display mode, and even if the symbol is suspended during the first effect mode, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If it is executed during production mode 2 The performance symbols in the fluctuation effect performed during variable display of the symbols so as to display a second display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the change display of the symbol (special symbol) becomes a predetermined special result, the effect symbol is displayed on the display means (image display device 14) in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A variable effect executing means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied with the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol, and an effect for executing the variable effect Effect mode control means (effect control board 102, image control board) capable of controlling the mode into a first effect mode (effect modes A0 to A3) and a second effect mode (effect modes B1 to B2) 1 5), wherein the variable effect execution means displays the effect symbols in a first display mode (first to third display modes) in the first effect mode, and in the second effect mode. The effect design is displayed in a second display mode (fourth display mode) different from the first display mode (simple design, few colors, dark colors, etc.), and the first effect mode is switched from the second effect mode to the first display mode. When a transition is made to the effect mode, when a predetermined effect (transition effect) is executed on the display means, the effect pattern is switched from the second display mode to the first display mode, and when the game machine returns from the power-off state of the gaming machine. When controlled to the first effect mode, the effect symbols are displayed in a first display mode, while when controlled to the second effect mode, the effect symbols are displayed in a second display mode, Common identification of the identification information of the effect symbols Broadcast is adapted to the ( "1", "3", "5"). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above-described problem, the game is executed based on establishment of a start condition (ball entry of a game ball into a start port). When the fluctuation display of the symbol (special symbol) has a predetermined special result, the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and the first gaming state (normal gaming state) are executed in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. Game state control means capable of controlling to a second game state (probable change game state, low probability time-short game state) which is more advantageous to the player than one game state, and effect symbols on display means (image display device 14). And a variable effect execution means (effect control board 102, image control board 105) capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol. The effect executing means is the first play In the state, the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display mode (first to third display modes), and in the second game state, the effect symbol has a lower decorativeness than the predetermined display mode (design is simple, color Is displayed in a specific display mode (the rest of the fourth display mode), and when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, a predetermined effect (transfer effect) is provided by the display means. Is executed to switch the effect design from a predetermined display mode to a specific display mode, so that there are more types (3 types) of the predetermined display mode than types (1 type) of the specific display mode. It has become. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment shifts to the high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all the jackpot games. When a game ball passes through a specific area provided inside the second big winning opening, the gaming machine may shift to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game.

  In addition, the game is shifted to the high-probability game state after the end of all jackpot games, and the high-probability game state is normally terminated by ending the high-probability game state when the winning is performed in the drop lottery executed at the start of the special symbol change display in the high-probability game state A gaming machine that returns to the gaming state may be used.

  In addition, when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, the state is shifted to the low probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the type of the jackpot special symbol is the specific symbol, the next time after the end of the jackpot game, A gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state that continues up to the jackpot game may be used.

  Also, in the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, the gaming machine may be configured to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the first special symbol change display and the second special symbol change display, or may give priority to the first special symbol change display. May be executed.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine such as the gaming machine Y, but can also be used for a spinning-type gaming machine (a so-called slot machine). Further, the present invention can be used for a Jiyan ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

Y game machine 6 first starting opening 6a first starting opening detecting sensor 7 second starting opening 7a second starting opening detecting sensor 8 big winning opening 10 winning gate 14 image display device 15 sound output device 16 effect lighting device 70 second Starting port control device 80 Winning port control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 effect control board 102a sub CPU
102b Sub ROM
102c sub RAM
140 display unit 141 first reserved icon display area 142 moving icon display area 143 second reserved icon display area

Claims (1)

When the change display of the symbol executed based on the establishment of the start condition becomes a predetermined special result, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player,
Game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
A variable effect executing means for displaying an effect symbol on a display means and capable of executing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol during the variable display of the symbol;
A special effect display means for displaying a special effect symbol on the display means, and a variable display of the special effect symbol corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the symbol,
Effect mode control means capable of controlling the effect mode for executing the variable effect to any of a plurality of effect modes,
The effect mode in the normal game state includes at least a first effect mode,
The production mode in the specific game state includes at least a second production mode,
The fluctuation effect execution means,
Displaying the effect symbols in a first display mode in the first effect mode;
In the second effect mode, the effect symbols are displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode,
When the game machine returns from the power-off state, the effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode when controlled to the first effect mode, and the effect symbol is controlled when the game device is controlled to the second effect mode. Is displayed in the second display mode, wherein the identification information of the effect symbol is common numerical information,
The type of the display pattern of the effect symbol in the normal game state is more than the type of the display pattern of the effect symbol in the specific game state,
The special fluctuation display means,
When the game machine returns from a power-off, when the control is switched to the first effect mode and when the device is controlled to the second effect mode, the identification information of the special effect symbol is shared with common numeric information. And
The production design,
The total number of types that can be derived during the variable display displayed in the second display mode is smaller than the total number of types that can be derived during the variable display displayed in the first display mode. A gaming machine characterized by the following.